1 #LyX 2.4 created this file. For more info see https://www.lyx.org/
5 \save_transient_properties true
6 \origin /systemlyxdir/doc/
9 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
11 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
12 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
13 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
14 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
15 % the documentation team
16 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
18 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
19 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
21 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
22 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
23 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
24 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
26 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
30 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
31 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
33 % for customized page headers/footers
34 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
36 % change header rule width
37 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
39 % used to have extra space in table cells
40 \@ifundefined{extrarowheight}
41 {\usepackage{array}}{}
42 \setlength{\extrarowheight}{2pt}
44 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
45 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
46 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
48 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
50 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
51 \use_default_options false
57 \maintain_unincluded_children no
59 \language_package default
62 \font_roman "lmodern" "default"
63 \font_sans "default" "default"
64 \font_typewriter "default" "default"
65 \font_math "auto" "auto"
66 \font_default_family default
67 \use_non_tex_fonts false
71 \font_typewriter_osf false
72 \font_sf_scale 100 100
73 \font_tt_scale 100 100
75 \use_dash_ligatures false
77 \default_output_format default
79 \bibtex_command bibtex
80 \index_command makeindex
81 \float_placement class
82 \float_alignment class
86 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
87 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
91 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
92 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
93 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
98 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
99 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
102 \use_package amsmath 1
103 \use_package amssymb 1
104 \use_package cancel 1
106 \use_package mathdots 1
107 \use_package mathtools 1
108 \use_package mhchem 1
109 \use_package stackrel 1
110 \use_package stmaryrd 1
111 \use_package undertilde 1
113 \cite_engine_type default
117 \paperorientation portrait
123 \notefontcolor #0000ff
127 \color #00ff00 #ff00ff
132 \color #aa55ff #55aa00
140 \paragraph_separation skip
143 \math_numbering_side default
144 \quotes_style english
148 \paperpagestyle default
150 \tracking_changes true
151 \output_changes false
153 \postpone_fragile_content false
157 \docbook_table_output 0
158 \docbook_mathml_prefix 1
159 \author -1402925745 "Günter Milde"
160 \author -712698321 "Jürgen Spitzmüller"
161 \author -584632292 "Richard Kimberly Heck"
162 \author -563046850 "Jean-Marc LASGOUTTES"
163 \author -131811572 "Yuriy Skalko"
165 \author 5863344 "Enrico Forestieri"
166 \author 34634807 "Jean-Pierre"
167 \author 244031559 "Yuriy"
168 \author 1675569489 "Stephan Witt"
179 by the \SpecialChar LyX
184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
186 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation, please
187 send them to the \SpecialChar LyX
188 Documentation mailing list:
189 \begin_inset CommandInset href
191 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
203 \begin_inset Newline newline
207 \begin_inset Newline newline
211 \change_deleted -131811572 1600339801
213 \change_inserted -131811572 1600339801
217 \begin_inset Note Note
220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
221 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
222 \begin_inset Newline newline
227 https://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/Manuals#UserGuide
235 \begin_layout Standard
236 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
237 LatexCommand tableofcontents
244 \begin_layout Chapter
248 \begin_layout Section
249 What is \SpecialChar LyX
253 \begin_layout Standard
255 is a document preparation system.
256 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar softhyphen
257 scripts, publishable books, business
258 letters and proposals,
259 \change_deleted 5863208 1598113909
263 It is unlike most other
264 \begin_inset Quotes eld
268 \begin_inset Quotes erd
271 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core
273 That means that when you type a section header, you mark it as a
274 \begin_inset Quotes eld
278 \begin_inset Quotes erd
282 \begin_inset Quotes eld
286 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
289 pt type, left justified, 5
290 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
294 \begin_inset Quotes erd
299 takes care of the typesetting for you; so you deal only with concepts,
303 \begin_layout Standard
304 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
309 If you haven't read it yet, you need to.
313 \begin_layout Standard
318 manual describes several things in addition to \SpecialChar LyX
319 's philosophy: most importantly,
320 the format of all of the manuals.
321 If you don't read it, you will have a difficult time navigating the manuals.
322 Additionally it provides a high level content description of the other
323 manuals giving the user an idea of where to look for specific information.
326 \begin_layout Section
331 \begin_layout Standard
332 Like most applications, \SpecialChar LyX
333 has the familiar menu bar across the top of its
335 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
336 There is of course a work area for editing documents complete with a vertical
340 \begin_layout Standard
341 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
342 This is not a bug or an oversight, it is intentional.
343 When you read a book, you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the
345 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion, hence the need for
346 only a vertical scrollbar.
349 \begin_layout Standard
350 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
351 The first case is large images.
352 To avoid images being displayed larger than your screen, left click on
353 the image and use the option
364 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than
367 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through both.
370 \begin_layout Standard
371 For a brief description of all \SpecialChar LyX
372 menus and toolbar buttons, have a look at
378 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
380 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
387 \begin_layout Section
391 \begin_layout Standard
392 The help system consists of the \SpecialChar LyX
394 You can read all of the manuals from inside \SpecialChar LyX
396 Just select the manual you want to read from the
403 \begin_layout Section
404 Basic \SpecialChar LyX
406 \begin_inset CommandInset label
408 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
415 \begin_layout Standard
416 Almost all features of \SpecialChar LyX
417 can be configured via the menu
419 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
423 \begin_inset Index idx
426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
433 is able to inspect your system to see what programs, \SpecialChar LaTeX
435 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
436 packages are available.
437 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences
439 Although this configuration was performed when \SpecialChar LyX
440 was installed on your system,
441 you might have some items that you installed locally, e.
442 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
446 \begin_inset space \space{}
449 new \SpecialChar LaTeX
450 classes, which are not seen by \SpecialChar LyX
452 To force \SpecialChar LyX
453 to re-inspect your system use
455 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
459 \begin_inset Index idx
462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
463 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
469 Then restart \SpecialChar LyX
470 to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
473 \begin_layout Section
476 \begin_inset CommandInset label
478 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
485 \begin_layout Standard
486 You can edit documents in \SpecialChar LyX
487 without having \SpecialChar LaTeX
488 installed but you will not be
490 \change_deleted 5863208 1598122369
491 or print your documents
495 \change_deleted 5863208 1598122520
496 Some \SpecialChar LyX
497 documents use DocBook instead of \SpecialChar LaTeX
499 \begin_inset Quotes eld
503 \begin_inset Quotes erd
506 which can produce PDFs and the like.
509 Even without \SpecialChar LaTeX
511 \change_deleted 5863208 1598122546
514 every \SpecialChar LyX
515 document can still be output as plain text
516 \change_inserted 5863208 1598122500
522 \begin_layout Standard
523 Some document classes may depend upon specific \SpecialChar LaTeX
525 \change_deleted 5863208 1598122571
529 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required
530 files installed, but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
533 \begin_layout Standard
534 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
535 packages that \SpecialChar LyX
536 finds on your system are listed in a file you can view
539 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
547 If you are missing needed packages then you must install them and then
548 reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
551 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
555 \begin_inset Index idx
558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
559 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
567 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
574 manual for more information on installing additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
578 \begin_layout Chapter
579 How to work with \SpecialChar LyX
583 \begin_layout Section
584 Basic File Operations
585 \begin_inset Index idx
588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
597 \begin_layout Standard
602 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations common to any word
603 processor as well as some more advanced operations:
606 \begin_layout Itemize
628 \begin_layout Itemize
644 arg "dialog-show lyxfiles templates"
650 \begin_layout Itemize
672 \begin_layout Itemize
680 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352530
684 \begin_layout Itemize
686 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352546
698 \begin_layout Itemize
710 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353355
714 \begin_layout Itemize
716 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353357
724 \begin_layout Itemize
746 \begin_layout Itemize
758 arg "buffer-write-as"
762 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352570
766 \begin_layout Itemize
768 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352997
780 \change_inserted 34634807 1620202805
784 \begin_layout Itemize
786 \change_inserted 34634807 1620202811
794 \begin_layout Itemize
808 \begin_layout Itemize
822 \begin_layout Standard
823 They all do pretty much the same thing as other word processors, with a
824 few minor differences.
827 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
838 command lists the available templates.
839 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features
840 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353491
841 and possibly propose text fragments
843 for the document, features
844 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353500
847 you would otherwise need to
848 \change_deleted -712698321 1553353510
850 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353510
854 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353505
858 They can be of use for certain classes, especially those for writing letters
864 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
866 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
872 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353657
873 You can also add your own templates to this list by means of storing a
877 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
885 \begin_layout Standard
886 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
895 \begin_inset Quotes eld
899 \begin_inset Quotes erd
903 \begin_inset Quotes eld
907 \begin_inset Quotes erd
911 \begin_inset Quotes eld
915 \begin_inset Quotes erd
918 Unless you tell \SpecialChar LyX
919 to open a file or create a new one, that big
920 \change_deleted 5863208 1598174669
924 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174681
928 \change_deleted 5863208 1598174691
939 \begin_layout Standard
961 \change_deleted 5863208 1598174707
963 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174708
966 people work on the same document at the same time.
970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
971 If you plan to do this, you should check out the Version Control feature
974 \change_deleted 5863208 1598174722
979 \change_deleted 5863208 1598174782
980 Read Additional Features\SpecialChar endofsentence
982 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174763
984 \begin_inset Flex Emph
987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
989 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174763
990 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
999 \begin_inset Flex Emph
1002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1004 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174763
1012 help manual\SpecialChar endofsentence
1023 \begin_inset space ~
1027 \begin_inset space ~
1032 will reload the document from disk.
1033 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document
1034 and want to restore it to the last save
1035 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174796
1042 \begin_inset space ~
1047 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify
1048 them as your changes.
1051 \begin_layout Section
1052 Basic Editing Features
1053 \begin_inset Index idx
1056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1063 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1065 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
1072 \begin_layout Standard
1073 Like most modern word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
1074 can perform cut and paste operations
1075 on blocks of text, can move by character, word, or page of text, and can
1076 delete whole words as well as individual characters.
1077 The next four sections cover the basic \SpecialChar LyX
1078 editing features and how to access
1080 We will start with cut and paste.
1083 \begin_layout Standard
1084 As you might expect, the
1088 menu and the standard toolbar have the cut and paste commands, along with
1089 various other editing features.
1090 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
1094 \begin_layout Itemize
1100 \begin_inset Index idx
1103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1132 \begin_layout Itemize
1138 \begin_inset Index idx
1141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1170 \begin_layout Itemize
1176 \begin_inset Index idx
1179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1204 \begin_layout Itemize
1208 \begin_inset space ~
1214 \begin_layout Itemize
1218 \begin_inset space ~
1224 \begin_layout Itemize
1228 \begin_inset space ~
1232 \begin_inset space ~
1238 \begin_inset Index idx
1241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1250 \begin_inset Index idx
1253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1268 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
1278 arg "dialog-toggle findreplace"
1284 \begin_layout Standard
1285 The first three are self-explanatory.
1286 You can also copy text between \SpecialChar LyX
1287 and other programs using
1308 put two versions of text into the clipboard (formatted and unformatted)
1309 so that other programs can choose the most suitable form.
1314 supports formatted and unformatted text as well as graphics.
1315 It tries to interpret the clipboard contents in an intelligent way.
1316 For example if the clipboard contains text in a Comma Separated Values
1317 (CSV) format and the cursor is inside a table, the text will be pasted
1318 into individual cells.
1322 \begin_inset space ~
1327 shows you a list of the last several strings you have pasted.
1328 You can insert one at the current cursor position by clicking on a list
1332 \begin_layout Standard
1336 \begin_inset space ~
1341 may also contain optional items for specific formats depending on the clipboard
1343 Possible formats include HTML, \SpecialChar LaTeX
1345 \begin_inset space ~
1352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1358 , PNG, JPEG and EMF.
1359 These menu items are useful if the clipboard contains the same contents
1360 in different formats and you want to select one format explicitly.
1362 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1366 \begin_inset space \space{}
1369 some programs put an image into the clipboard as graphics and as a short
1370 text which is often meaningless.)
1373 \begin_layout Standard
1377 \begin_inset space ~
1380 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1382 \begin_inset space ~
1386 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1390 \begin_inset space ~
1399 with the only difference being that it acts on text only.
1400 It will paste the text in the clipboard such that the whole text selection
1401 is inserted as one paragraph.
1402 A new paragraph is only started where there is a blank line in the text.
1406 \begin_inset space ~
1411 line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph.
1412 This is useful when copying contents of tables from webpages to a table
1418 \begin_inset space ~
1421 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1423 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1427 \begin_inset space ~
1435 \begin_inset space ~
1438 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1441 paste from the primary selection.
1442 This is normally the currently selected text.
1445 \begin_layout Standard
1448 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1450 \begin_inset space ~
1454 \begin_inset space ~
1462 \begin_inset space ~
1466 \begin_inset space ~
1472 \change_inserted -712698321 1613466403
1474 \change_deleted -712698321 1613466406
1478 Once you have found a word or expression, \SpecialChar LyX
1481 \change_deleted -712698321 1613466954
1486 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1489 \begin_inset space ~
1500 \change_inserted -712698321 1613466364
1502 \begin_inset space ~
1506 \change_deleted -712698321 1613466368
1508 \begin_inset space ~
1516 \change_inserted -712698321 1613466698
1530 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126824
1534 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126824
1538 \change_inserted -712698321 1613466747
1542 \begin_inset space ~
1554 arg "word-find-backward"
1557 shortcut) to search backwards
1561 \change_inserted -712698321 1613466989
1562 Even if you close the widget,
1571 arg "word-find-backward"
1574 will search further.
1579 \begin_layout Standard
1581 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467040
1586 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1589 \begin_inset space ~
1594 field and searches the next match.
1600 \begin_inset space ~
1605 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
1607 \change_deleted -712698321 1613467539
1609 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467537
1613 \begin_layout Standard
1615 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467208
1616 Furthermore, the following options are available:
1619 \begin_layout Itemize
1622 \change_deleted -712698321 1613467225
1628 \begin_inset space ~
1634 \change_deleted -712698321 1613467228
1637 can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search word.
1638 If the toggle is set, searching for
1639 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1647 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1650 will not match the word
1651 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1659 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1664 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467232
1668 \begin_layout Itemize
1671 \change_deleted -712698321 1613467234
1675 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467207
1679 \change_deleted -712698321 1613467237
1684 can be used to force \SpecialChar LyX
1685 to only find complete words, e.
1686 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1690 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126824
1694 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1702 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1706 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1714 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1719 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467241
1723 \begin_layout Itemize
1726 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467258
1731 will limit search and replace, or replace all, to the current cursor selection.
1734 \begin_layout Itemize
1737 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467288
1742 starts searching (forwards) immediately on input, without pressing the
1746 \begin_inset space ~
1754 \begin_layout Itemize
1756 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467400
1761 starts from the beginning/end of the document if the end/beginning has
1762 been reached without asking.
1763 If this is not checked, a dialog will pop up asking you what to do.
1764 Note that responding to this dialog makes the cursor leave the search widget,
1765 so you need to put it back manually.
1768 \begin_layout Standard
1769 \paragraph_spacing single
1771 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467875
1772 The widget also has a
1776 button that lets you shrink the widget to only the first row (the search
1777 widget), hiding replace and options.
1779 \change_deleted 34634807 1620400535
1781 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467875
1786 button brings you back to the full size.
1789 \begin_layout Standard
1790 \paragraph_spacing single
1793 also offers an advanced
1796 \begin_inset space ~
1800 \begin_inset space ~
1805 feature that is described in section
1806 \begin_inset space ~
1810 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1812 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1819 \begin_layout Standard
1820 Things like notes, floats, etc.
1821 \begin_inset space \space{}
1825 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1829 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1833 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
1835 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an
1840 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
1847 \begin_layout Standard
1851 arg "inset-select-all"
1854 while the cursor is in normal text selects the whole document.
1855 When the cursor is inside an inset
1858 arg "inset-select-all"
1861 selects the content of the inset.
1865 arg "inset-select-all"
1868 consecutively will increase the selection scope to the whole inset and
1869 then to the whole document.
1873 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
1876 selects the whole document in every case and puts the cursor to the end
1880 \begin_layout Section
1882 \begin_inset Index idx
1885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1892 \begin_inset Index idx
1895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1902 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1904 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
1911 \begin_layout Standard
1912 If you make a mistake, you can easily recover from it.
1914 has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
1917 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1920 or the toolbar button
1927 If you accidentally undo too much, use
1929 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1932 or the toolbar button
1939 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1943 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1946 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
1947 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1950 steps to minimize memory overhead.
1953 \begin_layout Standard
1955 \change_deleted -131811572 1600338243
1956 Note that if you undo all changes to arrive at the document as it was last
1958 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1962 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1965 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
1966 This is a consequence of the 100
1967 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1970 step undo limit mentioned above.
1973 \begin_layout Standard
1982 work on almost everything in \SpecialChar LyX
1984 However they will not undo or redo text character by character, but by
1988 \begin_layout Section
1990 \begin_inset Index idx
1993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2002 \begin_layout Standard
2003 These are the most basic mouse operations.
2006 \begin_layout Enumerate
2011 \begin_layout Itemize
2016 once anywhere in the edit window.
2017 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
2021 \begin_layout Enumerate
2026 \begin_layout Itemize
2033 highlights the text between the old and new mouse positions.
2036 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
2039 to create a copy of the text in \SpecialChar LyX
2040 's buffer (and the clipboard).
2042 \change_inserted 5863208 1598175891
2043 You can also use the context menu triggered by right clicking on the selected
2049 \begin_layout Itemize
2050 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into \SpecialChar LyX
2053 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
2060 \begin_layout Enumerate
2061 Insets (Footnotes, Notes, Floats, etc.)
2065 \begin_layout Standard
2066 Right-click on them to set their properties.
2067 Check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
2071 \begin_layout Section
2073 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2075 name "sec:Navigating"
2080 \begin_inset Index idx
2083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2092 \begin_layout Standard
2094 offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
2097 \begin_layout Itemize
2102 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can
2103 click to jump to the corresponding document part.
2106 \begin_layout Itemize
2107 The “Outline”, which is accessed either by the menu
2109 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
2111 \begin_inset space ~
2116 or by the toolbar button
2119 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
2125 \begin_layout Itemize
2126 You can set bookmarks in your document under
2128 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
2131 and use the same menu to return to them.
2132 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
2135 \begin_layout Standard
2139 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
2144 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
2145 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
2147 \begin_inset space ~
2152 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
2153 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled
2154 to another document part to look for something and want to go back to your
2155 last editing position.
2158 \begin_layout Standard
2163 key the cursor will be vertically centered in \SpecialChar LyX
2167 \begin_layout Subsection
2169 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2171 name "subsec:The-Outliner"
2176 \begin_inset Index idx
2179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2180 Navigating ! Outline
2186 \begin_inset Index idx
2189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2198 \begin_layout Standard
2199 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window you can choose between
2200 several different lists including other TOC-like objects such as lists
2201 of tables and figures, footnotes, labels and cross-references (see section
2202 \begin_inset space ~
2206 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2208 reference "sec:Cross-References"
2212 ), notes, or citations (see section
2213 \begin_inset space ~
2217 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2219 reference "sec:Bibliography"
2224 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
2228 \begin_layout Standard
2229 In many cases right clicking on elements in the Outline opens a context
2230 menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
2231 For example with citations, the context menu allows you to open the citation
2232 dialog and to modify the citation.
2235 \begin_layout Standard
2240 field at the top allows you to filter which entries appear in the outline.
2241 For example, if you are displaying the list of
2243 Labels and References
2245 and wish to see only references to subsections, you can enter the text
2247 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2251 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2254 in the filter and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
2257 \begin_layout Standard
2258 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons that allow you to further
2259 control the display.
2264 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
2265 Otherwise the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the document.
2270 option keeps it in the current view state.
2271 Keeping means that when you have the subsections of sections
2272 \begin_inset space ~
2275 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
2276 \begin_inset space ~
2279 3, the subsections of sections
2280 \begin_inset space ~
2283 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
2288 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
2289 \begin_inset space ~
2293 Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
2295 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2299 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2303 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
2306 \begin_layout Standard
2313 button refreshes the TOC (
2314 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2316 \change_inserted 5863208 1598176913
2320 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2322 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2326 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2330 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2334 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2338 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2340 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2344 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2346 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2350 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2352 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2356 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2360 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2362 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2366 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2370 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2374 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2378 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2382 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2386 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2390 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2394 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2396 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2400 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections
2414 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
2415 For example, you can move section
2416 \begin_inset space ~
2420 \begin_inset space ~
2423 2.4 or after section
2424 \begin_inset space ~
2429 will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
2442 (or the corresponding key bindings
2450 ) you can change the level of sections.
2451 You can make section
2452 \begin_inset space ~
2456 \begin_inset space ~
2460 \begin_inset space ~
2466 \begin_layout Standard
2467 By right-clicking on a section in the outliner you can select the whole
2468 section to copy, cut or delete it.
2471 \begin_layout Subsection
2472 Horizontal Scrolling
2473 \begin_inset Index idx
2476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2477 Navigating ! Horizontal Scrolling
2485 \begin_layout Standard
2487 does not have a horizontal scrollbar because standard output page formats
2489 \begin_inset space ~
2492 A4 are not as wide as PC or laptop screens.
2493 Therefore you will have trouble with the output of your document if document
2494 parts exceed the width of the \SpecialChar LyX
2498 \begin_layout Standard
2499 There are of course exceptions where horizontal scrolling is necessary.
2503 \begin_layout Itemize
2505 is used on a small tablet computer
2508 \begin_layout Itemize
2509 Wide tables that are rotated 90° to fit a whole page
2513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2521 \begin_inset space ~
2534 \begin_layout Itemize
2535 Math constructs with long command names
2538 \begin_layout Standard
2539 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
2540 has an mechanism that scrolls automatically when the cursor
2542 As an example shrink the \SpecialChar LyX
2543 window so that table
2544 \begin_inset space ~
2548 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2550 reference "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2555 You will now see a dotted red line on the right and/or left side of the
2557 Put the cursor into the table and move it with the Tab or the arrow keys
2558 to see the horizontal scrolling of the table.
2561 \begin_layout Standard
2562 \begin_inset Float table
2569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2570 \begin_inset Caption Standard
2572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2573 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2575 name "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2579 Horizontal scrolling test.
2587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2589 \begin_inset Tabular
2590 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="3">
2591 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
2592 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2593 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2594 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2596 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2605 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2614 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
2617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2636 \begin_layout Section
2637 Input/Word Completion
2638 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2640 name "sec:Input-Completion"
2645 \begin_inset Index idx
2648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2655 \begin_inset Index idx
2658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2689 \begin_layout Standard
2691 provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently
2693 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that
2694 is used to propose completions.
2697 \begin_layout Standard
2698 Input completion can be activated in the \SpecialChar LyX
2701 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
2706 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2713 \begin_inset space ~
2717 \begin_inset space ~
2722 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
2726 \begin_inset space ~
2731 the completions are always shown in a popup.
2732 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
2736 \begin_inset space ~
2742 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and
2743 popup completion, you can set the minimal number of characters a word must
2744 have that it will be taken into account for a completion and you can choose
2745 if long completions should be abbreviated.
2748 \begin_layout Standard
2750 displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there are
2751 completions available.
2756 key to accept a proposed completion.
2757 If several completions are possible, a popup is opened showing them.
2758 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys
2759 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126826
2762 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
2769 \begin_layout Standard
2770 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the correspond
2771 ing options for text.
2773 \change_inserted -563046850 1560340017
2775 \change_deleted -563046850 1560340019
2777 \change_inserted -563046850 1560340019
2780 he special math option
2784 enables characters to be composed.
2786 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180192
2788 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180192
2792 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180208
2795 you want to insert the character
2796 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
2800 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180217
2803 input the characters
2804 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2812 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2816 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180228
2818 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180229
2822 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180234
2824 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180235
2829 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180245
2831 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180246
2834 his is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use of the
2837 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180267
2839 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180267
2842 supported character combinations can be found in the file
2847 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180288
2849 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180288
2853 's installation folder.
2855 \change_deleted -563046850 1560340086
2856 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation
2863 \change_inserted -563046850 1560340324
2868 after autocorrection has done its magic leaves the un-corrected sequence.
2869 In the example above,
2874 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2882 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2890 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2898 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2906 \begin_layout Section
2908 \begin_inset Index idx
2911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2918 \begin_inset Index idx
2921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2950 \begin_inset Index idx
2953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2984 \begin_layout Standard
2985 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
2999 , which can be changed in the \SpecialChar LyX
3002 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
3006 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in section
3007 \begin_inset space ~
3011 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3013 reference "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
3020 \begin_layout Standard
3024 \begin_inset space ~
3032 \begin_inset space ~
3053 , do exactly what you expect them to do.
3057 \begin_layout Labeling
3058 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3062 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
3063 LatexCommand nomenclature
3065 description "Tabulator key"
3072 There is no such thing as a tab stop in \SpecialChar LyX
3074 If you do not understand this, go read sections
3075 \begin_inset space ~
3079 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3081 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
3086 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3088 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
3092 , especially section
3093 \begin_inset space ~
3097 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3099 reference "subsec:Lists"
3105 If you are still confused, look in the
3110 \begin_inset Newline newline
3118 key is only used to accept proposed input completions, to move the cursor
3119 in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or
3123 \begin_layout Labeling
3124 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3128 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
3129 LatexCommand nomenclature
3131 description "Escape key"
3139 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3143 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3146 It is used, generically, to cancel operations.
3147 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
3150 \begin_layout Labeling
3151 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3156 These move the cursor, respectively, to the beginning and end of a line,
3157 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning
3161 \begin_layout Standard
3162 There are three modifier keys:
3165 \begin_layout Labeling
3166 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3172 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3180 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3184 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
3185 LatexCommand nomenclature
3187 description "Control key"
3192 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses depending
3193 on which keys it is used in combination with:
3197 \begin_layout Itemize
3206 , it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
3209 \begin_layout Itemize
3218 , it moves by words instead of characters.
3221 \begin_layout Itemize
3230 , it moves to the beginning and the end of the document, respectively.
3234 \begin_layout Labeling
3235 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3241 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3249 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3253 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
3254 LatexCommand nomenclature
3256 description "Shift key"
3261 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select
3262 the text between the old and new cursor positions.
3265 \begin_layout Labeling
3266 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3272 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3280 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3284 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
3285 LatexCommand nomenclature
3287 description "Alt or Meta key"
3292 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards, unless
3293 your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
3294 If you have both keys, you will need to try out which one actually performs
3300 \begin_inset Newline newline
3303 This key does many different things, but it also activates the
3305 menu accelerator keys
3308 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a
3309 menu or menu item, it selects that menu item.
3313 \begin_layout Standard
3314 For example, the sequence
3315 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3321 \begin_inset space ~
3325 \begin_inset space ~
3331 \begin_inset space ~
3339 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3343 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3347 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3352 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3358 \begin_inset space ~
3364 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3374 \begin_layout Standard
3379 manual lists all other things bound to the
3387 \begin_layout Standard
3388 You will learn more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use \SpecialChar LyX
3390 most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar at the bottom
3392 's main window describing the name of the action you have just triggered
3393 and any existing key bindings for that action.
3395 menus also list the defined key bindings.
3396 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used
3397 in this documentation so you should not have any problems understanding
3399 However notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned, so
3400 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3408 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3415 followed by a capital
3422 \begin_layout Chapter
3425 \begin_inset Index idx
3428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3438 \begin_layout Section
3440 \begin_inset Index idx
3443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3452 \begin_layout Subsection
3456 \begin_layout Standard
3457 Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you
3458 need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
3459 Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings,
3460 numbering schemes, and so on.
3461 Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments,
3462 and format the title of your document differently.
3465 \begin_layout Standard
3470 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
3471 By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties,
3472 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
3473 If you don't choose a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
3474 picks one for you by default.
3475 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
3478 \begin_layout Subsection
3480 \begin_inset Index idx
3483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3490 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3492 name "sec:Document-Classes"
3499 \begin_layout Standard
3500 You can select a class using the
3502 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3503 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
3507 \begin_inset Index idx
3510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3517 Select the class you want to use, and make any fine tunings of the options
3521 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3525 \begin_layout Standard
3526 There are four standard document classes in \SpecialChar LyX
3531 \begin_layout Description
3532 Article for basic articles
3535 \begin_layout Description
3536 Report for basic reports
3539 \begin_layout Description
3540 Book for writing a book
3543 \begin_layout Description
3544 Letter for US-style letters
3547 \begin_layout Standard
3548 There are also some non-standard classes, which \SpecialChar LyX
3549 only uses if you have installed
3550 the corresponding \SpecialChar LaTeX
3551 class files, though most \SpecialChar LaTeX
3552 distributions will include
3554 Here are some of the classes.
3555 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
3557 Special Document Classes
3566 \begin_layout Description
3567 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
3570 \begin_layout Description
3571 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry
3575 \begin_layout Description
3576 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical
3580 \begin_layout Description
3581 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American
3582 Mathematical Society (AMS).
3583 There are three article layouts available.
3584 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that
3585 prepends the section number to the number of the result.
3586 All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced
3587 together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence.
3589 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3592 sequential numbering
3593 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3596 scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers
3597 them throughout the article in a single sequence.
3598 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
3599 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
3602 \begin_layout Description
3603 Beamer Layout for presentations
3606 \begin_layout Description
3607 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
3608 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3609 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3610 with \SpecialChar LyX
3614 \begin_layout Description
3615 Chess Layout to write about chess games
3618 \begin_layout Description
3620 \begin_inset space ~
3623 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
3626 \begin_layout Description
3627 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
3630 \begin_layout Description
3631 Foils Used to make transparencies
3634 \begin_layout Description
3635 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
3636 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3637 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3638 with \SpecialChar LyX
3642 \begin_layout Description
3643 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical
3644 and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
3647 \begin_layout Description
3648 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
3651 \begin_layout Description
3652 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
3655 \begin_layout Description
3656 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes, offers many useful features
3657 like caption formatting, automatic print space calculation etc.
3658 (Is used by this document.)
3661 \begin_layout Description
3662 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
3665 \begin_layout Description
3666 Powerdot Layout for presentations
3669 \begin_layout Description
3674 is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical
3675 Society (APS), American Institute of Physics (AIP), and Optical Society
3677 This class is not completely compatible with all \SpecialChar LyX
3681 \begin_layout Description
3682 Slides Used to make transparencies
3685 \begin_layout Description
3687 \begin_inset space ~
3690 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society
3691 for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
3694 \begin_layout Description
3695 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
3698 \begin_layout Standard
3699 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes
3701 You can find details about the non-standard classes in chapter
3703 Special Document Classes
3710 Here, we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all
3711 of the document classes.
3714 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3718 \begin_layout Standard
3719 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
3721 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3722 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
3724 \begin_inset Index idx
3727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3736 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3740 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3744 If you open a document that uses such a class, you will receive a warning
3745 saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are
3747 So it may seem that something is wrong.
3750 \begin_layout Standard
3753 includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use, and
3758 , are highly specialized.
3760 tries to support as many different types of documents as possible, and
3761 it includes almost one hundred different layout files, with a growing number.
3762 No \SpecialChar LaTeX
3763 distribution will install by default all files that might be needed
3764 by some document class.
3765 There are just too many of them.
3766 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
3769 \begin_layout Standard
3770 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
3771 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3775 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3778 , you just need to install the appropriate package files.
3779 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that
3780 document class for a new file.
3782 will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
3785 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3792 manual for information on how to install them.
3793 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
3799 \begin_layout Standard
3800 Although \SpecialChar LyX
3801 provides support for many different sorts of documents, it does
3802 not include support for every document class people might want to use.
3803 For example, many universities provide \SpecialChar LaTeX
3804 class files to be used for dissertation
3805 s submitted to those universities.
3806 The \SpecialChar LyX
3807 team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
3809 Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have
3813 Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates
3819 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
3822 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3824 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3826 name "subsec:Modules"
3831 \begin_inset Index idx
3834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3843 \begin_layout Standard
3844 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the
3845 chosen document class.
3846 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
3847 This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond
3854 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3858 \begin_inset Index idx
3861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3868 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what
3872 \begin_layout Standard
3873 Some modules require \SpecialChar LaTeX
3874 packages or file format converters that are not always
3875 installed by default.
3877 will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter, and
3878 it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
3879 You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not
3880 be able to export to PDF or print your document, since \SpecialChar LyX
3882 to compile the \SpecialChar LaTeX
3883 file without the missing prerequisites.
3884 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output, then you need to
3885 install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
3888 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
3892 \begin_inset Index idx
3895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3896 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
3903 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126826
3907 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126829
3911 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126829
3920 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126829
3922 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126829
3933 manual for more information on installing required packages.
3936 \begin_layout Standard
3937 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
3940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3945 Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
3947 will advise you about these things.
3955 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3957 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3959 name "subsec:Local-Layout"
3964 \begin_inset Index idx
3967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3968 Document ! Local Layout
3976 \begin_layout Standard
3977 Modules are to \SpecialChar LyX
3978 much as packages are to \SpecialChar LaTeX
3979 : They are intended to be used in
3980 a variety of different documents.
3981 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different
3982 documents, you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
3983 Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, but you
3984 need a specific inset or
3985 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757388
3987 \change_inserted 5863208 1598182122
3990 style only that one time.
3991 You want something that is like a document's own \SpecialChar LaTeX
3993 What you want is \SpecialChar LyX
3995 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3999 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4011 manual for information on how to use it.
4014 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4018 \begin_layout Standard
4019 Each class has a default set of options.
4020 Here's a quick table describing them:
4023 \begin_layout Standard
4024 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
4030 \begin_layout Standard
4032 \begin_inset Tabular
4033 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
4034 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
4035 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
4036 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
4037 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
4038 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
4039 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
4041 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4050 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4068 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4086 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4104 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4124 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4141 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4159 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4177 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4195 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4215 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4232 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4250 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4268 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4286 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4306 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4323 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4341 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4359 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4377 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4397 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4414 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4432 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4450 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4468 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4493 \begin_layout Standard
4494 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
4500 \begin_layout Standard
4501 You're probably also wondering what
4502 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4506 \begin_inset space ~
4510 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4514 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
4515 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
4520 heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the
4525 Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section
4535 headings, there are also
4543 headings, and so on.
4544 We will describe these headings fully in section
4545 \begin_inset space ~
4549 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4551 reference "subsec:Headings"
4558 \begin_layout Subsection
4560 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4562 name "subsec:Document-Layout"
4567 \begin_inset Index idx
4570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4577 \begin_inset Index idx
4580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4589 \begin_layout Standard
4590 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
4592 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4599 \begin_inset space ~
4607 \begin_inset space ~
4612 , you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated
4614 This is only necessary if \SpecialChar LyX
4615 doesn't support special options you want to
4616 use for your document.
4617 To learn more about your favorite \SpecialChar LaTeX
4618 -class and its options, you have to read
4622 \begin_layout Standard
4624 \change_deleted -712698321 1597235163
4628 \change_inserted 5863208 1598182166
4632 \begin_inset space ~
4639 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4645 \begin_inset space ~
4650 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
4651 You can choose between the following five options:
4654 \begin_layout Labeling
4655 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4660 Use default page style of current class.
4663 \begin_layout Labeling
4664 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4669 No page numbers or headings.
4672 \begin_layout Labeling
4673 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4681 \begin_layout Labeling
4682 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4687 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
4688 Whether \SpecialChar LyX
4689 uses the current chapter or the current section depends on the
4690 maximum sectioning level of the class.
4693 \begin_layout Labeling
4694 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4699 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you
4700 have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4706 \begin_inset Index idx
4709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4717 How they are defined is explained in section
4718 \begin_inset space ~
4722 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4724 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
4731 \begin_layout Standard
4732 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
4733 \begin_inset space ~
4737 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4739 reference "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4746 \begin_layout Subsection
4747 Paper Size and Orientation
4748 \begin_inset Index idx
4751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4752 Document ! Paper size
4758 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4760 name "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
4767 \begin_layout Standard
4768 You can find the following options in the menu
4771 \begin_inset space ~
4778 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4782 \begin_inset Index idx
4785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4794 \begin_layout Labeling
4795 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4799 \begin_inset space ~
4804 What size paper to print on.
4809 \begin_layout Itemize
4815 \begin_layout Itemize
4821 \begin_layout Itemize
4827 \begin_layout Itemize
4833 \begin_layout Itemize
4836 US letter, US legal, US executive
4839 \begin_layout Itemize
4845 \begin_layout Itemize
4852 \begin_layout Labeling
4853 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4858 To choose whether to output as
4869 \begin_layout Labeling
4870 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4874 \begin_inset space ~
4879 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
4880 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
4883 \begin_layout Subsection
4885 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4887 name "subsec:Margins"
4892 \begin_inset Index idx
4895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4902 \begin_inset Index idx
4905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4914 \begin_layout Standard
4915 Paper margins are set in the menu
4917 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4921 \begin_inset Index idx
4924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4933 \begin_layout Standard
4934 If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings
4935 because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking
4936 the paper format and the font size into account.
4939 \begin_layout Subsection
4943 \begin_layout Standard
4944 If you change a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4945 has to convert everything into the new
4947 That includes the paragraph environments.
4948 Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document
4949 classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments.
4950 If this is the case, and you change the document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4952 paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
4953 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4957 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4961 The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to
4963 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you
4964 will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraph
4965 s manually to a style present in your new document class.
4968 \begin_layout Section
4969 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
4970 \begin_inset Index idx
4973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4974 Paragraph ! Indentation
4982 \begin_layout Subsection
4984 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4986 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
4993 \begin_layout Standard
4994 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to
4995 say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
4998 \begin_layout Standard
4999 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
5000 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
5001 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
5002 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
5006 paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list,
5012 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
5013 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document
5014 language than English.
5016 takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language used.
5019 \begin_layout Standard
5020 The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings
5021 and text — in fact, all the spacing for just about everything —is pre-coded
5022 into \SpecialChar LyX
5024 As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
5027 In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a
5029 That way, \SpecialChar LyX
5030 can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure figures
5031 fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom of
5036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5038 does this when \SpecialChar LyX
5039 goes to produce a printable file.
5044 However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
5046 gives you the ability globally to change
5050 these pre-coded spacings.
5051 We will explain more later.
5054 \begin_layout Subsection
5055 Paragraph Separation
5056 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5058 name "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
5063 \begin_inset Index idx
5066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5067 Paragraph ! Separation
5075 \begin_layout Standard
5083 \begin_inset space ~
5091 \begin_inset space ~
5098 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5102 \begin_inset Index idx
5105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5111 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs, respectively.
5114 \begin_layout Subsection
5118 \begin_layout Standard
5119 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
5122 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
5124 \begin_inset space ~
5129 dialog and toggle the
5132 \begin_inset space ~
5137 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
5140 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
5144 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this
5145 button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling
5149 \begin_layout Standard
5150 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph
5151 if you need to do some fine-tuning.
5154 \begin_layout Subsection
5156 \begin_inset Index idx
5159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5160 Paragraph ! Line spacing
5168 \begin_layout Standard
5171 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5175 \begin_inset Index idx
5178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5187 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
5191 \begin_inset space ~
5200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5201 You need to have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
5207 \begin_inset Index idx
5210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5217 installed to use this feature.
5222 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
5224 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
5226 \begin_inset space ~
5231 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing
5232 is normally defined in the environment's style.
5235 \begin_layout Section
5236 Paragraph Environments
5237 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5239 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
5244 \begin_inset Index idx
5247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5248 Paragraph ! Environments
5254 \begin_inset Index idx
5257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5258 Paragraph environments|(
5266 \begin_layout Subsection
5270 \begin_layout Standard
5271 Paragraph environments correspond to the
5274 \begin_layout Standard
5283 } \SpecialChar ldots
5293 \begin_inset Newline newline
5296 command sequence in \SpecialChar LaTeX
5298 If you don't know \SpecialChar LaTeX
5299 , or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally
5300 alien to you, we urge you to read the
5309 also contains many more examples than this section does.
5312 \begin_layout Standard
5313 A paragraph environment is simply a
5314 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5318 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5321 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
5322 This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering
5323 scheme, labels, and so on.
5324 Additionally, you can
5325 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5329 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5332 the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment
5333 to inherit some of the properties of another.
5334 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy
5335 tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hangovers from the days
5337 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular
5339 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
5342 \begin_layout Standard
5343 To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box
5344 \begin_inset Graphics
5345 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
5351 at the left end of the toolbar.
5353 will change the environment of the
5357 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
5358 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if
5359 you select them before choosing the new environment.
5362 \begin_layout Standard
5371 create a new paragraph using the
5375 paragraph environment.
5377 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5381 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5384 because if you are in one of these environments:
5387 \begin_layout Itemize
5393 \begin_layout Itemize
5399 \begin_layout Itemize
5405 \begin_layout Itemize
5411 \begin_layout Itemize
5417 \begin_layout Itemize
5423 \begin_layout Itemize
5429 \begin_layout Standard
5431 keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
5435 , rather than resetting it to
5440 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
5441 \begin_inset space ~
5445 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5447 reference "sec:Nesting"
5454 \begin_layout Subsection
5458 \begin_layout Standard
5459 The default paragraph environment is
5464 It creates a plain paragraph.
5466 resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses.
5467 In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in
5468 this manual) are in the
5475 \begin_layout Standard
5476 You can nest a paragraph using the
5480 environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything
5488 \begin_layout Subsection
5490 \begin_inset Index idx
5493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5502 \begin_layout Standard
5503 A \SpecialChar LaTeX
5504 title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the author(s)
5506 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5510 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5513 for thanks or contact information.
5514 For certain types of documents, \SpecialChar LaTeX
5515 places all of this on a separate page
5516 along with today's date.
5517 For other types of documents, the title
5518 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5522 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5525 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
5528 \begin_layout Standard
5530 provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph
5544 Here's how you use them:
5547 \begin_layout Itemize
5548 Put the title of your document in the
5555 \begin_layout Itemize
5556 Put the author name in the
5563 \begin_layout Itemize
5564 If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date,
5565 or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in
5571 Note that using this environment is optional.
5572 If you don't provide any, \SpecialChar LaTeX
5573 will automatically insert today's date.
5574 If you don't want a date, use the option
5576 Suppress default date on front page
5580 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5581 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
5583 \begin_inset space ~
5591 \begin_layout Standard
5592 You can use footnotes to insert
5593 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5597 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5600 or contact information.
5603 \begin_layout Subsection
5605 \begin_inset Index idx
5608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5615 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5617 name "subsec:Headings"
5624 \begin_layout Standard
5625 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
5627 takes care of the numbering for you.
5630 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5632 \begin_inset Index idx
5635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5636 Section headings ! Numbered
5644 \begin_layout Standard
5645 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
5649 \begin_layout Enumerate
5655 \begin_layout Enumerate
5661 \begin_layout Enumerate
5667 \begin_layout Enumerate
5673 \begin_layout Enumerate
5679 \begin_layout Enumerate
5685 \begin_layout Enumerate
5691 \begin_layout Standard
5693 labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods.
5694 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
5695 Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with
5696 \change_inserted 5863208 1598182388
5698 \change_deleted 5863208 1598182398
5700 \change_deleted -131811572 1596358192
5706 \begin_layout Standard
5707 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
5708 For example, suppose you're writing a book.
5709 You group the book into chapters.
5711 does a similar grouping:
5714 \begin_layout Itemize
5719 is divided into either
5730 \begin_layout Itemize
5742 \begin_layout Itemize
5754 \begin_layout Itemize
5766 \begin_layout Itemize
5778 \begin_layout Itemize
5790 \begin_layout Standard
5791 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
5794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5799 Not all document types use the
5803 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
5808 is the top-level heading.
5816 \begin_layout Standard
5821 environment to label a new sub-subsection, \SpecialChar LyX
5822 labels it with its number,
5823 along with the number of the subsection, section and, if applicable, chapter
5825 For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the
5827 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5831 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5837 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5839 \begin_inset Index idx
5842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5843 Section headings ! Unnumbered
5851 \begin_layout Standard
5852 The unnumbered section headings have a
5853 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5857 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5860 at the end of their name.
5861 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in
5862 the table of contents, see section
5863 \begin_inset space ~
5867 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5876 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5877 Changing the Numbering
5878 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5880 name "subsec:Numbering-depth"
5887 \begin_layout Standard
5888 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear
5889 in the Table of Contents.
5890 Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document
5892 Just as certain classes start with
5906 Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
5916 This is something you can change.
5919 \begin_layout Standard
5922 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5926 \begin_inset Index idx
5929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5938 \begin_inset space ~
5942 \begin_inset space ~
5947 you will see two counters.
5952 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy \SpecialChar LyX
5953 numbers a section heading.
5954 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table
5958 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5959 Short Titles of Headings
5960 \begin_inset Index idx
5963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5964 Section headings ! Short titles
5970 \begin_inset Argument 1
5973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5980 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5982 name "sec:Short-Titles"
5989 \begin_layout Standard
5990 Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long.
5991 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
5992 For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section
5993 title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
5996 \begin_layout Standard
5998 allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
5999 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
6000 avoiding the problem mentioned.
6001 To specify a short title, set the cursor behind the title and use the menu
6004 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6006 \begin_inset space ~
6012 This will insert a box labeled
6013 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6017 \begin_inset space ~
6021 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6024 which you can use to enter the short title text.
6025 This also works for captions inside floats.
6026 There can only be one short title per title.
6029 \begin_layout Standard
6030 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
6033 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6037 \begin_layout Standard
6038 The following information applies to all section headings:
6041 \begin_layout Itemize
6042 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
6045 \begin_layout Itemize
6046 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
6049 \begin_layout Itemize
6050 You can only use inline math in these environments.
6053 \begin_layout Itemize
6054 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
6057 \begin_layout Subsection
6061 \begin_layout Standard
6063 has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
6077 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
6078 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
6079 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below
6080 the text they contain.
6081 They also allow nesting, so you can put a
6089 , as well as in some other paragraph environments.
6092 \begin_layout Standard
6093 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do
6102 when you start a new paragraph.
6103 So, you can type in that poem and merrily enter
6107 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
6108 Of course, that means that, once you are done typing in that poem, you
6109 have to change back to the
6113 environment yourself.
6116 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6118 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6125 \begin_inset Index idx
6128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6137 \begin_layout Standard
6138 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's
6139 time for the differences.
6148 are identical except for one difference:
6152 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
6161 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
6164 \begin_layout Standard
6165 Here's an example of the
6178 I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it
6180 See – no indentation!
6184 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
6185 Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and
6186 the other paragraph.
6189 \begin_layout Standard
6190 Here's another example, this time in the
6197 \begin_layout Quotation
6203 If I keep writing, you will see the indentation.
6204 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting
6205 the first line, then
6209 is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it
6213 you were quoting other text.
6216 \begin_layout Quotation
6217 Here's a new paragraph.
6218 I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time.
6219 If I did that, though, you'd get bored.
6222 \begin_layout Standard
6223 As the examples show,
6227 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
6228 They should put quotes in the
6233 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
6237 paragraph environment for quoted text.
6240 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6242 \begin_inset Index idx
6245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6252 \begin_inset Index idx
6255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6262 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6271 \begin_layout Standard
6276 is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on.
6282 \begin_inset Newline newline
6285 Which I did not rehearse!
6289 It could be much worse.
6290 This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps
6292 It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are
6293 indented a bit more than the first.
6294 Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
6300 \begin_inset Newline newline
6303 And make things look fine
6304 \begin_inset Newline newline
6310 arg "newline-insert newline"
6316 \begin_layout Standard
6321 does not indent both margins.
6322 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
6323 To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the shortcut
6326 arg "newline-insert newline"
6332 \begin_layout Subsection
6334 \begin_inset Index idx
6337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6344 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6353 \begin_layout Standard
6355 has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds
6365 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
6366 labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively.
6375 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
6376 lets you provide your own label.
6377 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after
6378 describing some general features of all four of them.
6381 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6385 \begin_layout Standard
6386 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments
6388 First, \SpecialChar LyX
6389 treats each paragraph as a list item.
6398 reset the environment to
6402 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
6403 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
6404 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting
6408 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
6412 If you do this at the top level of a list, it returns you to the
6419 \begin_layout Standard
6420 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
6421 In fact, \SpecialChar LyX
6422 changes the labels on some list items depending on how it is
6424 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest
6425 you read all of section
6426 \begin_inset space ~
6430 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6432 reference "sec:Nesting"
6439 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6441 \begin_inset Index idx
6444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6451 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6460 \begin_layout Standard
6461 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
6465 paragraph environment.
6466 It has the following properties:
6469 \begin_layout Itemize
6470 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
6474 \begin_layout Itemize
6476 uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
6479 \begin_layout Itemize
6480 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
6484 \begin_layout Itemize
6485 The items can have any length.
6487 automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
6488 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
6495 \begin_layout Itemize
6500 environment inside another
6504 environment, the label changes to a new symbol.
6508 \begin_layout Itemize
6509 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
6512 \begin_layout Itemize
6514 always shows the same symbol on screen.
6517 \begin_layout Itemize
6519 \begin_inset space ~
6523 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6525 reference "sec:Nesting"
6529 for a full explanation of nesting.
6533 \begin_layout Standard
6534 Of course, that explanation was also an example of an
6543 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
6546 \begin_layout Standard
6547 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
6548 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
6551 \begin_layout Itemize
6552 The label for the first level
6556 is a large black dot, or bullet.
6560 \begin_layout Itemize
6561 The label for the second level is a dash.
6565 \begin_layout Itemize
6566 The label for the third is an asterisk.
6570 \begin_layout Itemize
6571 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
6575 \begin_layout Itemize
6576 Back out to the third level.
6580 \begin_layout Itemize
6581 Back to the second level.
6585 \begin_layout Itemize
6586 Back to the outermost level.
6589 \begin_layout Standard
6590 These are the default labels for an
6595 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
6597 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
6600 dialog in the submenu
6605 \begin_inset Index idx
6608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6614 These customizations are not displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
6618 \begin_layout Standard
6619 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
6620 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths
6622 \begin_inset space ~
6626 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6628 reference "sec:Nesting"
6635 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6637 \begin_inset Index idx
6640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6647 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6649 name "sec:Enumerate"
6656 \begin_layout Standard
6661 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
6662 It has these properties:
6665 \begin_layout Enumerate
6666 Each item has a numeral as its label.
6670 \begin_layout Enumerate
6671 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
6675 \begin_layout Enumerate
6677 automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
6680 \begin_layout Enumerate
6685 environment resets the counter to one.
6688 \begin_layout Enumerate
6701 \begin_layout Enumerate
6702 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
6703 Items can have any length.
6706 \begin_layout Enumerate
6707 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
6710 \begin_layout Enumerate
6711 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
6714 \begin_layout Enumerate
6715 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
6719 \begin_layout Standard
6728 shows the different labels for each item in \SpecialChar LyX
6730 Here is how \SpecialChar LyX
6731 labels the four different levels in an
6738 \begin_layout Enumerate
6739 The first level of an
6743 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
6747 \begin_layout Enumerate
6748 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
6752 \begin_layout Enumerate
6753 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
6757 \begin_layout Enumerate
6758 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
6761 \begin_layout Enumerate
6762 Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth
6767 \begin_layout Enumerate
6768 Back to the third level
6772 \begin_layout Enumerate
6773 Back to the second level.
6777 \begin_layout Enumerate
6778 Back to the outermost level.
6781 \begin_layout Standard
6782 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
6786 environment, see section
6787 \begin_inset space ~
6791 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6793 reference "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6798 Such customization only shows up in the printed version, not in \SpecialChar LyX
6802 \begin_layout Standard
6803 There is more to nesting
6807 environments than we've stated here.
6808 You should read section
6809 \begin_inset space ~
6813 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6815 reference "sec:Nesting"
6819 to learn more about nesting.
6822 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6824 \begin_inset Index idx
6827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6836 \begin_layout Standard
6837 Unlike the previous two environments, the
6841 list has no fixed label.
6842 Instead, \SpecialChar LyX
6844 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6848 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6851 of the first line as the label.
6855 \begin_layout Description
6856 Example: This is an example of the
6863 \begin_layout Standard
6865 typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the
6869 \begin_layout Standard
6871 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6875 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6878 it is meant that the first usage of the
6882 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an
6884 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
6892 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
6897 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6898 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
6900 \begin_inset space ~
6906 \begin_inset space ~
6910 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6912 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
6916 for more information.) Here is an example:
6919 \begin_layout Description
6921 \begin_inset space ~
6924 Example: This one shows how to use a
6927 \begin_inset space ~
6939 \begin_layout Description
6940 Usage: You should use the
6944 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
6945 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text
6947 It's not a good idea to use a
6951 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
6952 You're better off using
6964 paragraphs into them.
6967 \begin_layout Description
6968 Nesting: You can nest
6972 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
6976 \begin_layout Standard
6977 Notice that after the first line, \SpecialChar LyX
6978 indents subsequent lines, offsetting
6979 them from the first line.
6982 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6984 \begin_inset Index idx
6987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6996 \begin_layout Standard
7001 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
7002 extension to \SpecialChar LaTeX
7006 \begin_layout Standard
7015 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional
7017 Here are its properties:
7020 \begin_layout Labeling
7021 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
7023 \begin_inset space ~
7026 labels \SpecialChar LyX
7028 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7032 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7035 of each line as the item label.
7040 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
7041 If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a protected
7042 space as described above.
7045 \begin_layout Labeling
7046 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
7047 margins As you can see, \SpecialChar LyX
7048 uses different margins for the item label and the
7049 body of the item text.
7050 The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default
7051 label width plus a little extra space.
7054 \begin_layout Labeling
7055 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
7057 \begin_inset space ~
7060 width \SpecialChar LyX
7061 uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is larger.
7062 If the label width is larger, the label
7063 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7067 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7070 into the first line.
7071 In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left
7072 margin of the rest of the item text.
7075 \begin_layout Labeling
7076 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
7078 \begin_inset space ~
7081 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all
7086 environment has the same left margin.
7087 \begin_inset Newline newline
7090 To change the default width, select all items in the list.
7093 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
7095 \begin_inset space ~
7100 dialog (toolbar button
7103 arg "layout-paragraph"
7110 \begin_inset space ~
7115 determines the default label width.
7116 You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the
7118 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7122 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7125 multiple times instead.
7126 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in \SpecialChar LaTeX
7129 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7133 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7136 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
7139 \begin_inset space ~
7144 every time you alter a label in a
7149 \begin_inset Newline newline
7152 The predefined default width is the length of
7153 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7157 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7161 \begin_inset space ~
7167 \begin_layout Standard
7172 list the same way as the
7176 list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes
7182 environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall
7186 \begin_layout Standard
7191 lists inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and so on.
7192 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
7194 \begin_inset space ~
7198 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7200 reference "sec:Nesting"
7204 to learn about nesting.
7207 \begin_layout Standard
7208 There is yet another feature of the
7212 list: As you can see in the examples, \SpecialChar LyX
7213 left-justifies the item labels by
7215 You can use additional
7219 to change how \SpecialChar LyX
7220 justifies the item label.
7225 are documented in section
7226 \begin_inset space ~
7230 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7232 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
7237 Here are some examples:
7240 \begin_layout Labeling
7241 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
7242 Left The default for
7249 \begin_layout Labeling
7250 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
7251 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
7258 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
7261 \begin_layout Labeling
7262 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
7263 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
7267 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
7274 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
7277 \begin_layout Subsection
7279 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7281 name "subsec:Customized-Lists"
7286 \begin_inset Index idx
7289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7298 \begin_layout Standard
7299 The features described in this section require that the module
7301 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
7303 is loaded in the document settings.
7304 The module uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7310 \begin_inset Index idx
7313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7323 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7324 Custom Enumerate Lists
7325 \begin_inset Index idx
7328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7329 Lists ! Enumerate ! Custom
7337 \begin_layout Standard
7339 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional
7342 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
7345 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
7346 There you add the command
7349 \begin_layout Standard
7357 \begin_layout Standard
7369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7370 For more about \SpecialChar TeX
7371 Code, look at section
7372 \begin_inset space ~
7376 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7378 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
7391 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
7398 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
7399 For capital Roman numerals replace
7411 in the command above.
7412 For Arabic numerals use
7420 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7424 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7427 items with capital or small Latin letters use
7442 \begin_layout Standard
7444 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7452 You can only number 26
7453 \begin_inset space ~
7456 items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters.
7464 \begin_layout Standard
7465 To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command
7466 by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv).
7469 \begin_layout Standard
7470 Here is a list with custom numbering:
7473 \begin_layout Enumerate
7474 \begin_inset Argument 1
7477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7503 \begin_layout Enumerate
7504 \begin_inset Argument 1
7507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7530 \begin_layout Enumerate
7535 \begin_layout Enumerate
7536 \begin_inset Argument 1
7539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7563 \begin_layout Enumerate
7564 \begin_inset Argument 1
7567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7593 \begin_layout Standard
7594 For this list these commands were used:
7597 \begin_layout Standard
7608 \begin_inset Newline newline
7616 \begin_inset Newline newline
7624 \begin_inset Newline newline
7634 \begin_layout Standard
7641 makes the label emphasized and
7650 \begin_layout Standard
7651 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7659 When you change the label of a list level, it will be used for all following
7660 lists until you change the definition.
7668 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7670 \begin_inset Index idx
7673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7674 Lists ! Enumerate ! Resumed
7682 \begin_layout Standard
7683 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
7686 \begin_layout Enumerate
7687 \begin_inset Argument 1
7690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7709 \begin_inset Note Note
7712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7713 goes back to default numbering
7721 \begin_layout Enumerate
7725 \begin_layout Standard
7729 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
7733 \begin_layout Standard
7734 To resume an enumeration, use the style
7740 \change_deleted -584632292 1616513280
7741 Its numbering appears in blue within \SpecialChar LyX
7742 to indicate that it is a resumed list
7743 and that the numbering will not be correct in \SpecialChar LyX
7744 , but in the output.
7749 \begin_layout Standard
7750 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7758 If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a \SpecialChar LaTeX
7767 \begin_layout Standard
7768 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the
7770 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
7771 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item
7772 of a normal enumeration.
7773 There, insert the command
7776 \begin_layout Standard
7782 \begin_layout Standard
7787 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
7791 \begin_layout Enumerate
7795 \begin_layout Enumerate
7799 \begin_layout Standard
7800 Enumeration starting at a given value:
7803 \begin_layout Enumerate
7804 \begin_inset Argument 1
7807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7823 This enumeration starts at 4
7826 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7828 \begin_inset Index idx
7831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7840 \begin_layout Standard
7841 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items
7843 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
7846 \begin_layout Itemize
7850 \begin_layout Itemize
7851 with standard spacing
7854 \begin_layout Standard
7855 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item
7857 Add there the command
7861 to get no additional list space like in this example:
7864 \begin_layout Itemize
7865 \begin_inset Argument 1
7868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7887 \begin_layout Itemize
7891 \begin_layout Itemize
7895 \begin_layout Standard
7896 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7903 \begin_inset Index idx
7906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7914 For more information see its documentation,
7915 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7925 \begin_layout Standard
7926 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing
7928 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs
7929 in the document and the label separation was set to 2
7930 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7933 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
7936 \begin_layout Enumerate
7937 \begin_inset Argument 1
7940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7948 parindent, labelsep=2cm
7961 \begin_layout Enumerate
7962 with negative indentation
7965 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7966 Further Customization
7967 \begin_inset Index idx
7970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7971 Lists ! Customization
7979 \begin_layout Standard
7980 You can also change the style of description lists.
7984 \begin_layout Standard
7990 \begin_layout Standard
7991 changes the description label font, the command
7994 \begin_layout Standard
8000 \begin_layout Standard
8001 sets the list style.
8004 \begin_layout Standard
8005 An example where the command
8008 \begin_layout Standard
8013 itshape, style=nextline
8016 \begin_layout Standard
8020 \begin_layout Description
8022 \begin_inset space ~
8026 \begin_inset Argument 1
8029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8035 labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font=
8037 itshape, style=nextline
8047 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are
8048 energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore
8052 \begin_layout Description
8054 \begin_inset space ~
8057 counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing
8058 the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an
8059 object, block of memory, disk space or other resource.
8062 \begin_layout Standard
8063 There are many more commands and features provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
8069 \begin_inset Index idx
8072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8080 For more information see its documentation
8081 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
8091 \begin_layout Subsection
8093 \begin_inset Index idx
8096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8105 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8107 \begin_inset space ~
8110 Address: An Overview
8113 \begin_layout Standard
8114 Although \SpecialChar LyX
8115 has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph
8123 \begin_inset space ~
8129 To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments
8130 in a specific order, otherwise \SpecialChar LaTeX
8131 gags on the document.
8132 In contrast, you can use the
8139 \begin_inset space ~
8144 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
8145 You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest
8149 \begin_layout Standard
8150 Of course, you're not limited to using
8157 \begin_inset space ~
8166 \begin_inset space ~
8171 , in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in
8172 some European academic papers.
8175 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8177 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8179 name "sec:Address-Usage"
8186 \begin_layout Standard
8191 environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used
8192 for the opening and signature in some countries.
8196 \begin_inset space ~
8201 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which
8202 is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
8203 Here's an example of each:
8206 \begin_layout Right Address
8208 \begin_inset Newline newline
8212 \begin_inset Newline newline
8216 \begin_inset Newline newline
8219 When is it? What is today?
8222 \begin_layout Standard
8226 \begin_inset space ~
8232 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which \SpecialChar LyX
8234 the largest block of text on a single line.
8235 Here's an example of the
8242 \begin_layout Address
8244 \begin_inset Newline newline
8247 Where do I send this
8248 \begin_inset Newline newline
8251 Your post office and country
8254 \begin_layout Standard
8255 As you can see, both
8262 \begin_inset space ~
8267 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
8272 in either of these environments, \SpecialChar LyX
8273 resets the nesting depth and sets the
8279 This makes sense, since
8287 function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
8288 Thus, you have to use
8295 arg "newline-insert newline"
8300 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
8301 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
8303 \begin_inset space ~
8307 \begin_inset space ~
8312 ) to start a new line in an
8319 \begin_inset space ~
8327 \begin_layout Subsection
8331 \begin_layout Standard
8332 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography
8333 or list of references.
8335 contains paragraph environments for both of these.
8338 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8340 \begin_inset Index idx
8343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8352 \begin_layout Standard
8357 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
8358 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
8359 only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title.
8360 Also, don't bother trying to nest
8364 in anything else or vice versa.
8370 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
8371 The book document classes ignores the
8375 completely, and it's utterly silly to use
8379 in a letter document class.
8382 \begin_layout Standard
8387 environment does several things for you.
8388 First, it puts the centered label
8389 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8393 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8397 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical
8399 Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect.
8400 Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and
8401 the subsequent text.
8402 Well, that's how it will appear on the \SpecialChar LyX
8404 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are
8408 \begin_layout Standard
8409 Starting a new paragraph by entering
8413 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8414 The new paragraph will still be in the
8419 So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you
8420 finish entering the abstract of your document.
8423 \begin_layout Standard
8424 \begin_inset Float figure
8431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8433 \begin_inset Graphics
8434 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
8441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8442 \begin_inset Caption Standard
8444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8445 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8447 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
8468 \begin_layout Standard
8469 We would love to demonstrate the
8473 environment, but since this document is in the
8474 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8478 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8481 class, we can't do this.
8482 We inserted it therefore as figure
8483 \begin_inset space ~
8487 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8489 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
8494 If you have never heard of an
8495 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8499 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8502 before, you can safely ignore this environment.
8505 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8507 \begin_inset Index idx
8510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8517 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8519 name "subsec:Biblio_environment"
8526 \begin_layout Standard
8531 environment is used to list references.
8532 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
8533 only use it at the end of the document.
8545 \begin_layout Standard
8546 When you first open a
8550 environment, \SpecialChar LyX
8551 adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading
8552 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8556 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8560 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8564 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8567 depending on the document class.
8568 The heading is in a large boldface font.
8569 Each paragraph of the
8573 environment is a bibliography entry.
8578 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8579 Each new paragraph is still in the
8586 \begin_layout Standard
8587 There is another, usually better way to include references in your document
8588 by using a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
8590 For more information on that, and for a detailed description of \SpecialChar LyX
8592 handling, have a look at section
8593 \begin_inset space ~
8597 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8599 reference "sec:Bibliography"
8606 \begin_layout Subsection
8607 Special Environments
8610 \begin_layout Standard
8612 provides two environments that can be used to emulate the behavior of a
8613 computer console/terminal and a typewriter.
8616 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8621 \begin_inset Index idx
8624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8632 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8634 name "subsec:LyX-Code"
8641 \begin_layout Standard
8647 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
8649 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
8654 key as a fixed whitespace.
8658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8671 \begin_inset space ~
8676 instead of an end-of-word marker.
8694 * are the only environments in which you can type multiple whitespaces in
8697 If you need to insert blank lines, you will still need to use
8700 arg "newline-insert newline"
8717 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8718 So, when you finish using the
8723 environment, you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
8724 Also, you can nest the
8729 environment inside of others.
8732 \begin_layout Standard
8733 There are a few quirks with this environment:
8736 \begin_layout Itemize
8740 arg "newline-insert newline"
8743 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
8744 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
8748 \begin_inset space \space{}
8758 arg "newline-insert newline"
8764 \begin_layout Itemize
8768 arg "newline-insert newline"
8778 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
8784 \begin_layout Itemize
8785 You cannot have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
8786 You must put at least one
8790 in any line you want blank.
8791 Otherwise, \SpecialChar LaTeX
8795 \begin_layout Itemize
8796 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
8800 since that will insert
8805 You get the typewriter double quotes with
8808 arg "self-insert \""
8814 \begin_layout Standard
8818 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8822 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8826 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8830 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8834 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8835 printf("Hello World!
8840 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8844 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8848 \begin_layout Standard
8849 This is just the standard
8850 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8854 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8860 \begin_layout Standard
8866 has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts
8868 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text
8869 as if you used a typewriter.
8870 \begin_inset Index idx
8873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8874 Paragraph environments|)
8879 For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described
8882 Program Code Listings
8887 \begin_inset space ~
8895 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8899 \begin_inset Index idx
8902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8911 \begin_layout Standard
8916 environment is similar to the
8921 environment with the difference that its content will be treated like a
8922 computer console text.
8927 does therefore not have paragraphs so that
8941 key is treated like a normal space in text (not as a protected space) and
8942 you can have empty lines.
8955 \begin_layout Itemize
8956 have a certain language and a text style
8959 \begin_layout Itemize
8960 contain hyperlinks, boxes, foot- and margin notes, notes, math, citations,
8961 index- and nomenclature entries, labels, tables, graphics, listings, floats
8962 and \SpecialChar TeX
8966 \begin_layout Standard
8967 Because of these properties
8971 works like a typewriter.
8975 \begin_layout Verbatim
8980 \begin_layout Verbatim
8984 The following 2 lines are empty:
8987 \begin_layout Verbatim
8991 \begin_layout Verbatim
8995 \begin_layout Verbatim
8997 Almost everything is allowed in Verbatim:"%&$§#~'`
9002 \begin_layout Standard
9007 environment is identical to
9011 with the difference that spaces appear in the output as the character '
9012 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
9019 \begin_layout Verbatim*
9024 \begin_layout Section
9025 Nesting Environments
9026 \begin_inset Index idx
9029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9030 Nesting ! Environments
9036 \begin_inset CommandInset label
9045 \begin_layout Subsection
9049 \begin_layout Standard
9051 treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific propertie
9053 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of
9055 For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also
9057 In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner
9059 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9063 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9069 \begin_layout Enumerate
9073 \begin_layout Enumerate
9078 \begin_layout Enumerate
9082 \begin_layout Enumerate
9087 \begin_layout Enumerate
9091 \begin_layout Standard
9092 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
9093 Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select
9095 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
9097 \begin_inset space ~
9101 \begin_inset space ~
9109 \begin_inset space ~
9113 \begin_inset space ~
9118 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are
9120 Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons
9123 arg "depth-increment"
9129 arg "depth-decrement"
9143 arg "depth-increment"
9149 arg "depth-decrement"
9153 The change will work on the current selection, if you have made one (allowing
9154 you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current
9158 \begin_layout Standard
9159 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
9160 only changes the nesting depth if it can.
9161 If it is invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
9162 Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the
9163 depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
9166 \begin_layout Standard
9167 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
9169 , you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're about
9171 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
9174 \begin_layout Subsection
9175 What You Can and Can't Nest
9178 \begin_layout Standard
9179 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell
9180 you a little bit more about how nesting works.
9183 \begin_layout Standard
9184 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated
9185 than a simple yes or no.
9186 There are three types of paragraph environments:
9189 \begin_layout Itemize
9190 Completely unnestable
9193 \begin_layout Itemize
9194 Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other
9198 \begin_layout Itemize
9199 A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest
9203 \begin_layout Standard
9204 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph
9205 environments have them:
9208 \begin_layout Description
9209 Unnestable Can't nest them.
9210 Can't nest into them.
9214 \begin_layout Itemize
9220 \begin_layout Itemize
9226 \begin_layout Itemize
9232 \begin_layout Itemize
9238 \begin_layout Itemize
9245 \begin_layout Description
9247 \begin_inset space ~
9250 Nestable You can nest them.
9251 You can nest other things into them.
9255 \begin_layout Itemize
9261 \begin_layout Itemize
9267 \begin_layout Itemize
9273 \begin_layout Itemize
9279 \begin_layout Itemize
9285 \begin_layout Itemize
9291 \begin_layout Itemize
9297 \begin_layout Itemize
9304 \begin_layout Itemize
9310 \begin_layout Itemize
9317 \begin_layout Description
9318 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
9319 You can't nest anything into them.
9323 \begin_layout Itemize
9329 \begin_layout Itemize
9335 \begin_layout Itemize
9341 \begin_layout Itemize
9347 \begin_layout Itemize
9353 \begin_layout Itemize
9359 \begin_layout Itemize
9365 \begin_layout Itemize
9371 \begin_layout Itemize
9377 \begin_layout Itemize
9383 \begin_layout Itemize
9389 \begin_layout Itemize
9395 \begin_layout Itemize
9401 \begin_layout Itemize
9405 \begin_inset space ~
9411 \begin_layout Itemize
9418 \begin_layout Standard
9419 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
9422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9427 Although it is possible, for example, to nest numbered section headings
9437 \begin_inset space ~
9440 into lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to
9441 create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas
9442 nested section headings violate this.
9450 \begin_layout Subsection
9451 Nesting Other Things: Tables, Math, Floats, etc.
9452 \begin_inset Index idx
9455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9456 Nesting ! Tables etc.
9464 \begin_layout Standard
9465 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are
9466 affected by nesting anyhow.
9470 \begin_layout Itemize
9474 \begin_layout Itemize
9478 \begin_layout Itemize
9482 \begin_layout Standard
9484 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
9487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9492 Figures and tables in
9496 are not affected by this.
9501 Have a look at section
9502 \begin_inset space ~
9506 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
9508 reference "sec:Floats"
9512 for more information about
9519 \begin_layout Standard
9521 can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
9522 If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph
9526 \begin_layout Standard
9527 On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a
9528 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9532 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9535 of its own, it behaves just like a
9536 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9540 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9543 paragraph environment.
9544 You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything
9548 \begin_layout Standard
9549 Here's an example with a table:
9552 \begin_layout Enumerate
9557 \begin_layout Enumerate
9558 This is (a) and it's nested.
9562 \begin_layout Standard
9563 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9569 \begin_layout Standard
9571 \begin_inset Tabular
9572 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9573 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9574 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9575 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9577 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9595 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9615 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9633 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9659 \begin_layout Standard
9660 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9667 \begin_layout Enumerate
9669 The table is actually nested inside (a).
9673 \begin_layout Enumerate
9677 \begin_layout Standard
9678 If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this:
9681 \begin_layout Enumerate
9686 \begin_layout Enumerate
9687 This is (a) and it's nested.
9691 \begin_layout Standard
9692 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9698 \begin_layout Standard
9700 \begin_inset Tabular
9701 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9702 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9703 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9704 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9706 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9724 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9744 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9762 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9788 \begin_layout Standard
9789 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9795 \begin_layout Enumerate
9802 In fact, it's not nested at all.
9805 \begin_layout Enumerate
9809 \begin_layout Standard
9810 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first
9814 \begin_layout Standard
9815 There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going
9818 then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
9821 \begin_layout Enumerate
9826 \begin_layout Enumerate
9827 This is (a) and it's nested.
9830 \begin_layout Standard
9831 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9837 \begin_layout Standard
9839 \begin_inset Tabular
9840 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9841 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9842 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9843 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9845 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9863 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9883 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9901 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9928 \begin_layout Standard
9929 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9935 \begin_layout Enumerate
9937 The table is actually nested inside Item One, but
9944 \begin_layout Enumerate
9948 \begin_layout Standard
9949 As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a
9955 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
9956 So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right
9960 \begin_layout Subsection
9961 Usage and General Features
9964 \begin_layout Standard
9965 Speaking of levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9966 can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
9968 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9972 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9975 is the innermost possible depth.
9976 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
9979 \begin_layout Enumerate
9980 level #1 – outermost
9984 \begin_layout Enumerate
9989 \begin_layout Enumerate
9994 \begin_layout Enumerate
9999 \begin_layout Itemize
10004 \begin_layout Itemize
10013 \begin_layout Standard
10014 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see
10015 both of them in the example.
10016 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold
10026 For example, if we tried to nest another
10031 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10035 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10038 , we would get errors.
10041 \begin_layout Subsection
10043 \begin_inset Index idx
10046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10055 \begin_layout Standard
10056 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
10057 We have several examples of nested environments.
10058 In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce
10062 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10063 Example 1: The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
10066 \begin_layout Labeling
10067 \labelwidthstring MMM
10068 #1-a This is the outermost level.
10077 \begin_layout Labeling
10078 \labelwidthstring MMM
10079 #2-a This is level #2.
10080 We created it by using
10083 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10089 arg "depth-increment"
10096 \begin_layout Labeling
10097 \labelwidthstring MMM
10098 #3-a This is level #3.
10099 This time, we just enter
10106 arg "depth-increment"
10110 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
10114 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10120 arg "depth-increment"
10127 \begin_layout Standard
10132 environment, nested inside of
10133 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10137 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10141 So, it's at level #4.
10142 We did this by entering
10145 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10151 arg "depth-increment"
10154 , then changing the paragraph environment to
10159 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works
10175 \begin_layout Standard
10180 paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a
10183 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10189 \begin_layout Labeling
10190 \labelwidthstring MMM
10191 #4-a This is level #4.
10195 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10198 and changed the paragraph environment back to
10203 Remember — we can't nest anything inside a
10207 environment, which is why we're still at level #4.
10212 keep nesting things inside
10213 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10217 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10224 \begin_layout Labeling
10225 \labelwidthstring MMM
10226 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar ldots
10231 \begin_layout Labeling
10232 \labelwidthstring MMM
10233 #6-a \SpecialChar ldots
10234 and this is level #6.
10235 By now, you should know how we made these two.
10239 \begin_layout Labeling
10240 \labelwidthstring MMM
10241 #5-b Back to level #5.
10245 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10251 arg "depth-decrement"
10258 \begin_layout Labeling
10259 \labelwidthstring MMM
10263 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10269 arg "depth-decrement"
10272 , we're back at level #4.
10276 \begin_layout Labeling
10277 \labelwidthstring MMM
10278 #3-b Back to level #3.
10279 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
10283 \begin_layout Labeling
10284 \labelwidthstring MMM
10285 #2-b Back to level #2.
10289 \begin_layout Labeling
10290 \labelwidthstring MMM
10291 #1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1.
10292 After this sentence, we will enter
10296 and change the paragraph environment back to
10303 \begin_layout Standard
10304 We could have also used the
10320 environment in place of the
10325 The example would have worked exactly the same.
10328 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10329 Example 2: Inheritance
10332 \begin_layout LyX-Code
10333 This is the LyX-Code environment, at level #1, the outermost
10336 \begin_layout LyX-Code
10345 arg "depth-increment"
10349 \begin_inset Newline newline
10352 which, we will change to the
10360 \begin_layout Enumerate
10365 environment, at level #2.
10368 \begin_layout Enumerate
10369 Notice how the nested
10373 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
10377 ), but also inherits its font and spacing!
10381 \begin_layout Standard
10382 We ended this example by entering
10387 After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
10391 and reset the nesting depth by using
10394 arg "depth-decrement"
10400 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10401 Example 3: Labels, Levels, and the
10410 \begin_inset Argument 1
10413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10414 Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments
10422 \begin_layout Enumerate
10423 This is level #1, in an
10427 paragraph environment.
10428 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
10432 \begin_layout Enumerate
10437 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10443 arg "depth-increment"
10447 Now, what happens if we nest an
10451 environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its
10452 label be? An asterisk?
10456 \begin_layout Itemize
10466 environment, even though it's at level #3.
10467 So, its label is a bullet.
10468 (We got here by using
10471 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10477 arg "depth-increment"
10480 , then changing the environment to
10488 \begin_layout Itemize
10489 Here's level #4, produced using
10492 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10498 arg "depth-increment"
10502 We will do that again\SpecialChar ldots
10507 \begin_layout Enumerate
10509 to get to level #5.
10510 This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to
10515 Notice the type of numbering, it is
10519 , because we are in the
10527 environment (that is, it is an
10542 \begin_layout Enumerate
10547 change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What
10548 type of numbering does \SpecialChar LyX
10552 \begin_layout Enumerate
10553 Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using
10556 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10559 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
10562 \begin_layout Enumerate
10566 arg "depth-decrement"
10569 to decrease the depth after the next
10572 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10579 \begin_layout Enumerate
10581 Look what type of label \SpecialChar LyX
10586 \begin_layout Enumerate
10588 Even though we've changed levels, \SpecialChar LyX
10589 is still using a lowercase Roman numeral
10593 \begin_layout Enumerate
10594 Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is
10603 Notice, however, that \SpecialChar LyX
10608 reset the counter for the label.
10612 \begin_layout Enumerate
10616 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10622 arg "depth-decrement"
10625 sequence, and we're back to level #2.
10626 This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back
10627 into the twofold-nested
10635 \begin_layout Enumerate
10636 The same thing happens if we do another
10639 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10645 arg "depth-decrement"
10648 sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level.
10651 \begin_layout Standard
10652 Lastly, we reset the environment to
10657 As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling
10668 The number of other
10672 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label \SpecialChar LyX
10679 The same rule applies for the
10683 environment, as well.
10686 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10687 Example 4: Going Bonkers
10690 \begin_layout Enumerate
10691 We're going to go totally nuts now.
10692 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into
10693 the same detail with how we did it.
10702 \begin_layout Standard
10710 arg "depth-increment"
10717 : level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created
10718 the example in parentheses someplace.
10719 For example, the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
10720 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
10721 Either before or after this, we will put in the level.
10725 \begin_layout Enumerate
10730 : level #1) This is the next item in the list.
10734 \begin_layout Verse
10735 Now we will add verse.
10736 \begin_inset Newline newline
10739 It will get much worse.
10740 \begin_inset Newline newline
10750 arg "depth-increment"
10760 \begin_layout Verse
10761 Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo.
10762 \begin_inset Newline newline
10765 Bippitey boppitey boo!
10766 \begin_inset Newline newline
10772 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10780 \begin_layout Verse
10781 Here comes a table:
10785 \begin_layout Standard
10786 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10792 \begin_layout Standard
10794 \begin_inset Tabular
10795 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
10796 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10797 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10798 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10800 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
10803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10818 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10838 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
10841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10856 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10883 \begin_layout Verse
10887 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10897 arg "depth-increment"
10903 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10909 \begin_inset Newline newline
10917 arg "depth-decrement"
10924 \begin_layout Enumerate
10929 : level #1) This is another item.
10930 Note that selecting a
10934 resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth
10935 3 times to put the table inside the
10942 \begin_layout Quotation
10943 We're now ending the
10947 list and changing to
10952 We're still at level #1.
10953 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
10954 The next set of paragraphs is a
10955 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10959 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10962 We will nest both the
10969 \begin_inset space ~
10974 environments inside of this one, then use another nested
10978 for the letter body.
10982 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10985 to preserve the depth.
10986 Remember that you need to use
10989 arg "newline-insert newline"
10992 to create multiple lines inside the
10999 \begin_inset space ~
11009 \begin_layout Right Address
11011 \begin_inset Newline newline
11014 Moosegroin, MT 00100
11015 \begin_inset Newline newline
11021 \begin_layout Address
11023 \begin_inset space ~
11029 \begin_layout Quotation
11030 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
11031 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11034 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
11035 Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating
11036 a backlog in our orders for methane.
11037 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order
11038 as soon as possible.
11039 In the meantime, we thank you for your patience.
11042 \begin_layout Quotation
11043 We do, however, now have a special on beef.
11044 If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form
11045 with your order, along with payment.
11048 \begin_layout Quotation
11049 We thank you again for your patience.
11052 \begin_layout Address
11054 \begin_inset Newline newline
11061 \begin_layout Quotation
11062 That ends that example!
11065 \begin_layout Standard
11066 As you can see, nesting environments in \SpecialChar LyX
11067 gives you a lot of power with just
11069 We could have easily nested an
11090 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
11093 \begin_layout Subsection
11095 \begin_inset Index idx
11098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11099 Nesting ! Separation
11105 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11107 name "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
11114 \begin_layout Standard
11115 It is sometimes necessary to have two consecutive environments of the same
11117 For example you need two different enumerations:
11120 \begin_layout Enumerate
11125 \begin_layout Enumerate
11130 \begin_layout Enumerate
11134 \begin_layout Standard
11135 \begin_inset Separator plain
11141 \begin_layout Itemize
11147 \begin_layout Standard
11148 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
11154 \begin_layout Enumerate
11158 \begin_layout Enumerate
11162 \begin_layout Enumerate
11166 \begin_layout Standard
11167 To split an existing list into two lists, set the cursor at the end of a
11168 list item and use the menu
11170 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11171 Separated <Name> Above
11175 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11176 Separated <Name> Below
11179 This inserts a plain separator (red line in \SpecialChar LyX
11180 ) and before or behind it the
11182 Inside nested environments, it is also possible to split the outer environment.
11185 \begin_layout Standard
11186 By right-clicking on a separator one can change it into a paragraph separator
11187 (red arrow in LyX).
11188 The difference between both separator types is that the plain separator
11189 only splits the list and not the current paragraph.
11192 \begin_layout Standard
11193 In general, you get an environment separator when you press
11196 arg "paragraph-break"
11203 environment immediately after a non-Standard one.
11206 \begin_layout Section
11207 Spacing, Pagination and Line Breaks
11208 \begin_inset Index idx
11211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11220 \begin_layout Standard
11221 What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime
11222 you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
11224 more spaces: spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot
11225 be broken at the end of a line.
11226 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are
11230 \begin_layout Subsection
11232 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11234 name "subsec:Protected-Space"
11239 \begin_inset Index idx
11242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11251 \begin_layout Standard
11252 The protected space: It is used to tell \SpecialChar LyX
11253 (and \SpecialChar LaTeX
11254 ) not to break the line at
11256 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks, like in:
11259 \begin_layout Quote
11260 Further documentation is given in section
11261 \begin_inset Newline newline
11265 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11267 reference "sec:Bibliography"
11274 \begin_layout Standard
11275 Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a protected space between
11276 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11280 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11284 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11288 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11290 reference "sec:Bibliography"
11295 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11299 A protected space is set with
11301 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11302 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11304 \begin_inset space ~
11312 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
11318 \begin_layout Subsection
11320 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11322 name "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
11327 \begin_inset Index idx
11330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11331 Spacing ! Horizontal
11339 \begin_layout Standard
11340 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
11342 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11343 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11347 The length units are listed in Appendix
11348 \begin_inset space ~
11352 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11354 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
11361 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11363 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11365 name "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
11370 \begin_inset Index idx
11373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11374 Spaces ! Inter-word
11382 \begin_layout Standard
11383 With the introduction of typewriters, it became conventional in some countries
11384 to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters
11385 at the ends of sentences.
11386 There is no need to do this as \SpecialChar LyX
11387 automatically takes care about this.
11388 However, you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation
11389 followed by a period; see section
11390 \begin_inset space ~
11394 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11396 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
11401 To insert a normal space, select
11403 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11404 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11406 \begin_inset space ~
11414 arg "space-insert normal"
11420 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11422 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11424 name "subsec:Thin-Space"
11429 \begin_inset Index idx
11432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11441 \begin_layout Standard
11443 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11447 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11450 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
11451 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11455 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11459 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of
11460 thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance,
11461 inside abbreviations:
11464 \begin_layout Quote
11466 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11470 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
11473 \begin_layout Standard
11474 or between values and units.
11475 Compare for example this:
11476 \begin_inset Newline newline
11480 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11484 \begin_inset Newline newline
11487 10 kg (normal space
11490 \begin_layout Standard
11491 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
11493 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11494 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11496 \begin_inset space ~
11504 arg "space-insert thin"
11510 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11514 \begin_layout Standard
11515 You can also insert the following space types:
11518 \begin_layout Description
11520 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161965
11522 \begin_inset space ~
11528 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11532 \begin_inset space \medspace{}
11536 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11540 \change_deleted -712698321 1593161991
11542 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161992
11545 space between the arrows.
11546 \change_inserted -712698321 1593162006
11550 \begin_layout Description
11552 \change_deleted -712698321 1593162010
11554 \change_inserted -712698321 1593162011
11558 \begin_inset space ~
11561 space A line with a
11562 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11566 \begin_inset space \thickspace{}
11570 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11574 \change_deleted -712698321 1593162017
11576 \change_inserted -712698321 1593162018
11579 space between the arrows.
11582 \begin_layout Description
11584 \begin_inset space ~
11588 \begin_inset space ~
11591 space A line with a
11592 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11596 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
11600 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11603 negative thin space between the arrows.
11606 \begin_layout Description
11608 \begin_inset space ~
11612 \begin_inset space ~
11615 space A line with a
11616 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11620 \begin_inset space \negmedspace{}
11624 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11627 negative medium space between the arrows.
11630 \begin_layout Description
11632 \begin_inset space ~
11636 \begin_inset space ~
11639 space A line with a
11640 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11644 \begin_inset space \negthickspace{}
11648 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11651 negative thick space between the arrows.
11654 \begin_layout Description
11656 \begin_inset space ~
11660 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11664 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11668 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
11672 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11676 \begin_inset space ~
11680 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11683 em) space between the arrows.
11686 \begin_layout Description
11688 \begin_inset space ~
11692 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11696 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11700 \begin_inset space \quad{}
11704 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11708 \begin_inset space ~
11712 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11715 em) space between the arrows.
11718 \begin_layout Description
11720 \begin_inset space ~
11724 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11728 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11732 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
11736 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11740 \begin_inset space ~
11744 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11747 em) space between the arrows.
11750 \begin_layout Description
11752 \begin_inset space ~
11756 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11760 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
11765 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11769 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11772 cm space between the arrows.
11775 \begin_layout Standard
11777 \begin_inset space ~
11781 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11783 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
11787 lists the different space sizes.
11790 \begin_layout Standard
11791 \begin_inset Float table
11798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11799 \begin_inset Caption Standard
11801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11802 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11804 name "tab:Width-of-the"
11808 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
11816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11818 \begin_inset Tabular
11819 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="12" columns="2">
11820 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
11821 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11822 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11824 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11835 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11848 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11857 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11862 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11872 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11881 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11886 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11896 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11905 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11910 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11919 <row change="inserted -712698321 1593161917">
11920 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11925 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161917
11931 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11936 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161917
11938 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11947 <row change="inserted -712698321 1593161917">
11948 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11953 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161917
11959 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11964 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161917
11966 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11976 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11985 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11990 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11994 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
11998 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12008 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12017 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
12020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12022 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12032 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12041 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
12044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12046 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12056 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12061 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12069 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
12072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12074 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12084 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12089 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12097 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
12100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12102 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12112 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12117 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12125 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
12128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12130 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12151 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12153 \begin_inset Index idx
12156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12165 \begin_layout Standard
12166 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special \SpecialChar LyX
12167 feature for adding extra space
12168 in a uniform fashion.
12169 An HFill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals
12170 the remaining space between the left and right margins.
12171 If there is more than one HFill on a line, they divide the available space
12172 equally between themselves.
12175 \begin_layout Standard
12176 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
12179 \begin_layout Quote
12181 This is on the left side
12182 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
12185 This is on the right
12188 \begin_layout Quote
12191 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
12195 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
12201 \begin_layout Quote
12204 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
12208 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
12212 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
12218 \begin_layout Standard
12219 That was an example in the
12225 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
12229 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
12233 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
12236 is one in a standard paragraph.
12237 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it
12241 sitting in-between the two arrows.
12244 \begin_layout Standard
12245 HFills can be made visible when you choose one of the
12248 \begin_inset space ~
12253 s in the space dialog: The following patterns are available:
12256 \begin_layout Standard
12258 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
12262 \begin_inset space ~
12268 \begin_layout Standard
12270 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
12274 \begin_inset space ~
12280 \begin_layout Standard
12282 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
12286 \begin_inset space ~
12292 \begin_layout Standard
12294 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
12298 \begin_inset space ~
12304 \begin_layout Standard
12306 \change_deleted -712698321 1593242277
12308 \change_inserted -712698321 1593242278
12312 \change_inserted -712698321 1593242369
12313 (= opened downwards)
12316 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
12320 \begin_inset space ~
12326 \begin_layout Standard
12328 \change_deleted -712698321 1593242281
12330 \change_inserted -712698321 1593242282
12334 \change_inserted -712698321 1593242378
12338 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
12342 \begin_inset space ~
12348 \begin_layout Standard
12349 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12357 If an HFill is at the beginning of a line, and
12361 in the first line in a paragraph, \SpecialChar LyX
12363 This prevents HFills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
12364 If you need space in this case anyway, set the
12368 option in the space dialog.
12376 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12378 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12380 name "subsec:Phantom-Space"
12385 \begin_inset Index idx
12388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12397 \begin_layout Standard
12398 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
12399 For example, you want to create the following multiple choice question:
12402 \begin_layout Standard
12403 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
12406 What is correct English?:
12407 \begin_inset Newline newline
12411 \begin_inset Newline newline
12415 \begin_inset space ~
12418 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
12419 \begin_inset Newline newline
12423 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
12426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12434 \begin_inset Newline newline
12438 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
12441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12449 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
12455 \begin_layout Standard
12457 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
12458 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12462 \begin_inset space ~
12466 \begin_inset space ~
12470 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12474 To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
12476 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12477 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12481 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two
12483 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12487 \begin_inset space ~
12491 \begin_inset space ~
12495 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12498 into the phantom inset (note the space after
12499 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12503 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12507 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
12508 That is why it is named
12509 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12513 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12517 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
12518 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding
12522 \begin_layout Subsection
12524 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12526 name "subsec:Vertical-Space"
12531 \begin_inset Index idx
12534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12543 \begin_layout Standard
12544 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the
12546 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12547 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12549 \begin_inset space ~
12555 There you find the following sizes:
12558 \begin_layout Standard
12571 are \SpecialChar LaTeX
12572 sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
12577 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
12579 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
12580 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
12582 \begin_inset space ~
12588 \begin_inset Index idx
12591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12592 Document ! Settings
12597 for the paragraph separation.
12598 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
12607 \change_inserted -712698321 1593360527
12611 \begin_layout Standard
12613 \change_inserted -712698321 1593360570
12622 equal to the height, or half the height, of a line in the current font
12623 size including line spacing.
12628 \begin_layout Standard
12634 \begin_inset Index idx
12637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12643 is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page.
12644 An example: you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
12649 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second
12650 one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal.
12659 s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
12663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12668 s are described in section
12669 \begin_inset space ~
12673 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12675 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
12684 If there are several
12688 s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
12689 You can therefore use
12693 s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page.
12696 \begin_layout Standard
12701 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
12702 \begin_inset space ~
12706 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12708 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
12715 \begin_layout Standard
12716 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12726 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of
12727 a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option
12739 \begin_layout Subsection
12740 Paragraph Alignment
12741 \begin_inset Index idx
12744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12745 Paragraph ! Alignment
12753 \begin_layout Standard
12754 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
12756 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
12759 dialog (toolbar button
12762 arg "layout-paragraph"
12766 There are five possibilities:
12769 \begin_layout Itemize
12777 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
12783 \begin_layout Itemize
12791 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
12797 \begin_layout Itemize
12805 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
12811 \begin_layout Itemize
12819 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
12825 \begin_layout Itemize
12833 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
12839 \begin_layout Standard
12840 The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word
12841 spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between
12842 the left and right margins.
12843 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this:
12846 \begin_layout Standard
12848 This paragraph is right aligned,
12851 \begin_layout Standard
12853 this one is centered,
12856 \begin_layout Standard
12858 this one is left aligned.
12861 \begin_layout Subsection
12863 \begin_inset Index idx
12866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12867 Page breaks ! Forced
12873 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12875 name "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
12882 \begin_layout Standard
12883 If you don't like the way \SpecialChar LaTeX
12884 does the page breaks in your document, you can
12885 force a page break where you want one.
12886 Normally this will not be necessary, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
12887 is good at page breaking.
12888 Only if you use a lot of
12892 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
12893 's page breaking algorithm can fail.
12896 \begin_layout Standard
12897 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished
12898 and you have checked in the preview to see if you
12902 have to change the page breaking.
12905 \begin_layout Standard
12906 There are two types of page breaks: One that ends the page without any special
12908 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
12910 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12911 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12913 \begin_inset space ~
12919 The second type, that is inserted via the menu
12921 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12922 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12924 \begin_inset space ~
12929 , ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out
12931 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page
12932 on which only the last few lines are absent.
12935 \begin_layout Standard
12936 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears
12937 at the top of a page.
12938 This is, of course, the wrong way to do it.
12940 gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables
12941 appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without
12942 having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
12944 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12946 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
12950 to learn more about
12957 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12959 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12961 name "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
12966 \begin_inset Index idx
12969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12970 Page breaks ! Clear
12978 \begin_layout Standard
12979 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed
12980 directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them.
12981 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including
12982 unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed after
12983 it, if necessary by adding pages.
12986 \begin_layout Standard
12987 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
12989 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12990 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12992 \begin_inset space ~
12998 When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu
13000 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
13001 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
13003 \begin_inset space ~
13007 \begin_inset space ~
13012 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand
13013 page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page.
13014 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706231
13018 \begin_layout Subsubsection
13020 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706295
13021 Suppressing Page Breaks
13024 \begin_inset Index idx
13027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13029 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706382
13033 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706335
13042 \change_inserted -712698321 1607005685
13044 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13046 name "subsec:Suppressing-Page-Breaks"
13051 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706444
13055 \begin_layout Standard
13057 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706504
13058 To discourage page break at
13059 \change_inserted -712698321 1607005668
13061 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706504
13062 certain point you can use
13066 \SpecialChar menuseparator
13068 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706512
13071 \SpecialChar menuseparator
13073 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706556
13080 \change_inserted 5863208 1602707015
13081 This is typically useful for paragraphs which should stay together or when
13082 you want to keep close the description for tables and pictures in case
13083 using floats or boxes is not appropriate.
13088 \begin_layout Subsection
13090 \begin_inset Index idx
13093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13100 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13102 name "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
13109 \begin_layout Standard
13110 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: one simply breaks
13112 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
13114 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
13115 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
13117 \begin_inset space ~
13121 \begin_inset space ~
13129 arg "newline-insert newline"
13133 Another type that is inserted via the menu
13135 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
13136 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
13138 \begin_inset space ~
13142 \begin_inset space ~
13150 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
13153 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between
13155 This is useful to avoid
13156 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13160 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13163 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
13166 \begin_layout Standard
13167 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct \SpecialChar LaTeX
13168 's line breaking, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
13170 very good at line breaking.
13171 There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessary to set
13172 a line break actively, for example, in a poem or for an address (see sections
13173 \begin_inset space ~
13177 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13179 reference "sec:Quote"
13184 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13186 reference "sec:Verse"
13191 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13193 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
13200 \begin_layout Subsection
13202 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13204 name "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
13209 \begin_inset Index idx
13212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13221 \begin_layout Standard
13223 \begin_inset CommandInset line
13234 \begin_layout Standard
13238 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
13239 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
13241 \begin_inset space ~
13246 you can insert horizontal lines.
13247 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline
13248 of the current text line or the paragraph.
13249 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
13252 \begin_layout Standard
13254 \begin_inset CommandInset line
13265 \begin_layout Section
13266 Characters and Symbols
13269 \begin_layout Standard
13270 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
13271 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter, for example,
13272 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
13274 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13278 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13280 reference "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
13284 for information on how this is done.
13287 \begin_layout Standard
13288 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you
13293 dialog via the menu
13295 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
13296 Special Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
13302 \begin_layout Standard
13303 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13311 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed
13312 when you are using a special screen font in \SpecialChar LyX
13314 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
13322 \begin_layout Section
13323 Fonts and Text Styles
13324 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13326 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
13333 \begin_layout Subsection
13335 \begin_inset Index idx
13338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13347 \begin_layout Standard
13348 There are two types of fonts:
13351 \begin_layout Description
13353 \begin_inset space ~
13357 \begin_inset Index idx
13360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13366 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
13367 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13371 characters) in the font.
13372 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are
13373 well suited for scaling to any requested size.
13374 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the
13375 curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
13376 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
13377 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed
13378 to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
13379 \begin_inset Newline newline
13382 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
13383 But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes.
13384 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font
13385 sizes than at small ones.
13386 \begin_inset Newline newline
13400 \begin_inset space ~
13408 \begin_layout Description
13410 \begin_inset space ~
13414 \begin_inset Index idx
13417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13423 on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start; so they
13424 will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
13425 However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each
13426 pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
13427 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an
13428 image manipulation program.
13429 In order to mitigate this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in
13430 several fixed sizes typically from around 8
13431 \begin_inset space ~
13434 pixels high up to 34
13435 \begin_inset space ~
13438 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
13439 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary
13440 to display each glyph; so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than
13442 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have
13443 to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad.
13444 \begin_inset Newline newline
13447 Bitmap fonts are named
13450 \begin_inset space ~
13455 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
13458 \begin_layout Standard
13459 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are
13460 designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
13461 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
13462 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs
13463 use scalable fonts.
13466 \begin_layout Standard
13467 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document, look at its document properties.
13470 \begin_layout Standard
13471 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards
13473 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757415
13475 \change_inserted 5863208 1598184810
13478 styles rather than specifying a particular font.
13479 For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current
13480 font, to emphasize text you use an
13481 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13485 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13489 This concept fits in perfectly with \SpecialChar LyX
13491 In \SpecialChar LyX
13492 , you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting
13496 \begin_layout Subsection
13499 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13501 name "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
13508 \begin_layout Standard
13509 Traditionally, \SpecialChar LaTeX
13510 used its own fonts.
13511 That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your
13512 operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your \SpecialChar LaTeX
13515 The reason is that \SpecialChar LaTeX
13516 needs some extra information about the fonts, which
13517 have to be provided by additional files and packages.
13518 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared
13519 to a word processor.
13520 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts
13521 are generally of very good quality, and that \SpecialChar LaTeX
13522 files are very portable across
13523 different machines.
13524 Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional \SpecialChar LaTeX
13525 has increased a lot
13526 in the meantime; so you can find packages for many free and commercial
13529 supports the fonts that are under a free license via the user interface
13531 \begin_inset space ~
13535 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13537 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
13542 Other fonts are available if you enter the relevant \SpecialChar LaTeX
13543 code in the document
13544 preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired font).
13547 \begin_layout Standard
13548 Recent developments brought some new \SpecialChar LaTeX
13549 engines that are also able directly
13550 to access fonts that are installed for your operating system, namely Xe\SpecialChar TeX
13552 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
13554 Both engines are supported by \SpecialChar LyX
13556 By using them, you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font
13557 that is installed on your system.
13558 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
13561 \begin_layout Standard
13562 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13570 In practice, some fonts might fail due to a legacy (non Unicode) font encoding,
13571 bad metrics, or other font deficiencies; so you might have to experiment.
13579 \begin_layout Subsection
13580 Document Font and Font size
13581 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13583 name "subsec:Document-Font"
13588 \begin_inset Index idx
13591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13598 \begin_inset Index idx
13601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13610 \begin_layout Standard
13611 You can set the document fonts in the
13613 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
13617 \begin_inset Index idx
13620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13621 Document ! Settings
13631 section of the dialog, you can specify which font should be used for the
13632 three different font shapes — roman (serif),
13635 \begin_inset space ~
13644 (monospaced) — and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors
13646 \begin_inset space ~
13649 serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit with the roman font.
13652 \begin_layout Standard
13657 , you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
13658 This requires that you use
13670 as the output format, i.
13671 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13675 \begin_inset space \space{}
13678 you will have to have either Xe\SpecialChar TeX
13679 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
13680 installed (see section
13681 \begin_inset space ~
13685 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13687 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
13692 You will then not have access to \SpecialChar TeX
13694 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
13695 then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists (roman,
13697 \begin_inset space ~
13700 serif, and typewriter), since \SpecialChar LyX
13701 cannot determine the family.
13702 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts, due
13703 to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar breakableslash
13706 cannot determine this in advance, so you might need to experiment.
13709 \begin_layout Standard
13710 If you use \SpecialChar TeX
13711 fonts (which is the default), the possible options for the font
13716 and a list of fonts available with your \SpecialChar LaTeX
13722 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
13724 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413696
13726 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413700
13729 font encoding, this is
13730 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413733
13731 , depending on the document language,
13734 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413747
13735 either the standard \SpecialChar TeX
13737 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13743 \begin_inset space ~
13749 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13759 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413754
13760 the standard \SpecialChar TeX
13762 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13768 \begin_inset space ~
13774 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13782 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413756
13786 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13794 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13798 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13803 European Computer Modern
13806 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13814 However, some classes set different default fonts.
13817 \begin_layout Standard
13822 is a bitmap font, it looks pixelated in PDF output, especially when you
13823 read the PDF in a zoomed size.
13827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13828 This problem is less severe if you read PDFs in
13831 \begin_inset space ~
13836 version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font
13842 To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font.
13843 Depending on how your document should look, you can either:
13846 \begin_layout Itemize
13850 \begin_inset space ~
13855 fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
13868 \begin_inset space ~
13873 was developed for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13874 community in order to replace
13878 as the default font.
13879 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
13880 Except for some details, where the appearance was improved,
13883 \begin_inset space ~
13896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13897 One difference is improved kerning.
13905 \begin_layout Itemize
13906 If you do not like the look of
13914 , you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided, e.
13915 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13919 \begin_inset space ~
13925 \begin_inset space ~
13935 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
13936 \begin_inset space ~
13939 serif and typewriter fonts,
13943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13944 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
13945 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13951 \begin_inset space ~
13960 for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i.
13961 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13965 \begin_inset space \space{}
13973 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13977 \begin_inset space \space{}
13983 \begin_inset space ~
13991 \begin_inset space ~
14001 but you can also select your own.
14002 \begin_inset Newline newline
14005 The differences between roman,
14008 \begin_inset space ~
14017 fonts are explained in section
14018 \begin_inset space ~
14022 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14024 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
14029 \begin_inset Newline newline
14035 \begin_inset space ~
14040 was originally designed for newspapers.
14041 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit
14042 into the small newspaper columns.
14046 \begin_inset space ~
14051 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
14054 \begin_layout Standard
14055 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
14068 Some classes provide additional sizes.
14073 depends on the class you are using.
14074 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
14077 \begin_layout Standard
14078 Note that the font size is the
14083 That means that \SpecialChar LyX
14084 scales all other possible font sizes (such as those used
14085 in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value.
14086 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
14089 \begin_inset space ~
14095 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
14096 \begin_inset space ~
14100 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14102 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
14109 \begin_layout Standard
14113 \begin_inset space ~
14118 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should
14120 \begin_inset space ~
14123 serif or typewriter.
14128 selection uses what is preset by the class, the other selections override
14138 , but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
14141 \begin_layout Standard
14146 LaTeX font encoding
14148 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to
14149 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
14155 \begin_inset Index idx
14158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14166 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413571
14168 \begin_inset space ~
14172 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14174 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
14181 Normally, you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
14182 Unless you have specific reasons, use
14183 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413471
14187 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413474
14195 \begin_layout Standard
14196 With some fonts, the checkboxes
14198 Use Old Style Figures
14202 Use True Small Caps
14205 These are extra features some fonts provide.
14208 Use Old Style Figures
14210 is checked, old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures)
14212 Old style figures are the numerals (0
14213 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14217 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14220 9) with ascenders and descenders, which makes them fit nicely with lowercase
14224 Use True Small Caps
14226 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made
14227 of scaled capitals.
14228 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets; they generally look
14229 better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
14230 \change_inserted -712698321 1563000270
14234 \begin_layout Standard
14236 \change_inserted -712698321 1563000448
14237 Furthermore, with some fonts, you can add additional (comma-separated) options
14238 provided by the font package (or the
14242 package, if you use non-TeX fonts), into the
14247 This presupposes that you are familiar with the respective \SpecialChar LaTeX
14253 \begin_layout Standard
14258 allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify
14259 a font to display the script characters.
14263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14264 The font will be the argument for the commands of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
14270 \begin_inset Index idx
14273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14280 So this has no effect for the document language
14296 \begin_layout Standard
14299 Enable micro-typographic extensions
14301 activates extensions such as character protrusion and font expansion via
14302 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
14308 \begin_inset Index idx
14311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14313 packages ! microtype
14322 \begin_layout Standard
14325 Disallow line breaks after dashes
14327 outputs en- and em-dashes as literal characters
14331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14332 Or \SpecialChar LaTeX
14333 macro, if the literal character is not supported by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
14339 instead of ligatures (--, ---) (see section
14340 \begin_inset space ~
14344 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14346 reference "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
14356 \begin_layout Standard
14357 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
14361 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
14364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14369 When you choose a new font or font size, \SpecialChar LyX
14374 change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output;
14375 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
14377 's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
14379 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
14382 dialog, see section
14383 \begin_inset space ~
14387 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14389 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
14401 \begin_layout Subsection
14405 \begin_layout Standard
14406 In \SpecialChar LaTeX
14407 the font used for characters in equations is different from the document
14409 For the case that you use \SpecialChar TeX
14410 fonts for your document, you can explicitly
14411 choose a math font in the dialog
14413 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
14417 \begin_inset Index idx
14420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14421 Document ! Settings
14427 The default setting is that \SpecialChar LyX
14428 automatically selects a math font.
14429 For most cases this will be \SpecialChar LaTeX
14430 's default – the math variant of \SpecialChar LaTeX
14433 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14439 \begin_inset space ~
14445 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14450 will automatically only load another math font if a math variant of the
14451 document font is available.
14454 \begin_layout Standard
14455 Note that the math font will not be used for
14459 (which is inserted with the shortcut
14465 or by the insertion of the command
14472 Also note that some math fonts are sans
14473 \begin_inset space ~
14477 Your document might therefore look strange when the document text has serifs
14478 while the math characters do not.
14480 \begin_inset space ~
14483 serif math fonts make therefore in most cases only sense if you select
14486 \begin_inset space ~
14494 \begin_inset space ~
14499 in the document font settings.
14502 \begin_layout Standard
14503 If you use non-\SpecialChar TeX
14504 fonts for the document, you can only choose for math to
14505 use either the document's class default \SpecialChar TeX
14506 font (in most cases
14507 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14513 \begin_inset space ~
14519 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14522 ) or to use the non-\SpecialChar TeX
14523 variant of the document's class default font (in most
14525 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14531 \begin_inset space ~
14537 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14543 \begin_layout Subsection
14545 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757119
14547 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757120
14551 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595783
14553 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14555 name "subsec:charstyles"
14562 \begin_inset Index idx
14565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14572 \begin_inset Index idx
14575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14584 \begin_layout Standard
14585 As we've already seen, \SpecialChar LyX
14586 automatically changes the
14587 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601052
14590 style for certain paragraph environments.
14592 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757169
14593 In this section, we will explain how the style of selected text passages
14595 This is where we meet the concept of
14601 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601099
14603 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601099
14607 \begin_layout Standard
14609 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595930
14614 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757160
14616 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757161
14629 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757189
14635 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14638 e., available with all document classes.
14639 On top of that, some document classes and modules provide
14643 for specific purposes.
14644 We describe both types of text styles in a minute.
14647 \begin_layout Standard
14649 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757201
14650 Before we do that, though, allow us just a few words of what we mean by
14660 Traditional word processors used to focus on so-called
14664 : if you wanted to emphasize a word, you selected it and chose e.
14665 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14670 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14674 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14677 — you customized the
14682 Modern processors, \SpecialChar LyX
14683 among them, encourage the use of
14695 instead (although formal markup is still possible; see section
14696 \begin_inset space ~
14700 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14702 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
14707 Rather than fiddling with
14711 , they encourage the use of
14715 , who are defined with regard to their function (e.
14716 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14720 \begin_inset Quotes els
14724 \begin_inset Quotes ers
14727 ), not their form (
14728 \begin_inset Quotes els
14732 \begin_inset Quotes ers
14736 There are many advantages of the semantic approach.
14737 To begin with, using functional categories keeps you thinking about why
14738 you are actually marking up, if your markup is consistent and systematic,
14739 and whether this particular markup makes sense.
14740 On a more practical level, it is easy to change the appearance if needed.
14741 Consider the case when you are writing a paper and set all proper names
14747 Now if the publisher requests to have names appear differently (e.
14748 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14751 g., in normal font, or ALL-CAPS), you would have to change any single occurrence.
14752 With a semantic markup (such as
14756 ; see below), you'd just need to change the definition of
14761 It's a ten second change (if you know how to change the \SpecialChar LaTeX
14763 Moreover, semantic markup even allows you to produce different versions
14764 of a document, using different markup semantics.
14767 \begin_layout Standard
14769 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757213
14770 With that in mind, we now turn to the semantic text styles that are provided
14771 by \SpecialChar LyX
14777 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14779 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757220
14780 Builtin Text Styles
14781 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14783 name "subsec:Builtin-Character-Styles"
14790 \begin_layout Standard
14792 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757226
14793 The two builtin text styles can be
14794 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596489
14798 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596491
14802 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596494
14803 both of these styles
14806 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596436
14810 \change_deleted 34634807 1621006132
14812 \change_inserted 34634807 1621006135
14814 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596436
14820 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596045
14826 \begin_layout Standard
14831 style, do one of the following:
14834 \begin_layout Itemize
14835 click on the toolbar button
14844 \begin_layout Itemize
14845 use the key binding
14852 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596051
14856 \begin_layout Itemize
14858 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596318
14862 \change_deleted 34634807 1621006154
14864 \change_inserted 34634807 1621006157
14866 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596318
14874 arg "dialog-show character"
14878 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596318
14882 arg "dialog-show character"
14886 \change_deleted 34634807 1621006237
14887 as described in section
14888 \begin_inset space ~
14892 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14894 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
14899 \change_inserted 34634807 1621006263
14909 \begin_layout Standard
14911 \change_deleted 34634807 1621006284
14913 \change_inserted 34634807 1621006284
14917 \change_deleted 34634807 1621006286
14921 \change_deleted 34634807 1621006290
14923 \change_inserted 34634807 1621006291
14927 \change_deleted 34634807 1621006296
14935 style is already active, they deactivate it.
14938 \begin_layout Standard
14939 One typically uses the
14943 style for proper names.
14945 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14952 is the original author of \SpecialChar LyX
14954 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14958 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598183
14962 \begin_layout Standard
14964 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598323
14969 is producing text in
14973 , but the definition can be changed.
14978 \begin_layout Standard
14980 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757229
14982 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757229
14990 You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the
14997 \begin_layout Itemize
14998 clicking on the toolbar button
15007 \begin_layout Itemize
15008 using the keybindings
15015 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596078
15019 \begin_layout Itemize
15021 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596340
15025 \change_deleted 34634807 1621006353
15027 \change_inserted 34634807 1621006356
15029 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596340
15037 arg "dialog-show character"
15041 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596340
15045 arg "dialog-show character"
15049 \change_deleted 34634807 1621007331
15050 as described in section
15051 \begin_inset space ~
15055 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15057 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
15062 \change_inserted 34634807 1621006374
15072 \begin_layout Standard
15077 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or \SpecialChar LaTeX
15079 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598370
15081 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598370
15084 packages use a different font
15085 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598396
15086 , and you can also customize it yourself by changing the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15092 \begin_layout Standard
15093 We've been using the
15097 style all over the place in this document.
15098 Here's one more example:
15101 \begin_layout Quotation
15105 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757231
15107 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757231
15113 \begin_layout Standard
15114 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
15115 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
15116 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid
15117 the common tendency to overuse
15118 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757236
15120 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757236
15125 \change_deleted 5863208 1598186598
15127 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598419
15131 \begin_layout Standard
15133 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757709
15134 In contrast to the custom text styles, the builtin styles are represented
15135 only as font changes and integrated in the
15143 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598525
15146 always reset to the default font using the key binding
15153 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598540
15155 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598540
15159 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596565
15162 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
15164 \begin_inset space ~
15167 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
15169 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598549
15179 arg "dialog-show character"
15185 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598549
15187 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598549
15193 arg "dialog-show character"
15197 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598549
15201 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15203 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756578
15205 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15207 name "subsec:Custom-Character-Styles"
15214 \begin_layout Standard
15216 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757241
15217 Custom text styles can be provided by the document class, a module (see
15219 \begin_inset space ~
15223 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15225 reference "subsec:Modules"
15232 ), or local layout settings (see section
15233 \begin_inset space ~
15237 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15239 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
15244 As the two builtin styles, they provide
15248 markup for specific functions.
15249 For instance, \SpecialChar LyX
15254 module that provides, among other things, some custom text styles to markup
15264 \begin_inset Quotes els
15268 \begin_inset Quotes ers
15274 \begin_layout Standard
15276 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757806
15277 These styles can be found, if available, in the
15279 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
15281 \change_inserted 34634807 1621006495
15283 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757806
15289 \begin_layout Standard
15291 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757245
15292 For the purpose of demonstration, we have loaded in this document the optional
15297 that replicates and extends the two builtin styles.
15298 By example of the emphasized style, we can see the differences in look
15299 and feel (although the result in the typeset output is the same): while
15304 appears as normal font change, the custom text style
15305 \begin_inset Flex Emph
15308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15310 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599318
15318 appears as an inset, with a label below that identifies its semantics.
15319 This is the way all custom text styles look and feel like.
15320 For instance, the three others from the module we have loaded are:
15321 \begin_inset Flex Code
15324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15326 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599387
15335 \begin_inset Flex Strong
15338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15340 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599390
15349 \begin_inset Flex Noun
15352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15354 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599392
15363 Note that custom text styles might (as in the example) or might not emulate
15364 on screen their formal appearance.
15369 \begin_layout Subsection
15371 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599470
15373 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599472
15377 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599462
15383 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756524
15385 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756526
15391 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599485
15393 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599485
15397 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15399 name "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
15404 \begin_inset Index idx
15407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15416 \begin_layout Standard
15417 There are always occasions when you will need to do some
15418 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599505
15421 fine-tuning; so \SpecialChar LyX
15423 \change_deleted -712698321 1525595143
15425 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595144
15429 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601741
15430 the properties of text passages
15431 \change_deleted -712698321 1525595163
15435 For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet
15436 requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
15437 Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts
15438 from ordinary dialog.
15439 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595231
15443 \begin_layout Standard
15445 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757255
15446 If there are no custom text styles provided by the document class or a module
15447 for this purpose (which is, as written above, generally the better way
15448 of handling such issues), you often find yourself wanting to quickly tweak
15449 the properties of the respective text passages.
15454 comes in as a last resort.
15459 \begin_layout Standard
15460 Before we document how to
15461 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599696
15462 use custom character style
15463 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599700
15464 tweak the text properties
15466 , we want to issue a warning yet again: Don't overuse
15467 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599715
15469 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599716
15473 \begin_inset Newline newline
15476 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and
15477 tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
15480 \begin_layout Standard
15482 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599736
15483 use custom character styles
15484 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599739
15485 tweak text properties
15488 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599762
15491 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
15493 \begin_inset space ~
15496 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
15504 arg "dialog-show character"
15507 dialog or press the toolbar button
15510 arg "dialog-show character"
15515 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599782
15518 boxes in this dialog, each corresponding to a different
15519 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599798
15521 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599796
15524 property that you can choose.
15525 You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select
15528 \begin_inset space ~
15533 , which keeps the current state of that property.
15535 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677079
15539 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677076
15541 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677077
15546 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
15547 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph
15548 environments all at once.
15551 \begin_layout Standard
15553 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599868
15555 \change_inserted 34634807 1621006625
15559 \change_deleted 34634807 1621006625
15561 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599869
15565 \change_inserted 34634807 1621006629
15567 \change_deleted 34634807 1621006628
15572 , and their options (in addition to
15575 \begin_inset space ~
15581 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677094
15585 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677096
15593 \begin_layout Labeling
15594 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15600 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15604 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15608 The possible options are:
15612 \begin_layout Labeling
15613 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15618 This is the Roman font family.
15619 Normally a serif font.
15620 It's also the default family.
15630 \begin_layout Labeling
15631 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15635 \begin_inset space ~
15642 This is the Sans Serif font family.
15654 \begin_layout Labeling
15655 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15662 This is the Typewriter font family.
15668 arg "font-typewriter"
15674 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607448
15678 \begin_layout Standard
15680 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607495
15681 The general differences of these families are:
15684 \begin_layout Itemize
15686 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607451
15691 fonts use characters with serifs.
15692 These are the small
15693 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15697 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15700 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
15701 The following example shows the difference:
15702 \begin_inset Newline newline
15706 \begin_inset Newline newline
15711 text without serifs
15714 \begin_inset Newline newline
15717 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
15718 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
15725 \begin_layout Itemize
15727 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
15732 is not recommended for use as a base type.
15733 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
15734 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
15737 \begin_layout Itemize
15739 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
15745 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15749 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15752 font, which means every character has the same width; the
15753 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15757 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15761 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15765 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15770 \begin_inset Newline newline
15774 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
15777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15779 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
15792 \begin_inset Note Note
15795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15797 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
15798 For more on phantoms see section
15799 \begin_inset space ~
15803 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15805 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
15815 \begin_inset Newline newline
15824 \begin_layout Labeling
15825 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15830 This corresponds to the print weight.
15835 \begin_layout Labeling
15836 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15841 This is the Medium font series.
15842 It's also the default series.
15845 \begin_layout Labeling
15846 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15853 This is the Bold font series.
15866 \begin_layout Labeling
15867 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15872 As the name implies.
15877 \begin_layout Labeling
15878 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15883 This is the Upright font shape.
15884 It's also the default shape.
15887 \begin_layout Labeling
15888 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15898 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599902
15903 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599902
15908 s the Italic font shape
15914 \begin_layout Labeling
15915 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15922 This is the Slanted font shape
15924 (although it might not be visible in \SpecialChar LyX
15925 , this is different from italic).
15928 \begin_layout Labeling
15929 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15933 \begin_inset space ~
15940 This is the Small caps font shape
15947 \begin_layout Labeling
15948 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15950 \change_deleted 34634807 1621006688
15955 Alters the text color.
15956 Note that not all DVI
15957 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599925
15959 \change_deleted 34634807 1621006688
15960 viewers are able to display colors.
15964 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599939
15966 \begin_inset space ~
15970 \change_deleted 34634807 1621006688
15973 , which means that the document default color set in
15975 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
15976 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
15982 \begin_inset space ~
15988 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599960
15990 \change_deleted 34634807 1621006688
15992 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599974
15994 \change_deleted 34634807 1621006688
16072 \begin_inset Index idx
16075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16082 \change_deleted 5863208 1598186626
16088 \begin_layout Labeling
16089 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16091 \change_deleted 34634807 1621006878
16096 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
16097 the language of the document.
16098 Text marked in this way will be underlined in the \SpecialChar LyX
16099 workarea in blue to
16100 indicate the change
16101 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600002
16102 (only within \SpecialChar LyX
16104 \change_deleted 34634807 1621006878
16106 \begin_inset Newline newline
16109 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
16111 respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
16112 When using the spell checking (see section
16113 \begin_inset space ~
16117 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16119 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
16123 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
16124 \begin_inset Newline newline
16127 If you do not want text passages to be spellchecked, activate
16129 Exclude from Spellchecking
16132 Passages marked like this will still be hyphenated correctly.
16133 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677618
16137 \begin_layout Labeling
16138 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16143 Alters the size of the font.
16145 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600033
16147 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600034
16151 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600037
16154 numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually proportional to the
16155 document font size.
16156 Once again, you don't feed \SpecialChar LyX
16157 the details, but a general description of what
16163 \begin_layout Labeling
16164 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16172 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16176 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16185 arg "font-size tiny"
16191 \begin_layout Labeling
16192 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16200 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16204 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16213 arg "font-size scriptsize"
16219 \begin_layout Labeling
16220 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16228 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16232 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16241 arg "font-size footnotesize"
16247 \begin_layout Labeling
16248 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16256 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16260 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16269 arg "font-size small"
16275 \begin_layout Labeling
16276 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16282 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16286 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16290 It's also the default size.
16294 arg "font-size normal"
16300 \begin_layout Labeling
16301 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16309 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16313 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16322 arg "font-size large"
16328 \begin_layout Labeling
16329 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16337 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16341 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16350 arg "font-size larger"
16356 \begin_layout Labeling
16357 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16365 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16369 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16378 arg "font-size largest"
16384 \begin_layout Labeling
16385 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16393 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16397 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16406 arg "font-size huge"
16412 \begin_layout Labeling
16413 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16421 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16425 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16434 arg "font-size giant"
16440 \begin_layout Labeling
16441 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16446 This increases the size by one step (for instance, from
16447 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16451 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16455 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16459 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16466 arg "font-size increase"
16472 \begin_layout Labeling
16473 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16478 This decreases the size by one step (for instance, from
16479 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16483 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16487 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16491 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16498 arg "font-size decrease"
16504 \begin_layout Standard
16509 : don't go crazy with this feature.
16510 You should almost never need to change the font size.
16512 automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments
16513 — use those instead.
16514 This is here for fine-tuning only!
16515 \change_inserted 34634807 1621006744
16520 \begin_layout Standard
16522 \change_inserted 34634807 1621006776
16523 Another combo box allows to tweak
16530 \begin_layout Labeling
16531 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16533 \change_inserted 34634807 1621006733
16538 Alters the text color.
16539 Note that not all DVI viewers are able to display colors.
16544 , which means that the document default color set in
16546 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16547 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
16553 \begin_inset space ~
16558 is used, you can select
16635 \begin_inset Index idx
16638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16640 \change_inserted 34634807 1621006733
16651 \begin_layout Labeling
16652 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16654 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600062
16658 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600065
16664 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600102
16665 change a few other things at the character level
16666 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600112
16667 have text passages being underlined
16671 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600240
16672 Avoid using underlining if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter
16673 days, when you could not change fonts.
16674 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
16675 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
16676 because some people
16680 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
16687 \begin_layout Labeling
16688 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16690 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600074
16697 This is text with emphasize on
16700 This might seem like the same as
16704 , but it is actually a bit different.
16710 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized
16712 Normally this font is equal to italic.
16713 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600322
16717 \begin_layout Labeling
16718 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16720 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600337
16725 Don't use underlining.
16730 \begin_layout Labeling
16731 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16733 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600192
16737 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600193
16745 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600212
16747 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600209
16756 arg "font-underline"
16762 \begin_inset Newline newline
16766 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600236
16769 Avoid using underbar if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
16770 when you could not change fonts.
16771 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
16772 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
16773 because some people
16777 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
16782 \begin_layout Labeling
16783 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16787 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600261
16789 \begin_inset space ~
16798 This is text with Double under
16799 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600270
16801 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600271
16810 arg "font-underunderline"
16814 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600282
16816 \begin_inset Newline newline
16819 As we just warned you against using underbar, you can imagine what we think
16820 about double underbar
16825 \begin_layout Labeling
16826 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16830 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600285
16832 \begin_inset space ~
16841 This is text with Wavy under
16842 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600294
16844 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600295
16853 arg "font-underwave"
16857 \begin_inset Newline newline
16860 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
16861 Keep antinausea pills handy.
16862 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600130
16867 \begin_layout Labeling
16868 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16870 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600169
16875 lets you strike-through text passages in two ways:
16881 \begin_layout Labeling
16882 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16884 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600364
16889 Don't use strikethrough.
16892 \begin_layout Labeling
16893 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16897 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600378
16899 \begin_inset space ~
16903 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600378
16911 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600382
16913 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601925
16914 Single strikethrough
16922 arg "font-strikeout"
16926 \begin_inset Newline newline
16929 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been
16930 changed in the meantime.
16933 \begin_layout Labeling
16934 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16936 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600394
16940 \begin_inset space ~
16944 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600397
16946 \begin_inset space ~
16950 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600398
16958 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601941
16960 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601943
16966 \begin_inset Newline newline
16969 This is used to make text hardly readable.
16973 \begin_layout Standard
16975 \change_inserted 34634807 1621007597
16976 A drop-down menu allows to change the parameters for the
16979 \begin_layout Labeling
16980 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16982 \change_inserted 34634807 1621006898
16987 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
16988 the language of the document.
16989 Text marked in this way will be underlined in the \SpecialChar LyX
16990 workarea in blue to
16991 indicate the change.
16992 \begin_inset Newline newline
16995 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
16997 respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
16998 When using the spell checking (see section
16999 \begin_inset space ~
17003 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17005 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
17009 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
17010 \begin_inset Newline newline
17013 If you do not want text passages to be spellchecked, activate
17015 Exclude from Spellchecking
17018 Passages marked like this will still be hyphenated correctly.
17021 \begin_layout Standard
17023 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757268
17024 In addition to all the formal markup described above, the dialog also provides
17025 you access to the two builtin semantic text styles (see section
17026 \begin_inset space ~
17030 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17032 reference "subsec:Builtin-Character-Styles"
17037 \change_inserted 34634807 1621181776
17041 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757268
17047 \begin_layout Itemize
17049 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600579
17056 This is text with emphasize on
17061 \begin_layout Itemize
17065 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600548
17072 This is text with Noun on.
17074 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600637
17081 , this is a logical attribute.
17082 Normally it's equivalent to
17085 \begin_inset space ~
17095 \begin_layout Standard
17096 So you have a huge number of combinations to
17097 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600660
17099 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600660
17104 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600674
17105 chosen a new character style
17106 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600725
17107 applied a text property
17110 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600703
17113 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
17115 \begin_inset space ~
17118 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
17126 arg "dialog-show character"
17132 arg "dialog-show character"
17135 ) dialog, the settings are
17136 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600733
17140 You can activate the
17141 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600738
17143 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600745
17144 last applied properties
17146 by using the toolbar button
17149 arg "textstyle-apply"
17153 The button lets you apply
17154 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600766
17155 your custom character style
17156 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600778
17159 even when the dialog isn't visible.
17161 \change_inserted -712698321 1545905101
17162 A press on the button will apply the most recent setting again, a press
17163 on the down-arrow will open a menu with the (max.
17164 20) most recently applied settings, from which you can select one.
17169 \begin_layout Standard
17170 To completely reset the
17171 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600787
17173 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600823
17174 text properties of a selection
17176 to the default, use
17177 \change_inserted -712698321 1545917704
17179 \change_deleted -712698321 1545917700
17189 \change_inserted -712698321 1545917733
17194 from the menu of the toolbar button
17197 arg "textstyle-apply"
17204 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600803
17205 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed (suppose
17206 you just set the shape to
17207 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17211 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17215 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17219 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17225 \begin_inset space ~
17239 \begin_layout Standard
17241 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
17242 You should also know something about the differences between the three main
17250 \begin_inset space ~
17262 \begin_layout Itemize
17264 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
17270 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17274 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17277 font, which means every character has the same width; the
17278 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17282 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17286 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17290 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17295 \begin_inset Newline newline
17299 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
17302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17313 \begin_inset Note Note
17316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17317 For more on phantoms see section
17318 \begin_inset space ~
17322 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17324 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
17334 \begin_inset Newline newline
17340 \begin_layout Itemize
17342 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
17347 fonts use characters with serifs.
17348 These are the small
17349 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17353 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17356 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
17357 The following example shows the difference:
17358 \begin_inset Newline newline
17362 \begin_inset Newline newline
17367 text without serifs
17370 \begin_inset Newline newline
17373 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
17374 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
17381 \begin_layout Itemize
17383 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
17388 is not recommended for use as a base type.
17389 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
17390 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
17395 \begin_layout Standard
17397 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600873
17398 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17402 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17405 refers to applying or removing font properties.
17406 When a property is marked for toggling in the
17409 \begin_inset space ~
17414 dialog, applying the style to text that already has the property will cause
17415 the property to be removed.
17416 If you, for example, apply a style with properties A, B and C to text that
17417 currently has font properties B, C, F and G, and if B is set to toggle
17418 and C is set not to toggle, the text ends up with properties A, C, F and
17421 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17425 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17429 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17433 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17436 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
17437 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
17438 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17442 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17445 etc.), toggling behavior is up to you.
17449 \begin_inset space ~
17454 is checked, all of the left side properties are toggled; by default, none
17457 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17461 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17465 If you, for example, set
17466 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17470 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17474 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17478 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17484 \begin_inset space ~
17489 , then apply the style to bold face text, the text will revert to the default
17491 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17495 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17498 ), no matter how many times you apply the style.
17503 \begin_layout Standard
17505 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607667
17508 with the same warning once again: Do not overuse the fonts! They are, more
17509 often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
17512 \begin_layout Section
17513 Printing and Previewing
17516 \begin_layout Subsection
17520 \begin_layout Standard
17521 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation
17522 using \SpecialChar LyX
17523 , you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
17524 Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what
17525 goes on behind-the-scenes.
17526 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
17528 Additional Features
17533 \begin_layout Standard
17535 uses the program \SpecialChar LaTeX
17538 is just a macro package for the \SpecialChar TeX
17539 typesetting system, but to prevent confusion,
17540 we will only refer to \SpecialChar LaTeX
17543 is what you use to do your actual writing.
17544 Then, \SpecialChar LyX
17545 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
17546 to turn your writing into printable output.
17547 This happens in two stages:
17550 \begin_layout Enumerate
17551 First, \SpecialChar LyX
17552 converts your document to a series of text commands for \SpecialChar LaTeX
17554 a file with the extension,
17555 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17563 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17569 \begin_layout Enumerate
17570 Next, \SpecialChar LyX
17571 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
17572 to use the commands in the
17576 file to produce printable output.
17579 \begin_layout Subsection
17580 Output file formats
17581 \begin_inset Index idx
17584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17591 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17593 name "subsec:Output-file-formats"
17600 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17602 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337594
17604 \change_inserted -131811572 1600337596
17608 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337574
17612 \begin_inset Index idx
17615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17617 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337607
17619 \change_inserted -131811572 1600337612
17630 \begin_layout Standard
17631 This file type has the extension
17632 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17640 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17644 It contains your document as plain text
17645 \change_inserted -131811572 1600337643
17647 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337647
17648 following the rules of the
17649 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17652 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
17653 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17661 \begin_layout Standard
17662 You can export your document to
17663 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337684
17665 \change_inserted -131811572 1600337686
17670 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17671 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17673 \begin_inset space ~
17679 However, this will not export any externally generated material such as
17680 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
17681 bibliography (section
17682 \begin_inset space ~
17686 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17688 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
17693 If your document includes such material, use
17695 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17696 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17698 \begin_inset space ~
17702 \begin_inset space ~
17706 \begin_inset space ~
17714 \begin_inset space ~
17718 \begin_inset space ~
17724 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating
17725 thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to
17726 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337720
17728 \change_inserted -131811572 1600337722
17734 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17737 \begin_inset Index idx
17740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17741 File formats ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
17750 \begin_layout Standard
17751 This file type has the extension
17752 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17760 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17763 and contains all commands that are necessary for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
17766 If you know \SpecialChar LaTeX
17767 , you can use it to find out \SpecialChar LaTeX
17768 -Errors or to process it manually
17769 with console commands.
17770 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
17771 -file is automatically created in \SpecialChar LyX
17772 's temporary directory whenever you
17773 view or export your document.
17776 \begin_layout Standard
17777 You can export your document as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
17778 -file using the menu
17780 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17781 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17785 The different \SpecialChar LaTeX
17786 export variants are explained in section
17787 \begin_inset space ~
17791 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17793 reference "subsec:Export"
17800 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17802 \begin_inset Index idx
17805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17814 \begin_layout Standard
17815 This file type has the extension
17816 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17824 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17829 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17833 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17836 (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine
17837 to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
17838 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
17842 \begin_layout Standard
17843 DVI files do not contain images, they only link to them.
17844 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
17845 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make
17846 them visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer
17847 when you view the DVI.
17848 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
17851 \begin_layout Standard
17852 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
17854 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17855 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17860 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17861 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17863 \begin_inset space ~
17869 The latter option uses the program
17871 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17877 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17880 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
17881 font access (see section
17882 \begin_inset space ~
17886 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17888 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
17893 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17894 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
17899 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17901 \begin_inset Index idx
17904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17905 File formats ! PostScript
17913 \begin_layout Standard
17914 This file type has the extension
17915 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17923 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17927 PostScript was developed by the company
17931 as a printer language.
17932 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the
17934 PostScript can be seen as a
17935 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17938 programming language
17939 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17942 ; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
17946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17947 If you are interested in learning more about this, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
17954 \begin_inset Index idx
17957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17959 packages ! pstricks
17969 As a result of this, the files are often bigger than PDFs.
17972 \begin_layout Standard
17973 PostScript can only contain images in the format
17974 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17977 Encapsulated PostScript
17978 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17981 (EPS, file extension
17982 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17990 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17994 As \SpecialChar LyX
17995 allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has to
17996 convert them in the background to EPS.
17997 If, for example, you have 50
17998 \begin_inset space ~
18001 images in your document, \SpecialChar LyX
18003 \begin_inset space ~
18006 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
18007 This might slow down your workflow with \SpecialChar LyX
18009 So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as
18010 EPS to avoid this problem.
18013 \begin_layout Standard
18014 You can export to PostScript using the menu
18016 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
18017 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
18023 \begin_layout Subsubsection
18025 \begin_inset Index idx
18028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18035 \begin_inset Index idx
18038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18047 \begin_layout Standard
18048 This file type has the extension
18049 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18057 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18062 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18065 Portable Document Format
18066 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18073 was derived from PostScript.
18074 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
18076 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18080 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18083 implies, it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output
18084 looks exactly the same.
18087 \begin_layout Standard
18088 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
18089 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18092 Joint Photographic Experts Group
18093 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18096 (JPG, file extension
18097 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18105 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18109 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18117 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18121 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18124 Portable Network Graphics
18125 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18128 (PNG, file extension
18129 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18137 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18141 You can also use any other image format, because \SpecialChar LyX
18142 converts them in the
18143 background to one of these formats.
18144 But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion
18145 will slow down your workflow.
18146 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
18149 \begin_layout Standard
18150 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
18152 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
18158 \begin_layout Description
18160 \begin_inset space ~
18163 (pdflatex) This uses the program
18167 which converts your file directly to PDF.
18170 \begin_layout Description
18172 \begin_inset space ~
18179 ) This uses the program
18181 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
18184 which converts your file directly to PDF.
18187 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
18190 is a new engine, derived from
18194 , that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font
18195 access (see section
18196 \begin_inset space ~
18200 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18202 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
18207 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
18208 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
18213 \begin_layout Description
18215 \begin_inset space ~
18222 ) This uses the program
18227 that converts your file directly to PDF.
18233 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
18234 font access (see section
18235 \begin_inset space ~
18239 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18241 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
18246 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts, for example,
18247 vertically written Japanese.
18250 \begin_layout Description
18252 \begin_inset space ~
18255 (cropped) This is the same as
18258 \begin_inset space ~
18263 but the result is a PDF with cropped page margins.
18264 This is for example useful if you want to use \SpecialChar LyX
18265 to generate good-looking
18266 formulas to use them in other programs like for presentations.
18269 \begin_layout Description
18271 \begin_inset space ~
18274 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
18278 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to
18282 \begin_layout Description
18284 \begin_inset space ~
18287 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
18291 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
18292 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
18296 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
18297 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
18300 \begin_layout Standard
18304 \begin_inset space ~
18313 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and
18314 works without problems.
18315 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar breakableslash
18316 or specific OpenType fonts, you might
18320 \begin_inset space ~
18328 \begin_inset space ~
18333 instead, bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature
18341 \begin_layout Subsubsection
18343 \begin_inset Index idx
18346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18347 FileFormats ! XHTML
18353 \begin_inset Index idx
18356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18365 \begin_layout Standard
18366 This file type has the extension
18367 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18375 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18379 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
18380 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
18381 When \SpecialChar LyX
18382 produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats
18383 suitable for the purpose.
18384 For the math output you can choose in the menu
18386 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18387 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
18390 between different formats, which are described in section
18392 Math Output in XHTML
18397 \begin_inset space ~
18405 \begin_layout Standard
18406 XHTML output remains
18407 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18411 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18414 , and not all \SpecialChar LyX
18415 features are supported yet.
18419 and the World Wide Web
18423 Additional Features
18425 manual, for more information.
18428 \begin_layout Standard
18429 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
18431 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
18432 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
18438 \begin_layout Subsection
18440 \begin_inset Index idx
18443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18452 \begin_layout Standard
18453 To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the page
18454 breaks in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu
18463 or use the toolbar button
18470 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default
18471 output format, which is globally set in the preferences (see section
18472 \begin_inset space ~
18476 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18478 reference "sec:File-Formats"
18482 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings
18484 \begin_inset space ~
18488 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18490 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
18495 Further output formats can be selected via
18497 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18498 View (Other Formats)
18500 or the toolbar button
18509 \begin_layout Standard
18510 If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same
18511 viewer window using the menu
18513 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18518 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18519 Update (Other Formats)
18524 \begin_layout Standard
18525 When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in \SpecialChar LyX
18528 To have a real output, export your document.
18531 \begin_layout Section
18532 A few Words about Typography
18533 \begin_inset Index idx
18536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18545 \begin_layout Subsection
18546 Hyphens, Dashes and Minus Signs
18547 \begin_inset Index idx
18550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18557 \begin_inset Index idx
18560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18569 \begin_layout Standard
18570 In \SpecialChar LyX
18572 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18580 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18583 symbol comes in four variants: the
18600 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
18606 \begin_layout Standard
18607 \begin_inset Box Frameless
18617 height_special "totalheight"
18622 backgroundcolor "none"
18625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18626 \begin_inset Tabular
18627 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
18628 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
18629 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18630 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
18631 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
18632 <row interlinespace="3mm">
18633 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18642 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18651 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18661 <row interlinespace="3mm">
18662 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18671 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18680 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18684 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18692 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18701 <row interlinespace="3mm">
18702 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18711 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18720 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18724 system key combination
18728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18729 On Mac and Linux, the en dash is entered with
18732 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18736 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18741 and the em dash with
18744 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18748 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18757 is the Mac label for the right
18767 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18771 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18780 <row interlinespace="3mm">
18781 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18790 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18799 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18803 system key combination or
18804 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18808 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18818 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18827 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18831 \begin_inset Formula $-$
18839 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18843 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18851 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18870 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
18876 \begin_layout Standard
18877 Dashes can also be inserted with
18879 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18881 \begin_inset space ~
18884 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
18892 function with the Unicode code point as argument (2013 for the em dash
18893 and 2014 for the en dash).
18896 \begin_layout Standard
18897 Hyphen and dashes are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in math
18898 mode and has a length of its own.
18899 Here are some examples:
18902 \begin_layout Enumerate
18903 line- and page-breaks
18904 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
18914 \begin_layout Enumerate
18916 \begin_inset space ~
18920 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
18930 \begin_layout Enumerate
18931 The em dash is used without spaces: Oh—there's a dash.
18932 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
18942 \begin_layout Enumerate
18943 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
18947 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
18957 \begin_layout Standard
18959 \begin_inset CommandInset href
18961 name "Wikipedia entry on dashes"
18962 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Dash"
18970 \begin_layout Subsection
18971 Dashes and Line Breaks
18972 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18974 name "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
18981 \begin_layout Standard
18982 Whether line breaks before or after dashes are allowed depends on the use
18983 case and locale, e.
18984 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18990 \begin_layout Itemize
18991 In English, line breaks are generally allowed after the dash, but no line
18992 break should occur if only a single character follows the dash (as in A–Z).
18995 \begin_layout Itemize
18996 In English, dashes used to set off parenthetical statements should not start
19000 \begin_layout Itemize
19001 In French and Spanish, dashes around parenthetical statements are treated
19002 similar to brackets: line breaks are not allowed on the inner side.
19005 \begin_layout Standard
19006 By default, dashes are output by \SpecialChar LyX
19007 to \SpecialChar LaTeX
19009 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19013 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19018 allows line breaks after hyphens
19019 \change_deleted -1402925745 1558782973
19021 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782983
19024 en-dashes and em-dashes.
19027 \begin_layout Enumerate
19028 Line breaks before spaced en dashes
19029 \begin_inset space ~
19032 – common in British English and generally recommended by
19034 The Elements of Typographic Style
19037 \begin_inset space ~
19040 – can be prevented using protected spaces.
19043 \begin_layout Enumerate
19044 Unwanted line breaks
19049 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782702
19051 \change_deleted -1402925745 1558782715
19054 be prevented by wrapping in a makebox
19058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19061 Prevent Hyphenation
19066 \begin_inset space ~
19082 in \SpecialChar TeX
19084 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782753
19085 , a protected space does not suffice
19089 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782332
19094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19096 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782431
19097 It is generally recommended to set the correct language for text parts not
19098 in the document language.
19099 We don't do this here to prevent a dependency on LaTeX support for French
19113 \begin_layout Itemize
19115 \begin_inset space ~
19119 \begin_inset Box Frameless
19129 height_special "totalheight"
19134 backgroundcolor "none"
19137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19146 \begin_layout Itemize
19148 \begin_inset Box Frameless
19158 height_special "totalheight"
19163 backgroundcolor "none"
19166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19168 \begin_inset space ~
19176 si tout le monde ne les aime pas
19177 \begin_inset space ~
19180 – sont très utiles.
19183 \begin_layout Itemize
19188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19197 —un inciso con rayas— se escribe así.
19201 \begin_layout Standard
19202 An incorrect line break is easily overlooked because
19203 \begin_inset space ~
19206 – in contrast to an overfull line
19207 \begin_inset space ~
19210 – it does not trigger a warning in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
19214 \begin_layout Standard
19215 If you want to globally disable line breaks after dashes, you can select
19218 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
19219 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
19220 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
19221 Disallow line breaks after dashes
19226 \begin_layout Enumerate
19227 Line breaks are still allowed after spaced dashes.
19228 They can be prevented using protected spaces (without need for a makebox
19229 or \SpecialChar TeX
19235 \begin_layout Itemize
19237 \begin_inset space ~
19240 même si tout le monde ne les aime pas
19241 \begin_inset space ~
19244 – sont très utiles.
19248 \begin_layout Enumerate
19249 Line breaks after unspaced dashes can be allowed via the menu
19250 \begin_inset Newline newline
19255 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19256 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
19258 \change_deleted 1675569489 1580913043
19260 \change_inserted 1675569489 1580913043
19262 \begin_inset space ~
19268 \change_deleted 1675569489 1580913068
19270 \change_inserted 1675569489 1580913068
19272 \begin_inset space ~
19283 \begin_layout Itemize
19284 Em-dashes without spaces—\SpecialChar allowbreak
19285 common in American English—\SpecialChar allowbreak
19286 should be followed by
19287 a line break opportunity.
19290 \begin_layout Standard
19291 This also allows hyphenation of the word following the dash (see section
19292 \begin_inset space ~
19296 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19298 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
19309 \begin_layout Enumerate
19310 With this setting, \SpecialChar LaTeX
19311 hyphenates words also if immediately followed by em
19312 or en dashes (see section
19313 \begin_inset space ~
19317 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19319 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
19329 \begin_layout Subsubsection
19330 Changes and Backwards Compatibility
19333 \begin_layout Standard
19334 Up to \SpecialChar LyX
19336 \begin_inset space ~
19339 2.1, consecutive hyphen characters (-- and ---) in the LyX source were merged
19340 to en or em dashes by LaTeX.
19342 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19346 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19349 retain the line-break properties of hyphens while literal dash characters
19350 are regarded by \SpecialChar LaTeX
19358 \begin_layout Standard
19359 Since \SpecialChar LyX
19361 \begin_inset space ~
19364 2.2, consecutive hyphens in the LyX source are exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
19366 prevents ligation to dashes.
19368 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19372 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19375 in documents from earlier versions are converted to literal dash characters
19380 font); typed in consecutive hyphens are merged to dash characters immediately
19381 after the input (unless the current text font is
19389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19390 The behavior was changed since
19391 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19395 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19399 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19403 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19406 in PDF, Postscript, and DVI output.
19407 An unintended consequence of these changes was that all dashes were output
19408 as non-breakable dashes.
19409 This also resulted in changed line breaks in some older documents.
19417 \begin_layout Standard
19420 \begin_inset space ~
19428 When opening documents edited with \SpecialChar LyX
19430 \begin_inset space ~
19433 2.2 or earlier and containing literal dash characters not followed by whitespace,
19436 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
19437 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
19438 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
19439 Disallow line breaks after dashes
19441 is active to prevent changes to the line breaks.
19445 If you used both literal and
19446 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19450 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19453 dashes in pre-\SpecialChar LyX
19455 \begin_inset space ~
19458 2.2 documents, you may need to enable or prevent individual line breaks as
19459 shown above to restore the correct line breaking behavior.
19462 \begin_layout Subsection
19464 \begin_inset Index idx
19467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19474 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19476 name "subsec:Hyphenation"
19483 \begin_layout Standard
19484 Words are not hyphenated within \SpecialChar LyX
19485 but automatically in the output.
19486 Hyphenation is done by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
19492 \begin_inset Index idx
19495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19502 following the rules of the document language.
19504 does not hyphenate text in the
19508 font and words immediately preceded or followed by hyphens or dashes.
19511 \begin_layout Standard
19513 hyphenates almost perfectly; it only has problems with text in the
19517 font and with unusual constructs, like
19518 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19522 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19526 If \SpecialChar LaTeX
19527 cannot break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points manually.
19528 This is done with the menu
19530 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19531 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
19533 \begin_inset space ~
19539 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to \SpecialChar LaTeX
19541 If no hyphenation is necessary, \SpecialChar LaTeX
19545 \begin_layout Standard
19546 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
19547 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document
19549 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19553 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19558 would then see the hyphen
19559 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19563 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19566 as a line break possibility.
19567 A line break at this point would look ugly.
19568 To prevent the shortcut from being broken, you can use a protected hyphen
19571 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19572 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
19575 ) or put it into a makebox as described in section
19577 Prevent Hyphenation
19582 \begin_inset space ~
19590 \begin_layout Subsection
19592 \begin_inset Index idx
19595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19604 \begin_layout Subsubsection
19605 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
19606 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19608 name "subsec:Abbreviations"
19615 \begin_layout Standard
19616 When \SpecialChar LyX
19617 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
19618 to generate the final version of your document, \SpecialChar LaTeX
19620 distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations.
19623 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19626 appropriate amount of space.
19627 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19630 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and
19632 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word
19633 gets after another word.
19636 \begin_layout Standard
19637 Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does
19638 not work in all cases.
19640 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19648 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19651 is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's
19652 at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation.
19655 \begin_layout Standard
19656 Here are some examples of
19660 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
19663 \begin_layout Itemize
19668 \begin_layout Itemize
19673 \begin_layout Standard
19674 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
19677 \begin_layout Itemize
19679 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19683 this is too much space!
19686 \begin_layout Itemize
19691 \begin_layout Standard
19692 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
19695 \begin_layout Standard
19696 To fix this problem, use one of the following:
19699 \begin_layout Enumerate
19703 \begin_inset space ~
19708 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
19709 \begin_inset space ~
19713 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19715 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
19720 \begin_inset Index idx
19723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19724 Spaces ! inter-word
19732 \begin_layout Enumerate
19736 \begin_inset space ~
19741 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
19742 \begin_inset space ~
19746 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19748 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
19753 \begin_inset Index idx
19756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19765 \begin_layout Enumerate
19769 \begin_inset space ~
19773 \begin_inset space ~
19777 \begin_inset space ~
19784 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19786 \begin_inset space ~
19791 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
19792 This function is also bound to
19795 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
19801 \begin_layout Standard
19802 With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this:
19805 \begin_layout Itemize
19807 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19811 \begin_inset space \space{}
19814 this is too much space!
19817 \begin_layout Itemize
19818 This is I\SpecialChar endofsentence
19822 \begin_layout Standard
19823 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
19824 If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
19826 will take care of this.
19829 \begin_layout Standard
19830 For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
19834 \begin_inset space ~
19840 feature described in the section
19842 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
19847 Additional Features
19852 \begin_layout Subsubsection
19854 \begin_inset Index idx
19857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19858 Typography ! Quotation marks
19864 \begin_inset Index idx
19867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19868 Quotation marks | see
19872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19898 \begin_layout Standard
19900 usually sets quotation marks correctly.
19901 Specifically, it will insert an opening mark at the beginning of quoted
19902 text, and use a closing mark at the end.
19904 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19908 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19912 The keyboard character,
19916 , generates this automatically.
19919 \begin_layout Standard
19920 You can specify what character the
19924 key produces by using the submenu
19930 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
19934 \begin_inset Index idx
19937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19938 Document ! Settings
19943 dialog and switching the
19947 (note that \SpecialChar LyX
19948 makes a sensible proposal for the selected main language).
19950 \change_deleted -712698321 1606924196
19952 \change_inserted -712698321 1606924196
19956 \begin_inset space ~
19962 \begin_layout Labeling
19963 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19967 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19971 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19975 \begin_inset space ~
19979 \begin_inset space ~
19983 \begin_inset Quotes els
19987 \begin_inset Quotes ers
19993 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19997 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20001 \begin_inset Quotes els
20005 \begin_inset Quotes ers
20008 quotation marks (as common, e.
20009 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20015 \begin_layout Labeling
20016 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20019 \begin_inset Quotes sld
20023 \begin_inset Quotes sld
20027 \begin_inset space ~
20031 \begin_inset space ~
20035 \begin_inset Quotes sls
20039 \begin_inset Quotes srs
20045 \begin_inset Quotes sld
20049 \begin_inset Quotes sld
20053 \begin_inset Quotes sls
20057 \begin_inset Quotes srs
20060 quotation marks (as common, e.
20061 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20067 \begin_layout Labeling
20068 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20071 \begin_inset Quotes gld
20075 \begin_inset Quotes grd
20079 \begin_inset space ~
20083 \begin_inset space ~
20087 \begin_inset Quotes gls
20091 \begin_inset Quotes grs
20097 \begin_inset Quotes gld
20101 \begin_inset Quotes grd
20105 \begin_inset Quotes gls
20109 \begin_inset Quotes grs
20112 quotation marks (as common, e.
20113 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20119 \begin_layout Labeling
20120 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20123 \begin_inset Quotes pld
20127 \begin_inset Quotes prd
20131 \begin_inset space ~
20135 \begin_inset space ~
20139 \begin_inset Quotes pls
20143 \begin_inset Quotes prs
20149 \begin_inset Quotes pld
20153 \begin_inset Quotes prd
20157 \begin_inset Quotes pls
20161 \begin_inset Quotes prs
20164 quotation marks (as common, e.
20165 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20171 \begin_layout Labeling
20172 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20175 \begin_inset Quotes cld
20179 \begin_inset Quotes crd
20183 \begin_inset space ~
20187 \begin_inset space ~
20191 \begin_inset Quotes cls
20195 \begin_inset Quotes crs
20201 \begin_inset Quotes cld
20205 \begin_inset Quotes crd
20209 \begin_inset Quotes cls
20213 \begin_inset Quotes crs
20216 quotation marks (as common, e.
20217 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20220 g., in Switzerland)
20223 \begin_layout Labeling
20224 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20227 \begin_inset Quotes ald
20231 \begin_inset Quotes ard
20235 \begin_inset space ~
20239 \begin_inset space ~
20243 \begin_inset Quotes als
20247 \begin_inset Quotes ars
20253 \begin_inset Quotes ald
20257 \begin_inset Quotes ard
20261 \begin_inset Quotes als
20265 \begin_inset Quotes ars
20268 quotation marks (as common, e.
20269 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20275 \begin_layout Labeling
20276 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20279 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
20283 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
20287 \begin_inset space ~
20291 \begin_inset space ~
20295 \begin_inset Quotes qls
20299 \begin_inset Quotes qls
20305 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
20309 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
20313 \begin_inset Quotes qls
20317 \begin_inset Quotes qls
20320 quotation marks (so-called plain or non-typographical quotation marks)
20323 \begin_layout Labeling
20324 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20327 \begin_inset Quotes bld
20331 \begin_inset Quotes brd
20335 \begin_inset space ~
20339 \begin_inset space ~
20343 \begin_inset Quotes bls
20347 \begin_inset Quotes brs
20353 \begin_inset Quotes bld
20357 \begin_inset Quotes brd
20361 \begin_inset Quotes bls
20365 \begin_inset Quotes brs
20368 quotation marks (as common, e.
20369 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20372 g., in Great Britain)
20375 \begin_layout Labeling
20376 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20379 \begin_inset Quotes fld
20383 \begin_inset Quotes frd
20387 \begin_inset space ~
20391 \begin_inset space ~
20395 \begin_inset Quotes fls
20399 \begin_inset Quotes frs
20405 \begin_inset Quotes fld
20409 \begin_inset Quotes frd
20413 \begin_inset Quotes fls
20417 \begin_inset Quotes frs
20420 quotation marks (as common, e.
20421 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20427 \begin_layout Labeling
20428 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20431 \begin_inset Quotes ild
20435 \begin_inset Quotes ird
20439 \begin_inset space ~
20443 \begin_inset space ~
20447 \begin_inset Quotes ils
20451 \begin_inset Quotes irs
20457 \begin_inset Quotes ild
20461 \begin_inset Quotes ird
20465 \begin_inset Quotes ils
20469 \begin_inset Quotes irs
20472 quotation marks (another style common in France)
20476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20477 Maybe you wonder why one does not simply use only outer marks in this case,
20478 since these look identical to the inner marks.
20479 The answer is that you cannot easily switch to another style then (where
20480 the inner marks differ).
20488 \begin_layout Labeling
20489 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20492 \begin_inset Quotes rld
20496 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
20500 \begin_inset space ~
20504 \begin_inset space ~
20508 \begin_inset Quotes rls
20512 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
20518 \begin_inset Quotes rld
20522 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
20526 \begin_inset Quotes rls
20530 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
20533 quotation marks (as common, e.
20534 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20540 \begin_layout Labeling
20541 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20544 \begin_inset Quotes wld
20548 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
20552 \begin_inset space ~
20556 \begin_inset space ~
20560 \begin_inset Quotes wls
20564 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
20570 \begin_inset Quotes wld
20574 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
20578 \begin_inset Quotes wls
20582 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
20585 quotation marks (another style common in Sweden)
20586 \change_inserted -712698321 1606924211
20590 \begin_layout Labeling
20591 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20593 \change_inserted -712698321 1606924279
20596 \begin_inset Quotes pld
20600 \begin_inset Quotes prd
20604 \begin_inset space ~
20608 \begin_inset space ~
20612 \begin_inset Quotes ald
20616 \begin_inset Quotes ard
20624 \begin_inset Quotes pld
20632 \begin_inset Quotes prd
20640 \begin_inset Quotes ald
20648 \begin_inset Quotes ard
20653 quotation marks (as common in Hungary)
20658 \begin_layout Labeling
20659 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20660 \begin_inset Quotes jld
20668 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
20674 \begin_inset space ~
20678 \begin_inset space ~
20684 \begin_inset Quotes jls
20692 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
20696 \begin_inset Quotes jld
20700 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
20704 \begin_inset Quotes jls
20708 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
20711 quotation marks (as common, e.
20712 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20721 \change_inserted -131811572 1600338376
20722 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20724 name "fn:cjk-quotes"
20730 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
20731 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
20739 \begin_layout Labeling
20740 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20741 \begin_inset Quotes kld
20749 \begin_inset Quotes krd
20755 \begin_inset space ~
20759 \begin_inset space ~
20765 \begin_inset Quotes kls
20773 \begin_inset Quotes krs
20777 \begin_inset Quotes kld
20781 \begin_inset Quotes krd
20785 \begin_inset Quotes kls
20789 \begin_inset Quotes krs
20792 quotation marks (as common, e.
20793 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20796 g., in North Korea and China)
20797 \change_inserted -131811572 1600338410
20799 \begin_inset script superscript
20801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20803 \change_inserted -131811572 1600338410
20804 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20806 reference "fn:cjk-quotes"
20821 \change_deleted -131811572 1600338417
20826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20827 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
20828 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
20838 \begin_layout Standard
20839 Inner quotation marks
20843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20844 In many writing cultures, these are single quotation marks.
20845 But as the British and French styles show, this is not necessarily the
20846 case (and specifically the British style shows that
20847 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20851 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20854 does not necessarily mean
20855 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20859 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20863 This is why we call them
20864 \begin_inset Quotes els
20868 \begin_inset Quotes ers
20872 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20876 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20884 for quotations inside quotations (and other tasks in some languages, such
20886 \begin_inset Quotes els
20890 \begin_inset Quotes ers
20893 ) can be obtained by means of the shortcut
20896 arg "quote-insert inner"
20901 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20907 \begin_layout Standard
20908 By default, the quotation mark styles are persistent.
20909 That is to say, a quotation mark maintains the style that was current when
20910 it was inserted, even if the document-wide style changes.
20911 This allows you to enter marks of different style.
20912 If you check the setting
20914 Use dynamic quotation marks
20918 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
20919 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
20922 , however, special quotation marks will be inserted (in the LyX window,
20923 they appear in a special color).
20924 These marks will automatically adapt to the main style (and its changes).
20925 Such quotation marks make it easy to alter the quotation mark style in
20927 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20930 g., if your publisher requests a different style).
20933 \begin_layout Standard
20934 Individual quotation marks (i.
20935 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20938 e., their level [inner, outer], side [opening, closing], and style) can be
20939 easily switched by a context menu that pops up if you right-click on a
20943 \begin_layout Subsection
20945 \begin_inset Index idx
20948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20949 Typography ! Ligatures
20955 \begin_inset Index idx
20958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20987 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20989 name "subsec:Ligatures"
20996 \begin_layout Standard
20997 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and
20998 print them as single characters.
20999 These groups are known as
21004 Since \SpecialChar LaTeX
21005 knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too in the
21007 Here are the standard ligatures:
21010 \begin_layout Itemize
21014 \begin_layout Itemize
21018 \begin_layout Itemize
21022 \begin_layout Itemize
21026 \begin_layout Itemize
21030 \begin_layout Standard
21031 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
21034 \begin_layout Standard
21035 Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word.
21036 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
21037 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21041 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21044 it looks really weird in compound words, such as
21045 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21049 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21053 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21057 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21060 To break a ligature, use
21062 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21063 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
21065 \begin_inset space ~
21072 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21076 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21080 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21083 cuff\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
21085 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21089 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21093 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21097 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21100 Dorf\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
21102 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21108 \begin_layout Subsection
21110 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
21112 \begin_inset Index idx
21115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21125 \begin_layout Standard
21128 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21129 Special Characters\SpecialChar menuseparator
21133 provides the following program logos with special formatting:
21136 \begin_layout Description
21138 The name of the game.
21141 \begin_layout Description
21143 The typesetting engine used by \SpecialChar LyX
21147 \begin_layout Description
21149 The \SpecialChar TeX
21150 macro collection used by \SpecialChar LyX
21154 \begin_layout Description
21155 \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
21156 The current version of \SpecialChar LaTeX
21160 \begin_layout Standard
21161 You might wonder why the \SpecialChar LaTeX
21163 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21167 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
21171 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21175 It is an old tradition in the \SpecialChar TeX
21176 world to give programs geek version numbers.
21177 For example the version number of \SpecialChar TeX
21178 converges to the number
21179 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
21182 : The actual version is
21183 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21188 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21191 , the previous one was
21192 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21197 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21203 \begin_layout Subsection
21205 \begin_inset Index idx
21208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21217 \begin_layout Standard
21218 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal
21219 space between two words.
21220 As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is
21223 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21227 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21230 for units use the menu
21232 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21233 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
21235 \begin_inset space ~
21243 arg "space-insert thin"
21249 \begin_layout Standard
21250 Here is an example to show the differences:
21253 \begin_layout Standard
21254 \begin_inset Tabular
21255 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
21256 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
21257 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
21258 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
21260 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
21263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21265 \begin_inset space ~
21269 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
21277 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
21280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21281 space between number and unit
21288 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
21291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21293 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
21297 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
21305 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
21308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21309 half space between number and unit
21322 \begin_layout Subsection
21324 \begin_inset Index idx
21327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21328 Typography ! Widows and orphans
21336 \begin_layout Standard
21337 In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page
21339 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
21340 For example the heading for a new section was printed at the very bottom
21341 of the page, the first line of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom
21342 of a page, or the last line of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
21343 These bits of text became known as
21354 \begin_layout Standard
21355 Clearly, \SpecialChar LyX
21356 can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
21357 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
21358 But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line
21359 of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules
21360 built into \SpecialChar LaTeX
21361 governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there specifical
21362 ly to prevent widows and orphans.
21363 If they appear nevertheless and you don't like them, you can add the commands
21364 \begin_inset Newline newline
21372 \begin_inset Newline newline
21380 \begin_inset Newline newline
21383 to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
21384 preamble of your document to avoid them.
21385 Some \SpecialChar LaTeX
21387 \begin_inset space ~
21391 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
21393 key "latexcompanion"
21399 \begin_inset space ~
21403 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
21410 ) have more information about the technical details of \SpecialChar LaTeX
21411 's page break mechanism.
21414 \begin_layout Chapter
21415 Notes, Graphics, Tables and Floats
21416 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21418 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
21425 \begin_layout Standard
21426 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
21429 \begin_inset space ~
21435 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
21438 \begin_layout Section
21440 \begin_inset Index idx
21443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21450 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21459 \begin_layout Standard
21461 offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
21464 \begin_layout Description
21467 \begin_inset space ~
21470 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
21471 \begin_inset Newline newline
21475 \begin_inset Note Note
21478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21479 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
21487 \begin_layout Description
21488 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as
21489 a \SpecialChar LaTeX
21490 -comment when you export the document to \SpecialChar LaTeX
21493 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
21494 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
21496 \begin_inset space ~
21502 \begin_inset Newline newline
21506 \begin_inset Note Comment
21509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21510 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in \SpecialChar LaTeX
21519 \begin_layout Description
21521 \begin_inset space ~
21524 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can
21525 set in the document settings under
21527 Colors\SpecialChar menuseparator
21529 \begin_inset space ~
21535 \begin_inset Newline newline
21539 \begin_inset Newline newline
21543 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
21546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21552 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
21553 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
21558 of a comment that appears in the output.
21564 \begin_inset Newline newline
21568 \begin_inset Newline newline
21571 As you can see in the example, greyed out notes can have footnotes.
21574 \begin_layout Standard
21575 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
21583 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21587 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
21590 \begin_layout Section
21592 \begin_inset Index idx
21595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21602 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21604 name "sec:Footnotes"
21611 \begin_layout Standard
21613 uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the menu
21616 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21619 or the toolbar button
21622 arg "footnote-insert"
21634 \begin_inset Graphics
21635 filename clipart/footnote.png
21644 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
21645 's representation of your footnote.
21655 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21663 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21674 label, the box will
21678 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
21679 Clicking on the box label again will close
21692 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply highlight it
21693 and click on the footnote
21708 \begin_layout Standard
21709 Here is an example footnote:
21717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21718 To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label.
21726 \begin_layout Standard
21727 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text
21728 position where the footnote box is placed.
21729 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
21730 The footnote number is calculated by \SpecialChar LyX
21731 according to the document class.
21733 does not yet support a particular numbering scheme, but you can get other
21734 schemes using special \SpecialChar LaTeX
21740 ey are described in the
21743 \begin_inset space ~
21751 \begin_layout Section
21753 \begin_inset Index idx
21756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21763 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21765 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
21772 \begin_layout Standard
21773 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in \SpecialChar LyX
21775 When you insert a margin note via the menu
21777 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21779 \begin_inset space ~
21784 or the toolbar button
21787 arg "marginalnote-insert"
21806 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21810 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21813 appearing within your text.
21814 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
21815 's representation of your margin
21824 \begin_layout Standard
21825 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
21829 \begin_inset Marginal
21832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21834 This is a marginal note.
21842 \begin_layout Standard
21843 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
21844 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even
21845 pages, right on odd pages.
21848 \begin_layout Standard
21849 For further information about marginal notes see the section
21852 \begin_inset space ~
21860 \begin_inset space ~
21868 \begin_layout Section
21869 Graphics and Images
21870 \begin_inset Index idx
21873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21880 \begin_inset Index idx
21883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21890 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21892 name "sec:Graphics"
21899 \begin_layout Standard
21900 To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position
21901 you want and click on the toolbar icon
21904 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
21909 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21913 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
21916 \begin_layout Standard
21917 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
21922 tab allows you to choose your image file.
21923 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling
21925 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
21926 \begin_inset space ~
21930 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21932 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
21939 \begin_layout Standard
21944 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width
21945 of the image in the output.
21946 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
21950 \begin_inset space ~
21954 \begin_inset space ~
21963 \begin_inset space ~
21967 \begin_inset space ~
21971 \begin_inset space ~
21976 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
21977 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore
21985 \begin_layout Standard
21989 \begin_inset space ~
21993 \begin_inset space ~
21998 tab \SpecialChar LaTeX
21999 experts can specify additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
22001 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside \SpecialChar LyX
22006 \begin_inset space ~
22011 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame
22012 with the image size is printed.
22015 \begin_layout Standard
22016 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
22017 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are
22019 This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph:
22022 \begin_layout Standard
22024 \begin_inset Graphics
22025 filename clipart/2D-intensity-plot.pdf
22033 \begin_layout Standard
22034 If you need image captions or want to reference images, you have to put
22035 the image into a float, see section
22036 \begin_inset space ~
22040 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22042 reference "subsec:Figure-Floats"
22049 \begin_layout Subsection
22051 \begin_inset Index idx
22054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22061 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22063 name "subsec:Image-Formats"
22070 \begin_layout Standard
22071 You can insert images in any known file format.
22072 But as we explained in section
22073 \begin_inset space ~
22077 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22079 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
22083 , every output document format allows only a few image formats.
22085 therefore uses the program
22089 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
22090 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
22091 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
22092 \begin_inset space ~
22096 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22098 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
22105 \begin_layout Standard
22106 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
22109 \begin_layout Description
22111 \begin_inset space ~
22114 images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
22115 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
22116 Well-known bitmap image formats are
22117 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22120 Graphics Interchange Format
22121 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22124 (GIF, file extension
22125 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22133 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22137 \begin_inset Index idx
22140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22169 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22172 Portable Network Graphics
22173 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22176 (PNG, file extension
22177 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22185 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22189 \begin_inset Index idx
22192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22221 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22224 Joint Photographic Experts Group
22225 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22228 (JPG, file extension
22229 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22237 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22241 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22249 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22253 \begin_inset Index idx
22256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22287 \begin_layout Description
22289 \begin_inset space ~
22292 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
22294 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations, because
22295 presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
22296 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
22297 \begin_inset Newline newline
22300 Scalable image formats can be
22301 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22304 Scalable Vector Graphics
22305 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22308 (SVG, file extension
22309 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22317 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22321 \begin_inset Index idx
22324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22353 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22356 Encapsulated PostScript
22357 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22360 (EPS, file extension
22361 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22369 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22373 \begin_inset Index idx
22376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22405 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22408 Portable Document Format
22409 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22412 (PDF, file extension
22413 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22421 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22425 \begin_inset Index idx
22428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22436 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22440 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22443 , because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the
22444 result will not be scalable.
22445 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original
22450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22451 In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed.
22459 \begin_layout Standard
22460 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only
22467 \begin_layout Subsection
22468 Grouping of Image Settings
22469 \begin_inset Index idx
22472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22473 Images ! Settings grouping
22481 \begin_layout Standard
22482 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing
22484 Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image
22485 of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in
22487 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the
22488 need to manually change each of them.
22491 \begin_layout Standard
22492 A new group can be set by pressing the button
22495 \begin_inset space ~
22499 \begin_inset space ~
22511 \begin_inset space ~
22515 \begin_inset space ~
22521 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image
22522 and checking the name of the desired group.
22525 \begin_layout Section
22527 \begin_inset Index idx
22530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22537 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22546 \begin_layout Standard
22547 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
22550 arg "tabular-insert"
22555 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22559 A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns
22560 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288358
22561 , and you can select a specific (border) style
22564 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated
22565 from the rest of the table.
22566 This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row
22567 have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above
22569 Here is an example table:
22572 \begin_layout Standard
22574 \begin_inset Tabular
22575 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
22576 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
22577 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22578 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22579 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
22580 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22582 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22591 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22609 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22618 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22629 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22647 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22656 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22665 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22676 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22694 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22703 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22712 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22723 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22741 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22750 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22759 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22774 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288479
22778 \begin_layout Standard
22780 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288540
22781 This corresponds to the
22782 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22786 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22789 table style listed in the style selection.
22792 \begin_layout Standard
22794 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288387
22795 Other available styles include:
22798 \begin_layout Itemize
22800 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288551
22802 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22806 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22809 which looks line the above table, but without the first row being separated
22813 \begin_layout Itemize
22815 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288764
22816 a border-less table with no lines at all,
22819 \begin_layout Itemize
22821 \change_inserted -712698321 1554289543
22823 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22827 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22830 as often used in professional publishing with horizontal lines only and
22831 bold top/bottom lines (see
22842 \begin_layout Standard
22844 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288823
22845 The default style used in the dialog as well as the style used by the toolbar
22846 button can be changed in
22848 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
22849 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
22853 So if the default style above is not the one you need, you should alter
22857 \begin_layout Subsection
22861 \begin_layout Standard
22862 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and
22865 More\SpecialChar menuseparator
22869 This brings up the table dialog.
22870 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell, row and/or column where the
22871 cursor is placed currently.
22872 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
22873 This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is
22874 done on all of your selection.
22877 \begin_layout Standard
22878 In addition to the table dialog, the
22881 \begin_inset space ~
22886 helps you in setting table properties.
22887 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
22890 \begin_layout Standard
22894 \begin_inset space ~
22899 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
22900 If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the
22901 current cell respectively.
22902 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width
22904 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs
22905 of text, see section
22906 \begin_inset space ~
22910 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22912 reference "subsec:Table-Cells"
22919 \begin_layout Standard
22920 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell
22921 using the check box
22930 This will merge the cells to
22934 cell, spread over more than one column/row.
22935 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width,
22936 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
22937 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one
22938 in the last row without the upper border:
22941 \begin_layout Standard
22943 \begin_inset Tabular
22944 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
22945 <features firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
22946 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22947 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
22948 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
22949 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22951 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22960 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22969 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22978 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22989 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23007 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23016 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23025 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23036 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23045 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23054 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23063 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23080 \begin_layout Standard
23081 Adept users can declare special \SpecialChar LaTeX
23082 -arguments for the table.
23083 They are necessary for special table formatting, such as the multirow cells,
23084 explained in the chapter
23091 \begin_inset space ~
23097 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table.
23098 These rotations are not visible in \SpecialChar LyX
23099 but are visible in the output.
23102 \begin_layout Standard
23103 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
23106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23111 Most DVI-viewers are
23115 able to display rotations.
23123 \begin_layout Standard
23128 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
23133 adds lines for all cell borders.
23136 \begin_layout Subsection
23138 \begin_inset Index idx
23141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23142 Tables ! Multi-page
23148 \begin_inset Index idx
23151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23160 \begin_layout Standard
23161 If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
23164 \begin_inset space ~
23168 \begin_inset space ~
23176 \begin_inset space ~
23181 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
23182 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
23185 \begin_layout Description
23190 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
23191 defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
23192 Except for the first page, if
23195 \begin_inset space ~
23203 \begin_layout Description
23207 \begin_inset space ~
23212 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
23213 defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
23216 \begin_layout Description
23221 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
23222 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
23223 except for the last page, if
23226 \begin_inset space ~
23234 \begin_layout Description
23238 \begin_inset space ~
23243 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
23244 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
23247 \begin_layout Description
23248 Caption: The first row is reset as a single column.
23249 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
23251 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23255 More about multi-page table captions can be found in the
23258 \begin_inset space ~
23266 \begin_layout Standard
23267 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
23268 If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware
23269 that then only the first option is used; the others will be defined as
23275 In this context, first means first in this order:
23278 \begin_inset space ~
23290 \begin_inset space ~
23295 ; see the following longtable to see how it works:
23298 \begin_layout Standard
23300 \begin_inset Tabular
23301 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
23302 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
23303 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
23304 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23305 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23306 <row endfirsthead="true">
23307 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23313 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
23318 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23327 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23337 <row endfirsthead="true">
23338 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23349 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23358 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23370 <row endhead="true">
23371 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23382 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23391 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23401 <row endhead="true">
23402 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23413 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23422 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23434 <row endfoot="true">
23435 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23446 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23455 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23466 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23477 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23486 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23497 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23508 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23517 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23528 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23539 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23548 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23559 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23570 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23579 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23590 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23601 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23610 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23621 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23632 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23641 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23652 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23663 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23672 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23683 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23694 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23703 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23714 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23725 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23734 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23745 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23756 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23765 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23776 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23787 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23796 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23807 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23818 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23827 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23838 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23849 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23858 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23869 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23880 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23889 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23900 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23911 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23920 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23931 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23942 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23951 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23962 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23973 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23982 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23993 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24004 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24013 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24024 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24035 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24044 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24055 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24066 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24075 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24086 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24097 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24106 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24117 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24128 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24137 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24148 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24159 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24168 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24179 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24190 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24199 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24210 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24221 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24230 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24241 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24252 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24261 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24272 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24283 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24292 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24303 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24314 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24323 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24334 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24345 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24354 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24365 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24376 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24385 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24396 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24407 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24416 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24427 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24436 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
24439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24445 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24456 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24467 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24476 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24487 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24498 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24507 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24518 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24529 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24538 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24549 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24560 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24569 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24580 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24591 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24600 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24611 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24622 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24631 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24642 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24653 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24662 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24673 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24684 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24693 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24704 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24715 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24724 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24735 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24746 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24755 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24766 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24777 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24786 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24797 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24808 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24817 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24828 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24839 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24848 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24859 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24870 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24879 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24890 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24901 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24910 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24921 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24932 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24941 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24952 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24963 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24972 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24983 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24994 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25003 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25014 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25025 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25034 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25045 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25056 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25065 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25076 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25087 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25096 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25107 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25118 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25127 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25138 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25149 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25158 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25169 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25180 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25189 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25200 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25211 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25220 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25231 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25242 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25251 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25262 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25273 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25282 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25293 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25304 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25313 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25324 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25335 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25344 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25355 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25366 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25375 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25386 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25397 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25406 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25416 <row endlastfoot="true">
25417 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25428 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
25431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25437 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25454 \begin_layout Subsection
25456 \begin_inset Index idx
25459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25466 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25468 name "subsec:Table-Cells"
25475 \begin_layout Standard
25476 A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table.
25477 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
25478 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
25479 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
25483 , etc.), nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
25486 \begin_layout Standard
25487 To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width
25488 for the column in the table dialog.
25489 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell
25490 is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
25494 \begin_layout Standard
25496 \begin_inset Tabular
25497 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
25498 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
25499 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25500 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
25501 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25503 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25521 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25539 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25559 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25577 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25590 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
25595 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25615 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25633 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25646 This is longer now.
25651 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25671 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25689 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25702 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
25703 This is longer now.
25708 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25734 \begin_layout Standard
25735 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
25736 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
25740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25741 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not
25742 be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
25747 Selection with the mouse or with
25751 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
25752 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting
25753 the selection from outside the table.
25756 \begin_layout Section
25758 \begin_inset Index idx
25761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25768 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25777 \begin_layout Subsection
25781 \begin_layout Standard
25782 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't
25783 have a fixed location.
25785 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25789 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25792 forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best.
25800 \begin_inset space ~
25805 are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are
25806 too many notes on the current page.
25809 \begin_layout Standard
25810 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
25811 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace
25812 and pages without text.
25813 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and
25814 the image/table, every float can be referenced in the text.
25815 Floats are therefore numbered.
25816 Referencing is described in section
25817 \begin_inset space ~
25821 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25823 reference "sec:Cross-References"
25830 \begin_layout Standard
25831 To insert a float, use the menu
25833 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25837 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
25838 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in
25840 After the label you can insert the caption text.
25841 \begin_inset Index idx
25844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25850 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate
25851 paragraph within the float.
25852 To keep your \SpecialChar LyX
25853 -document readable, you can open and close the float box by
25854 left-clicking on the box label.
25855 A closed float box looks like this:
25856 \begin_inset Graphics
25857 filename clipart/float.png
25862 – a gray button with a red label.
25865 \begin_layout Standard
25866 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
25868 that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
25871 \begin_layout Subsection
25873 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25875 name "subsec:Figure-Floats"
25880 \begin_inset Index idx
25883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25884 Floats ! Figure floats
25892 \begin_layout Standard
25894 \begin_inset space ~
25898 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25900 reference "fig:A-star-in"
25904 was created using the menu
25906 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25907 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
25913 arg "float-insert figure"
25917 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and
25920 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25926 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
25930 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor
25931 to the left or right of the image and using the menu
25933 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25935 \begin_inset space ~
25943 arg "layout-paragraph"
25949 \begin_layout Standard
25950 \begin_inset Float figure
25957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25959 \begin_inset Graphics
25960 filename clipart/Star-structure.pdf
25969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25970 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25973 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25975 name "fig:A-star-in"
25992 \begin_layout Standard
25993 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference
25994 to it: Insert a label into the caption using the menu
25996 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26005 ) and refer to it using the menu
26007 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26013 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
26017 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using
26018 vague references like
26019 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26023 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26026 , because, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
26027 will reposition the floats in the final document, it might
26029 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26033 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26037 For more about cross-references, see section
26038 \begin_inset space ~
26042 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26044 reference "sec:Cross-References"
26051 \begin_layout Standard
26052 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you
26053 might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
26054 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
26055 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures
26056 as described in section
26057 \begin_inset space ~
26061 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26063 reference "subsec:List-of-Figures"
26069 \begin_inset space ~
26073 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26075 reference "fig:Two-images"
26079 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
26080 You can also set the images one below the other.
26082 \begin_inset space ~
26086 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26088 reference "fig:Undefinable"
26093 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26095 reference "fig:Star"
26099 are the subfigures.
26102 \begin_layout Standard
26103 \begin_inset Float figure
26110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26111 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
26115 \begin_inset Float figure
26122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26123 \begin_inset Caption Standard
26125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26126 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26128 name "fig:Undefinable"
26140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26141 \begin_inset Graphics
26142 filename clipart/3D-structure-distort.pdf
26154 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
26158 \begin_inset Float figure
26165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26166 \begin_inset Caption Standard
26168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26169 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26184 \begin_inset Graphics
26185 filename clipart/Star-structure.pdf
26197 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
26203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26204 \begin_inset Caption Standard
26206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26207 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26209 name "fig:Two-images"
26226 \begin_layout Subsection
26228 \begin_inset Index idx
26231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26232 Floats ! Table floats
26240 \begin_layout Standard
26241 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
26243 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26244 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
26247 or the toolbar button
26250 arg "float-insert table"
26254 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in
26255 the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures
26256 and that the label begins with “tab:”.
26258 \begin_inset space ~
26262 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26264 reference "tab:Table-float"
26271 \begin_layout Standard
26272 \begin_inset Float table
26279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26280 \begin_inset Caption Standard
26282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26283 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26285 name "tab:Table-float"
26297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26299 \begin_inset Tabular
26300 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
26301 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
26302 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26303 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26304 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26306 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26324 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26342 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26362 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26380 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26398 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26418 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26431 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
26439 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26452 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
26455 \end{array}\right]$
26463 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26476 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
26497 \begin_layout Subsection
26499 \begin_inset Index idx
26502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26511 \begin_layout Standard
26513 offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
26514 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the
26515 float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float
26517 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
26525 \begin_inset space ~
26533 \begin_layout Section
26535 \begin_inset Index idx
26538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26547 \begin_layout Standard
26549 provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page, called
26551 Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc.
26552 \begin_inset space \space{}
26558 \begin_layout Standard
26559 Minipages in \SpecialChar LyX
26560 have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
26562 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26566 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage
26567 and its alignment within the page.
26570 \begin_layout Standard
26572 \begin_inset Box Frameless
26582 height_special "totalheight"
26587 backgroundcolor "none"
26590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26593 This is a minipage.
26594 The text is set in an italic style.
26597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26600 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs
26601 another formatting.
26609 \begin_layout Standard
26610 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
26613 If you place two minipages side-by-side, you can use
26617 as described in section
26618 \begin_inset space ~
26622 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26624 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
26629 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
26635 \begin_layout Standard
26636 \begin_inset Box Frameless
26646 height_special "totalheight"
26651 backgroundcolor "none"
26654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26655 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
26656 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
26662 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
26666 \begin_inset Box Frameless
26676 height_special "totalheight"
26681 backgroundcolor "none"
26684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26685 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
26686 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
26694 \begin_layout Standard
26695 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
26701 \begin_layout Standard
26702 When you right-click on a minipage box, you can transform the box to another
26704 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
26711 \begin_inset space ~
26719 \begin_layout Chapter
26720 Mathematical Formulas
26721 \begin_inset Index idx
26724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26731 \begin_inset Index idx
26734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26763 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26765 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
26772 \begin_layout Standard
26773 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
26778 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
26781 \begin_layout Section
26783 \begin_inset Index idx
26786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26795 \begin_layout Standard
26796 To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon
26809 That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its
26811 That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate
26812 what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
26813 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
26815 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26821 \begin_layout Standard
26822 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done
26826 \begin_inset space ~
26831 , that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
26834 \begin_layout Standard
26835 There are two main types of formulas, inline formulas and display formulas.
26836 Inline formulas appear within a text line, like this one:
26839 \begin_layout Standard
26840 This is a line with an inline formula
26841 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
26847 \begin_layout Standard
26848 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate
26849 paragraph, like this one:
26850 \begin_inset Formula
26857 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
26860 \begin_layout Standard
26862 also supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
26864 For example, typing
26865 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26875 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26878 , followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter
26879 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
26883 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
26886 \begin_inset space ~
26894 \begin_layout Subsection
26895 Navigating in Formulas
26896 \begin_inset Index idx
26899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26908 \begin_layout Standard
26909 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is
26910 achieved with the arrow keys.
26912 uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
26913 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
26918 will leave a formula construct (a square root
26919 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
26923 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
26927 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
26930 \end{array}\right]$
26938 will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula.
26943 can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the
26944 cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
26947 \begin_layout Standard
26952 , printed in this document as
26953 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26957 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26961 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26964 , seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between
26965 characters, but it does exit a nested structure.
26966 For this reason, you have to be careful about using
26971 For example, if you want
26972 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
26980 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26990 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26994 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26999 , since in the latter case only the
27002 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
27007 will be under the square root sign:
27008 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
27014 \begin_layout Standard
27015 You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled
27017 \begin_inset Formula
27019 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
27028 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing
27029 in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind.
27032 \begin_layout Subsection
27036 \begin_layout Standard
27037 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
27038 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press
27042 and a cursor movement key to select text.
27043 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
27044 Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
27045 That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula,
27046 but not in a normal text region in \SpecialChar LyX
27050 \begin_layout Subsection
27051 Exponents and Subscripts
27052 \begin_inset Index idx
27055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27062 \begin_inset Index idx
27065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27074 \begin_layout Standard
27075 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
27078 arg "math-superscript"
27084 arg "math-subscript"
27087 ), but it is often much easier to use a command.
27089 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
27092 , type in a formula
27095 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
27105 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
27111 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
27115 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
27121 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
27127 If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the
27129 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27133 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27136 , you have to use an extra
27140 to separate the circumflex and the character.
27141 For example, if you want
27142 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
27148 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
27154 Subscripts are similar: To get
27155 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
27161 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
27169 \begin_layout Subsection
27171 \begin_inset Index idx
27174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27183 \begin_layout Standard
27184 Create a fraction either with the command
27190 or by using the icon
27193 arg "math-insert \\frac"
27199 \begin_inset space ~
27205 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
27206 The cursor is above the fraction line.
27207 To move it to the bottom, simply press
27212 To move back up, press
27217 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows:
27218 \begin_inset Formula
27220 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
27223 \end{array}\right)}\right]
27231 \begin_layout Subsection
27233 \begin_inset Index idx
27236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27245 \begin_layout Standard
27246 Roots can be created using the
27249 \begin_inset space ~
27257 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
27263 arg "math-insert \\root"
27285 you can produce roots of higher orders, like cube roots, while
27291 always produces a square root.
27294 \begin_layout Subsection
27295 Operators with Limits
27296 \begin_inset Index idx
27299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27306 \begin_inset Index idx
27309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27316 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27318 name "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
27325 \begin_layout Standard
27327 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
27331 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
27334 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
27335 These limits can be entered in \SpecialChar LyX
27336 by entering them as you would enter a super-
27337 or subscript, directly after the symbol.
27338 The sum operator will automatically place its
27339 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27343 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27346 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and to the side in inline
27348 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
27352 \begin_inset Formula
27354 \sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
27359 Integral signs, however, will place the limits to the side in both formula
27363 \begin_layout Standard
27364 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in
27366 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly
27367 behind the operator and using the menu
27369 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27370 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
27372 \begin_inset space ~
27376 \begin_inset space ~
27390 \begin_layout Standard
27391 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
27392 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27396 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27400 \begin_inset Index idx
27403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27410 \begin_inset Formula
27412 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
27417 which will place the
27418 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
27422 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27426 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27430 In inline formulas it looks like this:
27431 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
27437 \begin_layout Standard
27438 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
27445 Have a look at section
27446 \begin_inset space ~
27450 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27452 reference "subsec:Functions"
27456 for an explanation of function macros.
27459 \begin_layout Subsection
27461 \begin_inset Index idx
27464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27473 \begin_layout Standard
27474 Most math symbols can be found in the
27477 \begin_inset space ~
27482 under one of several categories; including
27499 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical
27503 \begin_layout Standard
27504 If you know the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27505 -command for a construct or symbol you wish to use, you
27506 don't have to use the
27509 \begin_inset space ~
27514 ; you can type the command directly into the formula.
27516 will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
27519 \begin_layout Subsection
27521 \begin_inset Index idx
27524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27533 \begin_layout Standard
27534 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that
27540 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
27546 \begin_inset space ~
27554 arg "math-insert \\space"
27558 This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen.
27559 For example, the sequence
27564 \begin_inset Formula $a\,b$
27567 appears in \SpecialChar LyX
27569 \begin_inset Graphics
27570 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
27575 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind
27576 the space marker and enter space again several times.
27577 With every space enter the size will be changed.
27578 Some markers for the space size appear red in \SpecialChar LyX
27579 , because they are negative
27581 Here are two examples:
27584 \begin_layout Standard
27594 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
27600 \begin_layout Standard
27610 \begin_inset Formula $a\!b$
27616 \begin_layout Subsection
27618 \begin_inset Index idx
27621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27628 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27630 name "subsec:Functions"
27637 \begin_layout Standard
27641 \begin_inset space ~
27646 contains under the button
27649 arg "math-insert \\functions"
27652 a number of function macros, such as
27653 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
27657 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
27665 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
27672 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to
27673 avoid confusions, because
27674 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
27678 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
27684 \begin_layout Standard
27685 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
27687 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
27691 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
27697 \begin_layout Standard
27698 For some mathematical objects, like limits, the macro changes where subscripts
27699 are placed, as described in section
27700 \begin_inset space ~
27704 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27706 reference "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
27713 \begin_layout Subsection
27715 \begin_inset Index idx
27718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27727 \begin_layout Standard
27728 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text
27730 This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use.
27731 You can also use \SpecialChar LaTeX
27732 commands, for example, to enter
27733 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
27736 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
27737 Our example is entered by typing
27742 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
27749 \begin_inset space ~
27753 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27755 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
27759 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
27762 \begin_layout Standard
27763 \begin_inset Float table
27770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27771 \begin_inset Caption Standard
27773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27774 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27776 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
27780 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
27788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27790 \begin_inset Tabular
27791 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
27792 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
27793 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
27794 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
27795 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
27797 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27806 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27815 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27835 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27853 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27866 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27879 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
27889 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27907 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27920 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27933 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
27943 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27961 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27974 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27987 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
27997 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28015 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28028 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28041 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
28051 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28069 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28082 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28095 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
28105 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28123 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28136 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28149 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
28159 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28177 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28190 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28203 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
28213 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28231 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28244 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28257 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
28267 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28285 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28298 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28311 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
28321 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28330 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28343 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28356 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
28377 \begin_layout Standard
28378 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
28381 \begin_inset space ~
28389 arg "math-insert \\hat"
28392 in the math panel; this will apply to any selection you have made within
28396 \begin_layout Section
28397 Brackets and Delimiters
28398 \begin_inset Index idx
28401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28408 \begin_inset Index idx
28411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28418 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28420 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
28427 \begin_layout Standard
28428 There are several brackets available through \SpecialChar LyX
28430 For some purposes, using just the keys
28435 But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction,
28436 or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math
28437 toolbar delimiter icon
28440 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
28444 For example, if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
28445 \begin_inset Formula
28447 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
28455 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
28456 Below, the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
28460 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
28463 and the expression on the right was entered using the
28469 \begin_inset Formula
28471 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
28479 \begin_layout Standard
28480 If you use the delimiter icon, the parentheses, and other brackets from
28481 that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is
28485 \begin_layout Standard
28486 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the
28487 left side and right side.
28488 If you use the option
28491 \begin_inset space ~
28496 , the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
28497 The selection will be shown as \SpecialChar TeX
28499 If you want one side not to have a bracket, use
28504 It will appear in \SpecialChar LyX
28505 with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed.
28508 \begin_layout Standard
28509 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures, like a square
28510 root, you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that
28511 is to go inside the brackets.
28512 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
28517 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses, square brackets, and
28518 braces, on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
28519 For example, to insert a pair of parentheses, select the structure and
28523 arg "math-delim ( )"
28529 \begin_layout Section
28530 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
28531 \begin_inset Index idx
28534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28541 \begin_inset Index idx
28544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28551 \begin_inset Index idx
28554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28555 Math ! Multi-line Equations
28563 \begin_layout Standard
28564 Matrices are entered in \SpecialChar LyX
28568 \begin_inset space ~
28576 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
28580 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
28581 Here is an example:
28582 \begin_inset Formula
28584 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
28593 The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section
28594 \begin_inset space ~
28598 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28600 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
28605 When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries
28606 will be left-, right-, or center-justified.
28607 This alignment is set in the box
28612 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28620 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28624 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28632 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28636 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28644 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28650 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28658 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28661 for every column as default.
28662 For example, the sequence
28663 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28671 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28674 means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be
28675 centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter
28676 corresponds to the relevant column.
28677 The result will look like this:
28678 \begin_inset Formula
28681 this & this\,column & this\,column\\
28682 column & has & has\,right\\
28683 has\,left\,alignment & center\,alignment & alignment
28692 \begin_layout Standard
28693 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
28696 arg "newline-insert newline"
28699 while the cursor is in the matrix.
28700 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
28702 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28705 or the math toolbar.
28708 \begin_layout Standard
28709 There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases.
28710 It can be created with the menu
28712 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28713 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
28715 \begin_inset space ~
28727 Here is an example:
28728 \begin_inset Formula
28742 \begin_layout Standard
28743 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
28746 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
28749 arg "newline-insert newline"
28753 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each
28758 arg "newline-insert newline"
28761 in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign
28762 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28766 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28769 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign
28770 is in the second column, and the rest in the third column.
28771 A new row is created by every further entry of
28774 arg "newline-insert newline"
28778 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
28779 Here is an example:
28780 \begin_inset Formula
28782 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
28783 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
28788 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures
28789 in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
28790 \begin_inset Formula
28792 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
28800 \begin_layout Standard
28801 The multi-line formula type described here is called
28808 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
28809 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
28810 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28812 reference "eq:asquared"
28817 The other types are described in section
28818 \begin_inset space ~
28822 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28824 reference "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
28831 \begin_layout Section
28832 Formula Numbering and Referencing
28833 \begin_inset Index idx
28836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28837 Math ! Formula numbering
28843 \begin_inset Index idx
28846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28847 Math ! Referencing formulas
28853 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28855 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
28862 \begin_layout Standard
28863 To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
28865 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28866 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
28868 \begin_inset space ~
28872 \begin_inset space ~
28880 arg "math-number-toggle"
28884 The formula number appears in \SpecialChar LyX
28885 within parentheses.
28886 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
28887 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on
28888 the document class.
28889 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
28890 separated by a dot:
28891 \begin_inset Formula
28901 arg "math-number-toggle"
28904 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
28905 You can only number displayed formulas.
28908 \begin_layout Standard
28909 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu
28911 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28912 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
28914 \begin_inset space ~
28918 \begin_inset space ~
28926 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
28929 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
28930 \begin_inset Formula
28933 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
28939 To number all lines use the shortcut
28942 arg "math-number-toggle"
28948 \begin_layout Standard
28949 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
28952 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
28953 A label is inserted with the menu
28955 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28964 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
28965 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
28966 It is recommended that you use the suggested
28967 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28975 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28978 as the first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the
28979 label type when you have many labels in your document.
28980 We inserted in the following example the label
28981 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28985 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28988 in the second line:
28989 \begin_inset Formula
28991 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
28992 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
28997 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
28998 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
28999 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
29001 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29003 \begin_inset space ~
29011 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
29015 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
29016 The reference appears in \SpecialChar LyX
29017 as a gray cross-reference box and in the output
29018 as the formula number:
29021 \begin_layout Standard
29022 This is a cross-reference to equation (
29023 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29025 reference "eq:tanhExp"
29032 \begin_layout Standard
29033 The properties of \SpecialChar LyX
29034 's cross-reference box are described in section
29035 \begin_inset space ~
29039 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29041 reference "sec:Cross-References"
29046 To delete a label, set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and
29054 \begin_layout Section
29055 User defined math macros
29056 \begin_inset Index idx
29059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29068 \begin_layout Standard
29070 allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you
29071 have equations of the same form in a document several times.
29072 Math macros are explained in section
29075 \begin_inset space ~
29087 \begin_layout Section
29091 \begin_layout Subsection
29093 \begin_inset Index idx
29096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29105 \begin_layout Standard
29106 The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman.
29107 To set a font in a formula, use the
29110 \begin_inset space ~
29118 arg "math-insert \\font"
29121 , or enter its command, listed in table
29122 \begin_inset space ~
29126 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29128 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
29135 \begin_layout Standard
29136 \begin_inset Float table
29143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29144 \begin_inset Caption Standard
29146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29147 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29149 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
29153 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
29161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29163 \begin_inset Tabular
29164 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="2">
29165 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
29166 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
29167 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
29169 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29178 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29189 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29199 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
29207 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29222 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29226 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
29234 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29249 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29253 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
29261 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29276 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29286 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
29294 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29309 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29313 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
29321 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29335 <row change="inserted 5863344 1592055455">
29336 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29341 \change_inserted 5863344 1592055455
29342 \begin_inset Formula $\mathds{DOUBLESTROKE}$
29350 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29355 \change_inserted 5863344 1592055455
29367 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29371 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
29379 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29394 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29405 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
29413 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29427 <row change="inserted -131811572 1591595416">
29428 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29433 \change_inserted -131811572 1591595416
29441 \begin_inset Formula $\mathscr{SCRIPT}$
29449 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29454 \change_inserted -131811572 1591595416
29466 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29470 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
29478 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29504 \begin_layout Standard
29505 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
29508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29513 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
29516 \change_inserted 5863344 1592055666
29518 \change_deleted -131811572 1591595671
29522 \change_inserted -131811572 1591595667
29541 \begin_layout Standard
29542 When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula.
29543 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
29548 within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a protected
29549 space when you need a space in the box.
29550 Here is an example where
29551 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29555 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29562 denotes the set of numbers:
29563 \begin_inset Formula
29565 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\:x\in\mathbb{N}
29573 \begin_layout Standard
29574 The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion.
29575 You can, for example, put a character in
29584 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
29588 \begin_inset Newline newline
29591 So it is better not to use this feature.
29594 \begin_layout Standard
29595 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
29596 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
29600 \begin_inset Newline newline
29603 You can only print them emboldened using the command
29609 , which works like the other typeface commands:
29610 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
29616 \begin_layout Standard
29623 works for all symbols, letters, and numbers.
29626 \begin_layout Standard
29627 A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu
29629 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
29630 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
29632 \begin_inset space ~
29640 \begin_layout Subsection
29642 \begin_inset Index idx
29645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29654 \begin_layout Standard
29655 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but
29657 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using
29661 \begin_inset space ~
29665 \begin_inset space ~
29673 \begin_inset space ~
29681 arg "math-insert \\font"
29685 Math text appears in \SpecialChar LyX
29686 in black instead of blue.
29687 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
29688 Here is an example:
29689 \begin_inset Formula
29692 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
29693 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
29702 \begin_layout Subsection
29704 \begin_inset Index idx
29707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29716 \begin_layout Standard
29717 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are
29718 automatically chosen in most situations.
29736 For most characters,
29744 are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts,
29745 and certain other structures, are set larger in
29750 Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various
29751 situations, all text will be set in the styles that \SpecialChar LaTeX
29752 thinks are appropriate.
29753 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
29756 arg "math-insert \\style"
29760 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
29761 For example, you can set
29762 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
29765 , which is normally in
29774 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
29778 The four styles are used in the following example:
29781 \begin_layout Standard
29782 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
29786 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
29790 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
29794 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
29800 \begin_layout Standard
29801 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset
29802 is set in a particular size with the menu
29804 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
29806 \begin_inset space ~
29811 , all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
29812 Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts
29813 will be adjusted to correspond.
29814 As an example here is a formula in the font size
29815 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29819 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29825 \begin_layout Standard
29829 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
29835 \begin_layout Section
29836 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
29838 \begin_inset Index idx
29841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29848 \begin_inset Index idx
29851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29860 \begin_layout Standard
29862 supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society (AMS)
29863 that are in common use.
29866 \begin_layout Subsection
29867 Enabling AMS-Support
29870 \begin_layout Standard
29871 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in
29873 \change_inserted -131811572 1600338725
29889 \change_deleted -131811572 1600338685
29890 selecting the checkbox
29893 \begin_inset space ~
29897 \begin_inset space ~
29901 \begin_inset space ~
29910 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29914 \begin_inset Index idx
29917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29918 Document ! Settings
29926 \begin_inset space ~
29932 AMS is needed for many math-constructs; so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
29933 -errors in formulas,
29934 ensure that you have enabled AMS.
29937 \begin_layout Subsection
29939 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29941 name "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
29946 \begin_inset Index idx
29949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29950 Math ! Multi-line Equations
29958 \begin_layout Standard
29959 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
29960 provides a selection of different formula types.
29962 allows you to choose between
29983 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
29984 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29991 , for an explanation of these formula types.
29994 \begin_layout Chapter
29998 \begin_layout Section
30000 \begin_inset Index idx
30003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30010 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30012 name "sec:Cross-References"
30019 \begin_layout Standard
30020 One of \SpecialChar LyX
30021 's strengths is cross-references.
30022 You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in
30024 To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it.
30025 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
30026 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
30029 \begin_layout Enumerate
30033 \begin_layout Enumerate
30034 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30036 name "enu:Second-item"
30043 \begin_layout Enumerate
30047 \begin_layout Standard
30048 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
30050 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30053 or by pressing the toolbar button
30060 A gray label box like this:
30061 \begin_inset Graphics
30062 filename clipart/label.png
30066 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
30068 offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case
30070 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30078 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30083 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30091 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30095 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30099 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30103 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted; for
30104 example, if you insert a label into a section heading, the suggested prefix
30106 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30114 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30120 \begin_layout Standard
30121 To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu
30123 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30126 or the toolbar button
30129 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
30133 A gray cross-reference box like this:
30134 \begin_inset Graphics
30135 filename clipart/reference.png
30139 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels
30141 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
30142 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30150 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30154 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear
30158 \begin_layout Standard
30159 As an alternative to
30161 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30164 , you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
30169 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted
30170 to the actual cursor position via the menu
30172 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
30184 \begin_layout Standard
30185 Here is our cross-reference: Item
30186 \begin_inset space ~
30190 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30192 reference "enu:Second-item"
30199 \begin_layout Standard
30200 It is recommended to use a protected space
30204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30205 described in section
30206 \begin_inset space ~
30210 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30212 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
30221 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly
30222 line breaks between them.
30225 \begin_layout Standard
30226 There are eight formats of cross-references:
30229 \begin_layout Description
30230 <reference>: prints the number, this is the default:
30231 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30233 reference "fig:Two-images"
30240 \begin_layout Description
30241 (<reference>): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style
30242 normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name
30244 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30248 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30252 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30254 reference "eq:tanhExp"
30261 \begin_layout Description
30262 <page>: prints the page number: Page
30263 \begin_inset space ~
30267 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30268 LatexCommand pageref
30269 reference "fig:Two-images"
30276 \begin_layout Description
30278 \begin_inset space ~
30282 \begin_inset space ~
30285 <page>: prints the text “on page” and the page number:
30286 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30287 LatexCommand vpageref
30288 reference "fig:Two-images"
30293 \begin_inset Newline newline
30296 If the label is on the same page, it prints “on this page”; if the label
30297 is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints “on the facing page”;
30298 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints “on
30299 the previous page”; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
30300 it prints “on the next page”.
30301 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
30304 \begin_layout Description
30306 \begin_inset space ~
30310 \begin_inset space ~
30314 \begin_inset space ~
30317 <page>: prints the number, the text “on page” and the page number:
30318 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30320 reference "fig:Two-images"
30325 \begin_inset Newline newline
30328 If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like
30334 ; otherwise it behaves like
30338 \begin_inset space ~
30342 \begin_inset space ~
30351 \begin_layout Description
30353 \begin_inset space ~
30356 reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
30357 \begin_inset Newline newline
30361 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
30364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30369 This feature is only available when you have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30379 \begin_inset Index idx
30382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30384 packages ! prettyref
30390 \begin_inset Index idx
30393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30395 packages ! refstyle
30406 \begin_inset Newline newline
30409 You can select which \SpecialChar LaTeX
30410 -package should be used for this feature by setting
30413 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
30417 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30418 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30426 is the default and preferred because
30430 supports only English documents.
30431 The format is specified by using the command
30435 newref\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
30444 (refstyle) in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30445 preamble of the document.
30446 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label
30448 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30456 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30464 \begin_inset Newline newline
30471 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
30476 \begin_inset Newline newline
30487 predefines reference formats for all available types.
30488 This is especially true for the wide variety of mathematical `theorem'
30490 So if you want to make formatted references to, say, Propositions, then
30491 you will need to define the relevant format yourself.
30496 , you might do so as follows:
30497 \begin_inset Newline newline
30504 newref\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
30505 format{prop}{Proposition
30510 \begin_inset Newline newline
30513 For more information about defining formatted references, have a look at
30514 the package documentation
30515 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30517 key "prettyref,refstyle"
30523 \begin_inset Newline newline
30534 will be available with formatted references only if you are using the
30541 \begin_layout Description
30543 \begin_inset space ~
30546 reference: prints the caption or the name of the reference:
30547 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30548 LatexCommand nameref
30549 reference "fig:Two-images"
30556 \begin_layout Description
30558 \begin_inset space ~
30561 only: prints only the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30562 label for the reference:
30563 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30564 LatexCommand labelonly
30565 reference "fig:Two-images"
30570 \begin_inset Newline newline
30573 This allows for customization, using \SpecialChar TeX
30574 Code, if you want to issue a command
30575 that \SpecialChar LyX
30581 , then you may want to use the
30584 \begin_inset space ~
30589 option, which will output only the part of the reference following the
30591 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30595 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30599 This is the form needed for e.
30600 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30604 \begin_inset space \space{}
30611 's range commands.The number and current page of the referenced document
30612 part in the output is automatically calculated by \SpecialChar LaTeX
30614 The varieties are adjusted in the field
30618 of the cross-reference window, that appears when you click on the cross-referen
30622 \begin_layout Standard
30623 You can only use the style
30627 to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style
30631 is always possible.
30634 \begin_layout Standard
30635 If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading;
30636 for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in
30638 Referencing formulas is explained in section
30639 \begin_inset space ~
30643 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30645 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
30652 \begin_layout Standard
30653 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
30657 \begin_inset space ~
30661 \begin_inset space ~
30666 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
30667 \change_inserted -584632292 1599757593
30668 (Ctrl-clicking on a cross-reference will also take you to its corresponding
30671 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
30674 \begin_inset space ~
30679 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
30680 You can also go back with the toolbar button
30683 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
30687 \change_inserted -584632292 1599757706
30688 or, using the menu: Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
30689 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
30695 \begin_layout Standard
30696 You can change labels at any time.
30697 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you
30699 \change_deleted -584632292 1599757720
30701 \change_inserted -584632292 1599757724
30702 change them all manually
30707 \begin_layout Standard
30708 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see in \SpecialChar LyX
30710 in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output instead
30714 \begin_layout Standard
30715 References are described in detail in the section
30726 \begin_layout Section
30727 Table of Contents and other Listings
30728 \begin_inset Index idx
30731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30738 \begin_inset Index idx
30741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30742 Navigating ! Outline
30748 \begin_inset Index idx
30751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30758 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30767 \begin_layout Subsection
30769 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30771 name "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
30778 \begin_layout Standard
30779 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
30781 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30782 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
30784 \begin_inset space ~
30788 \begin_inset space ~
30794 It is displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
30796 If you click on it, the
30800 window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline, which allows you
30801 to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
30802 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
30804 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
30806 \begin_inset space ~
30811 that is described in section
30812 \begin_inset space ~
30816 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30818 reference "subsec:The-Outliner"
30825 \begin_layout Standard
30826 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
30827 If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described
30829 \begin_inset space ~
30833 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30835 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
30839 , it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
30841 \begin_inset space ~
30845 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30847 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
30851 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are
30853 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
30856 \begin_layout Subsection
30857 List of Figures, Tables, Listings and Algorithms
30858 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30860 name "subsec:List-of-Figures"
30867 \begin_layout Standard
30868 Table, figure, listings and algorithm lists are very much like the table
30870 You can insert them via the
30872 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30873 List/Contents/References
30876 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
30879 \begin_layout Section
30880 URLs and Hyperlinks
30881 \begin_inset Index idx
30884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30891 \begin_inset Index idx
30894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30903 \begin_layout Subsection
30905 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30914 \begin_layout Standard
30915 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
30917 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30923 \begin_layout Standard
30924 Here is an example URL: \SpecialChar LyX
30926 \begin_inset Flex URL
30929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30931 https://www.lyx.org
30939 \begin_layout Standard
30940 You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be
30946 To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next
30950 \begin_layout Standard
30951 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
30954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30959 URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
30968 \begin_layout Subsection
30970 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30972 name "subsec:Hyperlinks"
30979 \begin_layout Standard
30980 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
30982 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30985 or with the toolbar button
30992 The appearing dialog has two fields:
31001 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
31002 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
31003 \begin_inset CommandInset href
31005 name "LyX's homepage"
31006 target "https://www.lyx.org"
31011 , an Email address like this:
31012 \begin_inset CommandInset href
31014 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
31015 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
31021 , or a link to a file.
31026 in the hyperlink settings dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
31034 \begin_layout Standard
31035 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by
31037 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31045 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31048 to the link target.
31051 \begin_layout Standard
31052 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
31053 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
31054 To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use
31055 the text style dialog.
31056 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
31060 \begin_inset CommandInset href
31062 name "LyX's homepage"
31063 target "https://www.lyx.org"
31071 \begin_layout Standard
31072 The link text color can be changed, when the option
31076 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
31078 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31079 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31083 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the
31085 \begin_inset Newline newline
31093 \begin_inset Newline newline
31100 in the PDF Properties dialog.
31101 \change_inserted -584632292 1588303457
31105 \begin_layout Section
31107 \change_inserted -584632292 1588303474
31109 \begin_inset Index idx
31112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31119 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31121 name "sec:Counters"
31128 \begin_layout Standard
31130 \change_inserted -584632292 1602541139
31131 One powerful feature of \SpecialChar LaTeX
31132 is its ability to manage counters.
31133 Mostly, this is handled automatically, but there are times one wants to
31134 modify counters directly.
31135 This can be done in LyX using the counter inset, which is accessible from
31137 This allows one to set a counter's value; to reset it (to zero);
31141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31143 \change_inserted -584632292 1602541231
31144 Note that the section counter, e.g., starts with its value at zero and then
31145 is incremented to one when the first section is created.
31146 So, if you want the next section to be section five, say, then you need
31147 to set the section counter to four.
31154 to add to the value (or subtract from it, since the value added can be
31155 negative); to save it; to restore the saved value; and to print the value.
31156 These effects can also be limited to LyX itself.
31157 And they will appear in HTML and DocBook output, as well as in LaTeX.
31160 \begin_layout Standard
31162 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529162
31163 There are five commands you can use:
31166 \begin_layout Enumerate
31168 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529167
31169 Set counter: Allows you to assign a specific value to a counter
31172 \begin_layout Enumerate
31174 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529177
31175 Increase counter: Allows you to add some specified amount to a counter (or
31176 to subtract, if you choose a negative number)
31179 \begin_layout Enumerate
31181 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529180
31182 Reset to zero: Sets the value of the counter to 0.
31185 \begin_layout Enumerate
31187 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529184
31188 Save value of counter: Saves the value of the counter so that it can later
31192 \begin_layout Enumerate
31194 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529187
31195 Restore value of counter: Restores the previously saved value.
31198 \begin_layout Standard
31200 \change_inserted -584632292 1588374230
31201 The dialog allows you to choose which counter you wish to modify from all
31202 those that are available in the current document class.
31207 \begin_layout Section
31209 \begin_inset Index idx
31212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31219 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31221 name "sec:Appendices"
31228 \begin_layout Standard
31229 Appendices are created with the menu
31231 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31233 \begin_inset space ~
31237 \begin_inset space ~
31243 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end
31244 as the appendix part of the book.
31245 This part is marked with a red borderline.
31248 \begin_layout Standard
31249 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
31250 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
31251 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot
31252 and the subsection number.
31253 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
31257 \begin_layout Standard
31259 \begin_inset space ~
31263 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31265 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
31273 \begin_inset space ~
31277 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31279 reference "subsec:Export"
31286 \begin_layout Section
31288 \begin_inset Index idx
31291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31298 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31300 name "sec:Bibliography"
31307 \begin_layout Standard
31308 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a \SpecialChar LyX
31310 You can include a bibliography database, which is explained in sec.
31311 \begin_inset space ~
31315 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31317 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
31324 , or you can insert the bibliography manually, using the paragraph environment
31329 , which is described in the following section (but see also sec.
31330 \begin_inset space ~
31334 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31336 reference "subsec:Biblio_environment"
31341 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in
31342 this document, such as author-year citations, and if you have more than
31343 a handful of references, then you should seriously consider
31347 using a bibliography database.
31350 \begin_layout Standard
31351 In order to demonstrate the difference between these two approaches, we
31352 use two bibliographies in this document, a
31356 environment and a database-generated bibliography.
31357 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
31358 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
31359 In other words, the database approach relieves you, amongst other things,
31360 from the burden to check which entries you have actually cited.
31363 \begin_layout Subsection
31364 The Bibliography Environment
31365 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31367 name "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
31374 \begin_layout Standard
31379 environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled
31381 If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a
31390 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography
31392 Each entry needs to be given a unique key, which is one word consisting
31393 of ASCII characters only.
31397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31399 \begin_inset CommandInset href
31402 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII#Character_set"
31408 \begin_inset Newline newline
31412 \begin_inset Flex URL
31415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31417 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII#Character_set
31427 For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about \SpecialChar LaTeX
31430 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31434 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31437 , a short form of its title, as the key.
31438 \begin_inset Newline newline
31445 for the entry, references to it will appear with this label instead of
31446 the number of the entry.
31451 in the bibliography items settings dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
31460 \begin_layout Standard
31461 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
31463 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31466 or the toolbar button
31469 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
31473 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear
31474 containing the available citations.
31475 Select one or more keys from the list and
31485 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
31486 If you click on the box, the citation window will appear and you can change
31490 \begin_layout Standard
31491 Citation references appear in the output as the number or the label of the
31492 bibliography entry with surrounding brackets.
31493 Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label
31495 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31499 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31505 \begin_layout Standard
31509 Companion Second Edition
31512 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31514 key "latexcompanion"
31522 \begin_layout Standard
31523 The \SpecialChar LyX
31524 -Team members are listed in the Credits:
31525 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31535 \begin_layout Standard
31536 You can also produce author-year or author-number citations, using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31543 \begin_inset Index idx
31546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31555 \change_deleted -712698321 1555659455
31556 the label needs to be given the form
31557 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31561 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31565 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31568 Author A and Author B(Year)
31569 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31576 a blank between the author(s) and the opening parenthesis that delimits
31583 \begin_inset space ~
31588 in the document settings
31589 \begin_inset Index idx
31592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31593 Document ! Settings
31600 Bibliography\SpecialChar menuseparator
31602 \begin_inset space ~
31608 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31610 reference "subsec:Citation-Format"
31618 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660530
31620 Once you have done that, the
31624 dialog has three input fields instead of the
31641 The first one takes the Author list as it should be displayed in the citation
31642 reference, the second the year (without parentheses).
31643 These two are madatory.
31644 If there are multiple authors and you want to both refer to them as a full
31647 Baker, Jones, and Williams
31649 ) and in abrreviated form (
31656 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660544
31657 add the abbreviated form to
31661 and the full list to the optional
31669 \change_inserted -712698321 1555659886
31670 If specified like this,
31672 you can select between different author-year or author-number styles
31673 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660646
31676 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31683 is specified, toggling
31684 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31688 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31691 in the citation dialog or the citation context menu will switch between
31692 full and abbreviated list
31696 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660793
31697 Note that the author and year specified in the dialog are only used for
31698 the citation references.
31699 In the bibliography entry, author and year must be added manually.
31704 \begin_layout Standard
31705 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest
31708 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
31710 \begin_inset space ~
31718 arg "layout-paragraph"
31722 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
31725 \begin_layout Subsection
31726 Bibliography databases
31727 \begin_inset Index idx
31730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31731 Bibliography ! Databases
31737 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31739 name "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
31746 \begin_layout Standard
31747 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same references in different
31752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31753 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning
31755 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations
31756 and reviews along with bibliographical information.
31761 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography
31763 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of
31764 your working field in a database.
31765 This database can be used for different documents, and by default only
31766 the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography
31767 list for that document.
31768 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books
31772 \begin_layout Standard
31773 The database is a text file with the file extension
31774 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31782 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31785 , containing the bibliography in a special format.
31786 The format is explained in
31787 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31794 and in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31796 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31798 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
31804 The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a
31805 special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
31806 A list of such programs is maintained on the \SpecialChar LyX
31808 \begin_inset Flex URL
31811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31813 https://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
31821 \begin_layout Standard
31823 supports two different approaches to use bibliography databases in a document.
31824 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31825 is the classic technique that has been the only way to use such databases
31827 It is quite established and mature and there is a huge range of existing
31829 But it has its drawbacks, especially when it comes to more complex bibliographi
31830 c needs and support for specific languages and scripts.
31831 Those are addressed by
31836 \begin_inset Index idx
31839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31841 packages ! biblatex
31847 It reads the same database format than Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31848 (although it has been significantly
31849 extended beyond Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31859 can handle any classic Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31860 database, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31861 might conversely fail to correctly
31862 handle databases that use specific
31871 , but it uses a different framework to generate citations and references
31875 \begin_layout Standard
31876 To select if Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31881 should be used, set in the document settings (menu
31883 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31887 \begin_inset Index idx
31890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31891 Document ! Settings
31903 \begin_inset space ~
31908 to a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31916 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31917 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31919 \begin_inset Index idx
31922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31923 Bibliography ! Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31932 \begin_layout Standard
31933 To access a database via Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31936 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31937 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
31939 \begin_inset space ~
31945 A window will appear in which you can add one or more databases and select
31946 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31954 Add bibliography to TOC
31956 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
31961 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
31962 in the document or just the cited references.
31964 \change_inserted -712698321 1530969762
31969 drop box lets you specify the encoding of the database(s), should this
31970 differ from the encoding of the document.
31975 \begin_layout Standard
31976 The Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31977 style file is a text file with the file extension
31978 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31986 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31989 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
31990 Your \SpecialChar LaTeX
31991 distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers
31992 provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the
31994 It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something
31999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32000 For information on how this is done, have a look at
32001 \begin_inset Newline newline
32005 \begin_inset CommandInset href
32007 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
32017 In this document we used the Bib\SpecialChar TeX
32022 , which provides an alpha-numeric style in accordance with the German Standards
32026 \begin_layout Standard
32027 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
32030 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32032 \begin_inset Index idx
32035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32036 Bibliography ! Biblatex
32042 \begin_inset Index idx
32045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32047 packages ! biblatex
32055 \begin_layout Standard
32056 Accessing a database via
32060 is almost identical to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
32063 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32064 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
32066 \begin_inset space ~
32072 In contrary to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
32073 you cannot select a
32078 \change_inserted -712698321 1531045799
32082 The other dialog options are the same as with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
32085 \change_inserted -712698321 1531045867
32086 As for the styles, note the following.
32091 \begin_layout Standard
32096 has two different style files: a bibliography style file (text file with
32098 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32106 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32109 ) controls how the bibliography entries will look like and a citation style
32110 file (text file with the file extension
32111 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32119 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32122 ) controls the look of the citation references in the text.
32123 Usually such style files come in pairs and it makes sense to use matching
32125 It is nevertheless possible to mix any citation style with any bibliography
32129 \begin_layout Standard
32134 styles are not set in the
32137 \begin_inset space ~
32142 dialog, but in the document settings.
32143 \begin_inset Index idx
32146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32147 Document ! Settings
32152 However, in the dialog in the
32156 field, which is only visible if you use
32160 , you can enter options that determine how the bibliography is printed (for
32161 example how its heading will appear).
32162 These options are described in detail in the
32167 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32177 \begin_layout Standard
32178 Inserting a citation reference works as described in section
32179 \begin_inset space ~
32183 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32185 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
32195 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32196 Bibliography Processors
32199 \begin_layout Standard
32200 To generate the bibliography from a database, \SpecialChar LyX
32201 uses a bibliography processor,
32202 that is an external program that reads the database, sorts the citations
32203 and processes the data in a way it can be included in the document.
32204 The classic program is called Bib\SpecialChar TeX
32206 It has the advantage that it is very mature and widespread, but the disadvantag
32207 e that it has severe limitations, due to its age.
32210 \begin_layout Standard
32211 Meanwhile, some alternatives have been developed that address some of these
32213 LyX natively supports some of them and lets you select a custom processor.
32214 You can do this on a general level in
32216 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
32217 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
32218 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
32221 or for individual documents in
32223 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32224 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32228 The following variants are available by default:
32231 \begin_layout Description
32232 biber a specific, modern processor
32233 \begin_inset Index idx
32236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32243 developed exclusively for
32247 (it does not work with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
32253 provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory and many specific features
32258 makes use of; if you use the
32262 approach, it is strongly recommended to use
32269 \begin_layout Description
32270 bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries
32271 that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works
32272 with all bibliography packages, although it will probably fail with
32276 bibliographies due to the limited memory.
32279 \begin_layout Description
32280 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding
32281 (but no Unicode support), larger memory than
32285 , works with all bibliography packages, although more complex
32289 bibliographies will exceed its limits, and not all
32293 features are supported.
32296 \begin_layout Standard
32297 By default (with the
32303 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32304 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32317 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
32318 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
32319 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
32322 ), \SpecialChar LyX
32323 selects an appropriate (available) processor for the current bibliography
32336 for Bib\SpecialChar TeX
32337 -based bibliography styles).
32338 This should suit most needs.
32341 \begin_layout Standard
32342 In Japanese documents, a specific processor is used.
32343 By default this is pBib\SpecialChar TeX
32344 (in \SpecialChar LyX
32349 ), a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
32350 variant specifically aimed at Japanese.
32351 You can adjust it in
32353 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
32354 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
32355 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
32361 \begin_layout Standard
32362 Selected bibliography processors can be controlled with options that you
32363 can add below the selection.
32364 Before adding options, it is strongly recommended that you read the manual
32365 of Bib\SpecialChar TeX
32371 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32381 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32385 \begin_layout Standard
32387 supports some specific tasks such as sectioned bibliographies and multiple
32389 These are explained in detail in section
32391 Customizing Bibliographies
32395 with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
32400 Additional Features
32403 \change_inserted 5863208 1598273348
32407 \begin_layout Subsection
32409 \begin_inset Index idx
32412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32413 Bibliography ! Citation format
32419 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32421 name "subsec:Citation-Format"
32428 \begin_layout Standard
32429 Many different citation formats are common, e.
32430 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32434 \begin_inset space \space{}
32437 numerical citation (as
32438 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32442 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32445 like in this document), alpha-numerical citations (as
32446 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32450 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32453 ) or author-year citations (as
32454 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32458 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32463 supports these formats via specific citation packages and their style
32467 \begin_layout Standard
32468 By default a simple numeric citation style is used.
32471 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32472 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32476 \begin_inset Index idx
32479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32480 Document ! Settings
32485 you have a range of other options, depending on your preferred bibliography
32491 environment your only choice besides manual formatting of the bibliography
32492 labels, is there to use
32495 \begin_inset space ~
32506 \begin_inset space ~
32511 which gives you author-year and author-numerical citations (see above
32512 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32514 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
32521 \begin_layout Standard
32522 With a bibliography database (see
32523 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32525 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
32532 ) one has in contrary to the
32536 environment full access to the formatting styles.
32537 These style formats are available:
32540 \begin_layout Description
32542 \begin_inset space ~
32545 (BibTeX) the default Bib\SpecialChar TeX
32546 -based approached without any additional packages
32547 (simple numeric citations).
32550 \begin_layout Description
32551 Biblatex loads the package
32556 \begin_inset Index idx
32559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32561 packages ! biblatex
32566 and lets you select a style in the dropdown boxes
32568 Biblatex citation style
32572 Biblatex bibliography style
32575 Options to the package
32579 can be entered in the
32586 \begin_layout Description
32588 \begin_inset space ~
32592 \begin_inset space ~
32595 mode) loads the package
32599 with the natbib compatibility mode.
32600 This is a specific variant for users who switch an existing document that
32612 behavior very closely.
32617 this option has some additional styles.
32622 styles are also supported by this variant.
32625 \begin_layout Description
32627 \begin_inset space ~
32630 (BibTeX) loads the package
32635 \begin_inset Index idx
32638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32645 which provides author-year styles particularly suited for law studies.
32648 \begin_layout Description
32650 \begin_inset space ~
32653 (BibTeX) loads the package
32658 \begin_inset Index idx
32661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32668 which provides citation styles particularly suited for the humanities.
32671 \begin_layout Standard
32680 style formats provide the choice between author-year and author-numerical
32682 You have to select one style in the dropdown box
32691 formats, this only affects the appearance in the \SpecialChar LyX
32693 Whether the output uses numerical, author-year or another format such as
32694 alpha-numerical depends only on the selected
32696 Biblatex citation style
32699 However, when switching between Author-year and Author-number, a suitable
32705 , on the other hand, the dialog selection will ultimately determine the
32709 \begin_layout Standard
32710 For any author-year and author-numerical selection, multiple style variants
32711 are available in the
32716 Some selections also provide further options like the option to uppercase
32717 a name prefix such as
32718 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32722 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32726 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32730 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32733 ) or to expand or reduce the number of displayed others (i.
32734 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32738 \begin_inset space \space{}
32742 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32746 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32753 \begin_layout Standard
32754 In the citation dialog you can also set text to appear after a citation
32756 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32760 \begin_inset space \space{}
32763 page numbers, which will then be formatted according to the style's needs
32765 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32769 \begin_inset space \space{}
32773 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32777 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32785 in the citation dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
32789 \begin_inset space ~
32797 \begin_inset space ~
32803 Here is a simple example where the text
32804 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32808 \begin_inset space ~
32812 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32815 appears after the reference:
32818 \begin_layout Quote
32820 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32823 key "latexcompanion"
32831 \begin_layout Standard
32832 All styles except for
32836 also provide the feature to add text that precedes the reference (such
32838 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32842 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32846 This text is then also included in the parentheses, if the style requires
32850 \begin_layout Standard
32851 Note that these pre- and postnotes apply to the whole citation.
32852 So if you refer to multiple references at once, the prenote will precede
32853 the first citation in the list, the postnote will follow the last.
32858 styles allow to add pre- and postnotes to any individual reference in a
32859 multi-citation (so-called
32860 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32863 qualified citation lists
32864 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32870 If you use such a style and if the current reference includes multiple
32875 dialog will display three columns in the field
32882 \begin_inset space ~
32890 \begin_inset space ~
32898 \begin_inset space ~
32904 If you double-click on an item's
32907 \begin_inset space ~
32915 \begin_inset space ~
32920 field, you can add such individual pre- and postnotes.
32923 General text before
32929 fields you can add pre- and postnotes that apply to the whole list.
32932 \begin_layout Subsection
32934 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509964
32935 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32937 name "subsec:Opening-cited-documents"
32941 Opening cited documents from within \SpecialChar LyX
32945 \begin_layout Standard
32947 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509000
32949 supports opening documents selected citations point to via the
32952 \begin_inset space ~
32956 \begin_inset space ~
32960 \begin_inset space ~
32964 \begin_inset space ~
32967 Content\SpecialChar ldots
32970 context menu if specific conditions are met:
32973 \begin_layout Itemize
32975 \change_inserted -712698321 1598526971
32976 If citation entries include any of the fields
32977 \begin_inset Flex Code
32980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32982 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
32991 \begin_inset Flex Code
32994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32996 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
33004 for BibTeX and BibLaTeX,
33005 \begin_inset Flex Code
33008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33010 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
33018 for BibLaTeX (covering arXiv, JSTOR, PubMed, HDL, Google Books
33019 \begin_inset Flex Code
33022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33024 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
33032 ), the action will launch a web browser with the appropriate link.
33035 \begin_layout Itemize
33037 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509157
33038 If citation entries include any of the fields
33039 \begin_inset Flex Code
33042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33044 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
33052 (filled by JabRef) or
33053 \begin_inset Flex Code
33056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33058 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
33066 (filled by KBibTeX) containing an URL that points to a file on your local
33067 drive, the action will launch an appropriate file viewer.
33068 At the moment only absolute paths are accepted.
33071 \begin_layout Standard
33073 \change_inserted -712698321 1598526494
33074 In addition to that, \SpecialChar LyX
33075 also searches your disk for matching files if you
33078 Search drive for cited files
33082 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33083 Preferences\SpecialChar ldots
33084 \SpecialChar menuseparator
33085 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
33089 It uses the tokens supplied at
33093 in the same preferences section (by default: year and authors).
33094 Any of the tokens in the pattern must occur in the title of the file (at
33095 arbitrary position).
33097 opens the first matching file it finds.
33098 This might or might not be the file you are looking for; the more systematic
33099 your file naming is, and the less ambiguous keywords you use, the greater
33100 the chance this works for you.
33105 \begin_layout Standard
33107 \change_inserted -712698321 1598527586
33108 The pattern syntax uses specific keywords.
33109 These are basically Bib\SpecialChar TeX
33111 \begin_inset Flex Code
33114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33116 \change_inserted -712698321 1598527586
33125 \begin_inset Flex Code
33128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33130 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509565
33138 , but there are also special keys, which are documented in the Customization
33142 Cite format description
33149 \begin_layout Section
33151 \begin_inset Index idx
33154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33161 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33170 \begin_layout Standard
33171 An index entry is created if you use the menu
33173 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33175 \begin_inset space ~
33180 or the toolbar button
33187 A box is inserted containing the text that appears in the index.
33188 The word where the cursor is in or the currently highlighted text is proposed
33189 by \SpecialChar LyX
33190 as the index entry.
33193 \begin_layout Standard
33194 The index list is inserted in the document with the menu
33196 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33197 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
33199 \begin_inset space ~
33205 A light blue box labeled
33206 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33214 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33217 will show the place where the index is printed in the output.
33218 The index list box is not clickable like other \SpecialChar LyX
33222 \begin_layout Standard
33223 We give a short overview of the index commands in the next subsections.
33224 For a detailed description of \SpecialChar LaTeX
33225 's index mechanism, have a look at one of
33226 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33228 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33230 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
33238 \begin_layout Subsection
33239 Grouping Index Entries
33240 \begin_inset Index idx
33243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33252 \begin_layout Standard
33253 Index entries are often grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the
33255 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated
33256 lists under the entry
33257 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33261 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33265 First we create the entry
33266 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33270 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33274 \begin_inset space ~
33278 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33280 reference "subsec:Lists"
33285 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
33286 \begin_inset space ~
33290 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33292 reference "sec:Itemize"
33296 , we insert the command
33299 \begin_layout Standard
33305 \begin_layout Standard
33309 \begin_layout Standard
33315 \begin_layout Standard
33316 for the enumerated list in section
33317 \begin_inset space ~
33321 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33323 reference "sec:Enumerate"
33330 \begin_layout Standard
33331 The exclamation mark
33332 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33336 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33339 marks the grouping levels.
33340 You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more.
33341 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
33342 If we don't have an index entry for
33343 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33347 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33350 , it will be printed anyway, but without a page number.
33353 \begin_layout Subsection
33355 \begin_inset Index idx
33358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33359 Index ! Page ranges
33367 \begin_layout Standard
33368 Normally an index entry will appear with the page number of the indexed
33370 But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry.
33371 For example, if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create
33372 an index entry in section
33373 \begin_inset space ~
33377 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33379 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
33386 \begin_layout Standard
33389 Paragraph environments|(
33392 \begin_layout Standard
33393 and another entry at the end of section
33394 \begin_inset space ~
33398 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33400 reference "subsec:LyX-Code"
33407 \begin_layout Standard
33410 Paragraph environments|)
33413 \begin_layout Standard
33415 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33423 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33427 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33435 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33438 respectively start and end the index range.
33439 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
33440 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of
33441 the pages of the indexed document parts.
33442 An example is the index entry
33443 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33446 Document ! Settings
33447 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33453 \begin_layout Subsection
33455 \begin_inset Index idx
33458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33459 Index ! Cross referencing
33467 \begin_layout Standard
33468 It is also possible to refer to another index entry.
33469 We referred for example in the index entry
33470 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33474 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33478 \begin_inset space ~
33482 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33484 reference "subsec:Image-Formats"
33488 ) to the index entry
33489 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33493 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33496 in the same section using the entry
33499 \begin_layout Standard
33502 GIF|see{Image formats}
33505 \begin_layout Standard
33506 where the braces have to be inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
33508 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
33509 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
33512 \begin_layout Subsection
33514 \begin_inset Index idx
33517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33518 Index ! Entry order
33526 \begin_layout Standard
33527 If you use accented characters in the index entry the entries might not
33528 follow the rules for the index order.
33529 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but \SpecialChar LaTeX
33534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33535 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see
33537 \begin_inset space ~
33541 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33543 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
33552 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
33553 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
33554 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33558 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33562 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33566 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33570 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33574 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33578 \begin_inset Index idx
33581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33582 Dummy entries ! maïs
33588 \begin_inset Index idx
33591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33592 Dummy entries ! maître
33598 \begin_inset Index idx
33601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33602 Dummy entries ! maïs@maison
33607 They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison but we want the order
33608 maïs, maison, maître.
33609 To achieve this, we use the command
33612 \begin_layout Standard
33615 previous entry@current entry
33618 \begin_layout Standard
33619 In our case we want to have
33620 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33624 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33628 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33632 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33635 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
33638 \begin_layout Standard
33644 \begin_layout Standard
33645 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
33646 You can also use another word to tell \SpecialChar LaTeX
33648 See the next subsection for an example.
33651 \begin_layout Subsection
33653 \begin_inset Index idx
33656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33657 Index ! Entry layout
33665 \begin_layout Standard
33666 You can change the appearance of index entries via the text style dialog.
33667 \begin_inset Index idx
33670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33673 This is an italic dummy entry
33678 You can also format the page number using the character
33679 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33683 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33686 followed by a \SpecialChar LaTeX
33687 -command without a backslash.
33688 We can write for example
33691 \begin_layout Standard
33694 italic page number:|textit
33697 \begin_layout Standard
33698 to get the page number in italic.
33699 \begin_inset Index idx
33702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33703 Dummy entries ! italic page number:|textit
33708 Normally all \SpecialChar LaTeX
33709 -commands begin with a backslash, but in this special case
33711 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33719 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33727 \begin_inset space ~
33733 Have a look at section
33734 \begin_inset space ~
33738 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33740 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
33744 to learn more about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33748 \begin_layout Standard
33749 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
33752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33757 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
33761 to generate the index, see section
33762 \begin_inset space ~
33766 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33768 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
33777 , this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
33782 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used, see
33783 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33786 key "latexcompanion"
33799 \begin_layout Standard
33800 In general, we encourage you to not format page numbers directly as shown
33802 Instead, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
33803 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to a definition of
33804 the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions.
33805 If so, put the following in the preamble
33808 \begin_layout Standard
33820 \begin_layout Standard
33824 \begin_layout Standard
33830 \begin_layout Standard
33831 in the index entry.
33832 \begin_inset Index idx
33835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33836 Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef
33841 The advantage is that, if you change your mind later or if your publisher
33842 insists that definitions must not be italic but bold, you just need to
33843 change the macro in the preamble, not every single index entry.
33846 \begin_layout Standard
33847 You can also change the layout for the whole index.
33848 For example, we marked the index list box of this document as bold to get
33849 a bold font for all index entries.
33850 For more advanced tasks you have to set up a so-called
33862 documentation for details,
33863 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33865 key "makeindex,xindy"
33873 \begin_layout Subsection
33875 \begin_inset Index idx
33878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33885 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33887 name "subsec:Index-Program"
33894 \begin_layout Standard
33895 If the index generation program
33899 is installed, \SpecialChar LyX
33900 uses it for index generation; otherwise the program
33904 , the program that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
33905 distribution, is used.
33909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33914 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
33915 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
33916 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
33917 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
33918 However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider
33928 Both programs can be controlled by options that can be set in \SpecialChar LyX
33930 dialog, see section
33931 \begin_inset space ~
33935 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33937 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
33942 The available options are listed and explained in
33943 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33945 key "makeindex-man,xindy"
33951 In this dialog, you can also specify an alternative program to generate
33955 \begin_layout Standard
33956 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a
33957 given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar breakableslash
33960 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33961 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33965 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options
33966 to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
33969 \begin_layout Subsection
33973 \begin_layout Standard
33974 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
33975 For instance, you might need to set up a separate
33976 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33980 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33983 next to the standard index.
33985 does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are packages
33986 that add this feature.
33993 \begin_inset Index idx
33996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33998 packages ! splitidx
34003 package to generate multiple indexes.
34004 The package is included in all recent \SpecialChar LaTeX
34009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34010 If yours does not ship it, consult the \SpecialChar TeX
34012 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34020 Note that the package does not only consist of a \SpecialChar LaTeX
34021 style, but it also includes
34022 specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
34023 Please consult the package's manual for details.
34031 \begin_layout Standard
34032 To set up \SpecialChar LyX
34033 for the use of multiple indexes, go to
34035 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34036 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
34039 and select the option
34041 Use multiple Indexes
34048 already contains the standard index
34049 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34053 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34057 To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should
34058 also appear as a heading) to the
34062 input field and press the
34067 The new index now also appears in the list.
34068 If you like, you can attribute an alternative \SpecialChar LyX
34069 label color to the new index.
34072 \begin_layout Standard
34073 Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index
34076 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34077 List/Contents/References
34083 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
34084 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there
34085 are additional features:
34088 \begin_layout Itemize
34089 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking
34090 on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
34093 \begin_layout Itemize
34094 By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type.
34095 Furthermore, you can specify an index to be a
34100 If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
34101 For example, if you use a book class, where the standard index heading
34102 is defined as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can
34103 thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
34106 \begin_layout Itemize
34111 allows to use \SpecialChar TeX
34112 code in the name of the index.
34115 \begin_layout Section
34116 Nomenclature/Glossary
34117 \begin_inset Index idx
34120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34127 \begin_inset Index idx
34130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34159 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34161 name "sec:Nomenclature"
34168 \begin_layout Standard
34169 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that
34170 are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so
34171 called nomenclature or glossary.
34174 \begin_layout Standard
34175 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34182 \begin_inset Index idx
34185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34193 You find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
34195 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34202 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
34206 \begin_layout Standard
34207 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry
34208 and then use the menu
34210 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34216 \begin_inset space ~
34221 or the toolbar button
34224 arg "nomencl-insert"
34229 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34237 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34240 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
34243 \begin_layout Standard
34244 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
34245 The first is the term or
34249 that you wish to define.
34254 of the term or symbol.
34257 \begin_layout Standard
34258 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34266 To use \SpecialChar TeX
34267 code for nomenclature entries the option
34271 in the nomenclature dialog has to be used.
34279 \begin_layout Subsection
34280 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
34281 \begin_inset Index idx
34284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34285 Nomenclature ! Layout
34293 \begin_layout Standard
34294 If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the
34298 field as \SpecialChar LaTeX
34301 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34305 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
34309 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34313 \begin_inset Newline newline
34321 \begin_inset Newline newline
34327 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34331 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34334 character starts/ends the formula.
34335 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
34336 -command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning with
34338 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34344 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34348 For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter,
34358 \begin_layout Standard
34359 (A short introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34360 syntax is given in section
34361 \begin_inset space ~
34365 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34367 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
34374 \begin_layout Standard
34378 \begin_inset space ~
34383 dialog to format the description text; you have to use \SpecialChar LaTeX
34385 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
34386 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34390 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
34394 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34397 in this document is:
34398 \begin_inset Newline newline
34403 dummy entry for the character
34408 \begin_inset Newline newline
34420 \begin_inset space ~
34430 font use the command
34459 \begin_layout Standard
34460 To customize the appearance of all symbols add e.
34461 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34465 \begin_inset space \space{}
34469 \begin_inset Newline newline
34485 \begin_inset Newline newline
34488 to the LaTeX preamble in the document settings.
34489 This command will make the font of all symbols
34496 \begin_inset space ~
34504 \begin_layout Standard
34505 If the characters |
34506 \begin_inset space \space{}
34510 \begin_inset space \space{}
34514 \begin_inset space \space{}
34518 \begin_inset space \space{}
34522 \begin_inset space \space{}
34525 should appear in nomenclature entries containing \SpecialChar TeX
34526 code they need to be escaped
34528 \change_deleted -712698321 1610611122
34530 \change_inserted -712698321 1610611123
34533 character in front of them.
34534 \change_inserted -712698321 1610611807
34536 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
34537 LatexCommand nomenclature
34538 symbol "%@, %|, %!, %\""
34539 description "The quote sign in TeX code is output by writing ' %\"{}%\"{} '."
34545 \change_deleted -712698321 1610611114
34547 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
34548 LatexCommand nomenclature
34549 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
34550 description "The quote sign in TeX code is output by writing ' \"\" '."
34560 \begin_layout Subsection
34561 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
34562 \begin_inset Index idx
34565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34566 Nomenclature ! Sort order
34574 \begin_layout Standard
34575 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34576 -code of the symbol
34578 This leads to undesired results when you, for example, have symbols in
34580 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
34583 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
34584 LatexCommand nomenclature
34586 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
34594 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
34598 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
34599 LatexCommand nomenclature
34602 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
34608 They will be sorted by
34609 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34617 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34621 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34631 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34635 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
34638 will be sorted before the
34642 since the character
34643 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34647 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34650 is considered in sorting.
34653 \begin_layout Standard
34654 To control the sort order, you can edit the
34657 \begin_inset space ~
34662 field of the nomenclature dialog.
34663 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol
34665 For the example given, you can insert
34669 in this field for the
34670 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
34677 will be located before
34678 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
34684 \begin_layout Standard
34685 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
34690 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34700 \begin_layout Subsection
34701 Nomenclature Options
34702 \begin_inset Index idx
34705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34706 Nomenclature ! Options
34712 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34714 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Options"
34721 \begin_layout Standard
34726 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
34727 Here are some of its options; for more have a look at its documentation:
34730 \begin_layout Description
34731 refeq Appends the phrase
34732 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34744 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34747 to every nomenclature entry, where
34753 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
34756 \begin_layout Description
34757 refpage Appends the phrase
34758 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34770 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34773 to every nomenclature entry, where
34779 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
34782 \begin_layout Description
34783 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
34786 \begin_layout Standard
34787 To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document
34788 class options list in the
34790 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34794 In this document the options
34801 \begin_layout Standard
34802 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
34808 \begin_layout Standard
34809 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature
34810 entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
34815 field in the nomenclature dialog:
34818 \begin_layout Description
34828 \begin_layout Description
34831 nomrefpage Like the
34838 \begin_layout Description
34841 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
34850 \begin_layout Description
34854 \begin_inset space ~
34860 \begin_inset space ~
34865 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
34868 \begin_layout Standard
34870 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34874 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34877 are automatically translated for most document languages.
34878 If not, add these lines in front of the nomenclature list as \SpecialChar TeX
34882 \begin_layout Standard
34891 \begin_inset Newline newline
34897 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
34900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34901 \begin_inset space ~
34913 unskip, see equation
34916 \begin_inset Newline newline
34923 pagedeclaration}[1]{
34924 \begin_inset Newline newline
34930 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
34933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34934 \begin_inset space ~
34951 \begin_layout Standard
34952 If the numbers should be hyperlinks, assure that you use
34955 \begin_inset space ~
34960 in the document settings under
34963 \begin_inset space ~
34971 \begin_layout Standard
34979 \begin_inset Newline newline
34983 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
34986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34987 \begin_inset space ~
34999 hyperlink{equation.#1}{equation
35001 nobreakspace{}(#1)}}
35002 \begin_inset Newline newline
35009 pagedeclaration}[1]{
35010 \begin_inset Newline newline
35014 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
35017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35018 \begin_inset space ~
35030 hyperlink{page.#1}{page
35035 \begin_layout Subsection
35036 Printing the Nomenclature
35037 \begin_inset Index idx
35040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35041 Nomenclature ! Printing
35049 \begin_layout Standard
35050 To print the nomenclature, use the menu
35052 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
35053 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
35058 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35066 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35069 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
35070 By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
35071 You can choose between these settings:
35074 \begin_layout Description
35075 Default a space of 1
35076 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35082 \begin_layout Description
35084 \begin_inset space ~
35088 \begin_inset space ~
35091 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
35094 \begin_layout Description
35095 Custom custom space
35098 \begin_layout Standard
35099 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
35100 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35104 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35108 If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the
35116 For example, in order to change the name to
35120 , add the following line to the preamble:
35123 \begin_layout Standard
35136 nomname{List of Symbols}}}
35139 \begin_layout Standard
35140 When you are using another document language than English, replace
35141 \begin_inset Newline newline
35156 , where *** is the name of the language used.
35159 \begin_layout Subsection
35160 Nomenclature Program
35161 \begin_inset Index idx
35164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35165 Nomenclature ! Program
35171 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35173 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
35180 \begin_layout Standard
35186 , that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
35187 distribution, to generate the nomenclature.
35189 's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
35194 by adding options, see section
35195 \begin_inset space ~
35199 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35201 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
35206 The available options are listed and explained in
35207 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35209 key "nomencl,makeindex"
35217 \begin_layout Section
35219 \begin_inset Index idx
35222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35229 \begin_inset Index idx
35232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35233 Document ! Branches
35239 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35241 name "sec:Branches"
35248 \begin_layout Standard
35249 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
35250 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the
35251 pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same
35252 document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
35255 \begin_layout Standard
35256 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
35257 allows you to put text into branches.
35258 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
35259 To create a branch, either select the menu
35261 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
35262 Branch\SpecialChar menuseparator
35265 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
35267 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35274 , where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation
35275 state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
35276 its background color inside \SpecialChar LyX
35277 and whether the name of the branch should
35278 be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active
35279 (see below for an example).
35280 Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch
35281 to the name of the other) and to add
35282 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35286 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35290 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35294 \begin_inset space ~
35297 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents
35298 , without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
35301 \begin_layout Standard
35302 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
35303 These boxes are inserted via the menu
35305 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
35308 where you can choose a branch.
35309 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking
35313 \begin_layout Standard
35314 Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch
35315 is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
35318 \begin_layout Standard
35319 \begin_inset Branch Question
35323 \begin_layout Standard
35328 Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
35336 \begin_layout Standard
35337 \begin_inset Branch Answer
35341 \begin_layout Standard
35346 Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
35354 \begin_layout Standard
35361 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35362 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35365 , the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
35366 Consider for example a file
35367 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35371 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35374 which has the above branches.
35376 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35380 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35383 is active, the PDF export file would be called
35384 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35388 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35392 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35396 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35400 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35404 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35407 branch were inactive,
35408 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35412 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35416 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35420 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35423 branch was active, likewise
35424 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35428 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35432 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35436 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35439 branch was active, and
35440 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35443 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
35444 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35447 if both branches were active.
35448 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
35449 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
35455 \begin_layout Standard
35456 There are also inverted branch insets, whose content is output just in case
35462 This make it easy to add alternative text for different versions of a document.
35463 To control whether a particular inset is inverted, right-click on the inset
35467 \begin_inset space ~
35475 \begin_layout Standard
35476 \begin_inset Branch Answer
35480 \begin_layout Standard
35486 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35490 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35493 branch is deactivated.
35499 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
35505 \begin_layout Standard
35506 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
35507 like inside equations, you can code special \SpecialChar LaTeX
35508 definitions for each branch.
35509 For example you can define for the question branch
35513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35514 For an introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35515 -syntax, see section
35516 \begin_inset space ~
35520 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35522 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
35534 \begin_layout Standard
35544 \begin_layout Standard
35554 \begin_layout Standard
35555 and for the answer branch
35558 \begin_layout Standard
35568 \begin_layout Standard
35578 \begin_layout Standard
35579 \begin_inset Branch Question
35583 \begin_layout Standard
35587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35615 \begin_layout Standard
35616 \begin_inset Branch Answer
35620 \begin_layout Standard
35624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35652 \begin_layout Standard
35653 Now it is possible to use the
35657 question{\SpecialChar ldots
35664 answer{\SpecialChar ldots
35667 commands to obtain conditional output.
35668 Here is an example formula where only the
35675 \begin_inset Formula
35677 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
35685 \begin_layout Standard
35686 Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the
35694 \begin_layout Standard
35695 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout
35697 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35701 \begin_inset space \space{}
35704 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own \SpecialChar LaTeX
35706 For this advanced usage, see the
35712 Flex insets and InsetLayout
35717 \begin_layout Section
35719 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35721 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
35726 \begin_inset Index idx
35729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35738 \begin_layout Standard
35741 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35742 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35745 dialog allows you to set up special options for the PDF output of your
35747 All these options are provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35753 \begin_inset Index idx
35756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35758 packages ! hyperref
35763 which will link all cross-references in the DVI- and PDF-output.
35764 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
35765 table of contents entry or on a reference to move to the cross-referenced
35766 part of the document.
35769 \begin_layout Standard
35770 The header information in the dialog tab
35774 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
35775 Many programs are able to extract this information, for example, automatically
35776 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
35777 This is very useful to sort, classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
35781 \begin_inset space ~
35785 \begin_inset space ~
35790 is set, \SpecialChar LyX
35791 tries to extract the header information from your document title
35792 and author entries.
35796 \begin_inset space ~
35800 \begin_inset space ~
35804 \begin_inset space ~
35809 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations.
35812 \begin_layout Standard
35813 You can specify in the dialog tab
35817 how the links will look and if links for bibliographical backreferences
35822 \begin_inset space ~
35826 \begin_inset space ~
35830 \begin_inset space ~
35835 option allows long links to be split;
35838 \begin_inset space ~
35842 \begin_inset space ~
35846 \begin_inset space ~
35854 \begin_inset space ~
35859 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
35862 \begin_inset space ~
35867 colors the different links.
35868 The default colors are:
35871 \begin_layout Labeling
35872 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
35877 for hyperlinks and URLs
35880 \begin_layout Labeling
35881 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
35889 \begin_layout Labeling
35890 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
35898 \begin_layout Standard
35899 but you can change these in the field
35904 For example, in this document they were changed with the additional options:
35907 \begin_layout Standard
35910 linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue
35913 \begin_layout Standard
35918 is set, the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different
35919 entries, showing, depending on the option selected, the number of the section,
35920 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
35923 \begin_layout Standard
35928 you can specify if PDF-bookmarks should be created for every section of
35929 your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
35930 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections
35940 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks
35941 when opening the PDF.
35943 \begin_inset space ~
35946 2 will display all sections and subsections, while level
35947 \begin_inset space ~
35950 1 will only display the sections.
35953 \begin_layout Standard
35954 PDF properties are also used in this document.
35955 When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional
35961 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
35962 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35972 \begin_layout Section
35974 Code and the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35976 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35978 name "sec:TeX-Code"
35985 \begin_layout Subsection
35988 \begin_inset Index idx
35991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35999 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36001 name "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
36008 \begin_layout Standard
36009 As \SpecialChar LyX
36010 uses \SpecialChar LaTeX
36011 in the background, it supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
36012 commands and constructs,
36015 contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
36016 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
36017 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there
36018 is a \SpecialChar LaTeX
36019 -package for every problem, though \SpecialChar LyX
36020 cannot support all packages and
36024 \begin_layout Standard
36025 But don't worry, you can use any \SpecialChar LaTeX
36026 -command directly in \SpecialChar LyX
36027 inside the \SpecialChar TeX
36031 Code box is created by the menu
36033 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
36035 \begin_inset space ~
36040 or by the toolbar button
36053 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on
36061 \begin_layout Standard
36062 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as \SpecialChar TeX
36064 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard \SpecialChar LyX
36066 For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word
36070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36071 The LyX way would be to use a framed box.
36076 and are therefore using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36083 , you can write the command part
36089 in a \SpecialChar TeX
36090 Code box before the word and the closing brace
36094 in a second \SpecialChar TeX
36095 Code box behind the word.
36096 The word between the two \SpecialChar TeX
36097 Code boxes is then the argument as it is in the
36101 \begin_layout Standard
36102 \begin_inset Graphics
36103 filename clipart/ERT.png
36111 \begin_layout Standard
36115 \begin_layout Standard
36116 This is a line with a
36120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36143 \begin_layout Standard
36144 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
36147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36152 At the end of \SpecialChar LaTeX
36153 -commands without parameters, you have to insert a space
36154 to let \SpecialChar LaTeX
36155 know that the command is finished.
36163 \begin_layout Subsection
36164 A Short Introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36166 \begin_inset Argument 1
36169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36170 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
36177 \begin_inset Index idx
36180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36188 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36190 name "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
36197 \begin_layout Standard
36198 When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something
36199 about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36200 -commands that \SpecialChar LyX
36201 uses in the background.
36202 Because \SpecialChar LaTeX
36203 is based on commands, you can
36204 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36208 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36212 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at
36213 any time if you know the right commands.
36214 For example, imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline
36215 is the end of the day.
36216 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have
36217 all caption labels bold.
36218 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels
36220 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one
36224 \begin_layout Standard
36225 Now \SpecialChar LaTeX
36227 As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a \SpecialChar LaTeX
36229 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36232 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36242 \begin_layout Standard
36243 As result you find that the package
36248 \begin_inset Index idx
36251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36259 To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
36261 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36264 \SpecialChar menuseparator
36268 \begin_inset space ~
36276 \begin_layout Standard
36281 usepackage[options]{package name}
36284 \begin_layout Standard
36285 All \SpecialChar LaTeX
36286 commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within
36287 two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
36288 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
36291 \begin_layout Standard
36292 In your case the package name is
36297 After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option
36302 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
36303 So you add the command
36306 \begin_layout Standard
36311 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
36314 \begin_layout Standard
36315 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
36319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36320 For more commands provided by the
36324 package, have a look at its documentation,
36325 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36340 \begin_layout Standard
36341 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems
36343 For example if you use a
36347 class, you don't need the package
36351 , you can instead write
36354 \begin_layout Standard
36359 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
36364 \begin_layout Standard
36365 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
36366 So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the
36367 documentation of the document class you want to use.
36374 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
36377 \begin_layout Standard
36378 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the
36379 text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command
36381 To insert a \SpecialChar LaTeX
36382 -command in text, use the \SpecialChar TeX
36383 Code box as described in the previous
36387 \begin_layout Standard
36388 If you want to learn more about \SpecialChar LaTeX
36389 and its syntax, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36392 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36394 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
36402 \begin_layout Standard
36403 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
36409 \begin_layout Standard
36413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36423 \begin_inset Note Note
36426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36427 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
36435 \begin_layout Left Header
36436 \begin_inset Argument 1
36439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36459 \begin_inset Note Note
36462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36463 defines the header line as described below
36471 \begin_layout Center Header
36472 \begin_inset Argument 1
36475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36484 \begin_layout Right Header
36485 \begin_inset Argument 1
36488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36509 \begin_layout Left Footer
36510 \begin_inset Argument 1
36513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36534 \begin_layout Center Footer
36535 \begin_inset Argument 1
36538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36550 \begin_inset Newline newline
36554 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
36560 \begin_layout Right Footer
36561 \begin_inset Argument 1
36564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36586 \begin_layout Section
36587 Customized Page Headers and Footers
36588 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36590 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
36595 \begin_inset Index idx
36598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36599 Document ! Header/Footer line
36605 \begin_inset Index idx
36608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36617 \begin_layout Standard
36618 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document, you need
36622 \begin_inset space ~
36633 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36639 \begin_inset space ~
36645 As a second step add in the menu
36647 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36648 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
36652 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36657 Custom Header/Footerlines
36660 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36664 This module offers the following 6
36665 \begin_inset space ~
36671 \begin_layout Description
36673 \begin_inset space ~
36677 \begin_inset space ~
36681 \begin_inset space ~
36685 \begin_inset space ~
36689 \begin_inset space ~
36695 \begin_layout Description
36697 \begin_inset space ~
36701 \begin_inset space ~
36705 \begin_inset space ~
36709 \begin_inset space ~
36713 \begin_inset space ~
36719 \begin_layout Standard
36720 for the different positions in the header/footer.
36721 These environments can be selected in the environment pull-down box.
36724 \begin_layout Standard
36725 Normally, headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
36726 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
36728 \begin_inset space ~
36732 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36734 reference "fig:Page-layout"
36738 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
36741 \begin_layout Standard
36742 \begin_inset Float figure
36749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36752 \begin_inset Tabular
36753 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
36754 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
36755 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
36756 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
36757 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
36759 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36768 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
36771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36777 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
36780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36788 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36797 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36806 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
36809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36817 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
36820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36821 The normal text on the page goes here.
36822 The running header is above the text, and the footer is below (including
36824 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of
36825 the chapter, company logo but you can use almost anything, except of floats.
36830 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36839 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
36842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36850 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36859 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36868 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
36871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36879 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36888 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
36891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36897 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
36900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36915 \begin_inset Caption Standard
36917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36918 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36920 name "fig:Page-layout"
36924 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
36937 \begin_layout Standard
36938 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
36941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36946 : some document classes implement their own customized page headers and
36950 \begin_inset space ~
36955 is set to “Default”.
36956 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers
36965 \begin_layout Subsection
36969 \begin_layout Standard
36970 To define your header line, add all three header environments.
36971 The things you add to each environment appear on odd numbered pages, the
36972 things in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
36973 For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and
36975 If you leave a header environment or its argument empty, nothing appears
36977 Defining the footer line works similarly.
36980 \begin_layout Standard
36981 For the definition, you will need some \SpecialChar LaTeX
36982 -commands that are inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
36986 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
36988 \begin_inset space ~
36996 \begin_layout Description
36999 thepage prints the current page number
37002 \begin_layout Description
37005 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
37008 \begin_layout Description
37011 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
37014 \begin_layout Description
37017 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
37018 If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and
37021 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37025 \begin_inset Quotes prd
37028 because it usually goes in a left header.
37031 \begin_layout Description
37034 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
37035 If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and
37037 It is normally used in the right header.
37040 \begin_layout Subsection
37041 Default header/footer
37044 \begin_layout Standard
37045 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
37046 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center
37047 footer has the page number.
37048 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the
37049 relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank.
37050 So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank
37053 \begin_inset space ~
37061 \begin_layout Subsection
37065 \begin_layout Standard
37066 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
37067 Some pages are different.
37068 The title page has a header/footer environment of its own, and so does
37069 any page that starts a new part or chapter in your book.
37070 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal.
37071 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on
37072 the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
37075 \begin_layout Subsubsection
37076 Header and footer decoration line
37079 \begin_layout Standard
37080 By default, you get a 0.4
37081 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37084 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
37085 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
37097 in the following way:
37100 \begin_layout Standard
37107 headrulewidth}{thickness}
37110 \begin_layout Standard
37111 where thickness is a size in standard units like
37124 If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0
37125 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37131 \begin_layout Standard
37132 The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of \SpecialChar LaTeX
37134 If you really need this, have a look at the Internet or in section
37135 \begin_inset space ~
37139 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
37149 \begin_layout Subsubsection
37150 Several header/footer lines
37153 \begin_layout Standard
37154 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can do
37155 this by adding a ragged line break in the style definition.
37156 However, the default height of the header/footer is only the height of
37158 To expand the height, redefine the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37173 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37174 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37176 \begin_inset space ~
37184 \begin_layout Standard
37191 headheight}{height}
37194 \begin_layout Standard
37199 is a size in standard units (e.
37200 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37204 \begin_inset space \space{}
37212 If you don't know how much space is needed for the height, define your
37213 header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
37214 Then open the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37215 logfile with the menu
37217 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37219 \begin_inset space ~
37227 \begin_inset space ~
37232 to see if you can find a warning about the package
37237 \begin_inset Index idx
37240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37242 packages ! fancyhdr
37248 If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least
37249 for your header/footer.
37252 \begin_layout Subsection
37256 \begin_layout Standard
37257 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
37258 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
37259 This example consists of the following definition:
37262 \begin_layout Description
37264 \begin_inset space ~
37273 , empty optional argument
37276 \begin_layout Description
37278 \begin_inset space ~
37281 Header empty, empty optional argument
37284 \begin_layout Description
37286 \begin_inset space ~
37295 in the optional argument
37298 \begin_layout Description
37300 \begin_inset space ~
37309 in the optional argument
37312 \begin_layout Description
37314 \begin_inset space ~
37327 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37331 \begin_inset Newline newline
37335 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
37339 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37342 in the optional argument
37345 \begin_layout Description
37347 \begin_inset space ~
37356 , empty optional argument
37359 \begin_layout Description
37362 headrulewidth set to 2
37363 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37369 \begin_layout Standard
37370 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except floats.
37371 For more specialized features, for example, thumb-indexes, see the manual
37377 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
37387 \begin_layout Standard
37388 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
37394 \begin_layout Standard
37398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37402 pagestyle{headings}
37408 \begin_inset Note Note
37411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37412 switches back to page style with the default headings
37420 \begin_layout Section
37421 Previewing Snippets of your Document
37422 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37424 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
37429 \begin_inset Index idx
37432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37439 \begin_inset Index idx
37442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37451 \begin_layout Standard
37453 allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the fly
37454 so you can see how they will look in the final document without having
37455 to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
37458 \begin_layout Subsection
37462 \begin_layout Standard
37463 To get previews working, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37469 \begin_inset Index idx
37472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37474 packages ! preview-latex
37479 (on some systems named simply
37484 If it is not already installed, you will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
37486 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
37493 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
37495 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
37503 package; for \SpecialChar LyX
37504 on Windows this program and also the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37505 -package are automatically
37506 installed together with \SpecialChar LyX
37510 \begin_layout Subsection
37514 \begin_layout Standard
37515 If you would for example like to see in \SpecialChar LyX
37516 your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
37518 activate the option
37521 \begin_inset space ~
37528 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37534 \begin_inset space ~
37538 \begin_inset space ~
37541 feel\SpecialChar menuseparator
37548 \begin_inset space ~
37561 \begin_inset space ~
37566 is the multiplication factor for the size.
37569 \begin_layout Standard
37570 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
37575 \begin_inset space ~
37583 \begin_inset space ~
37591 \begin_layout Standard
37592 Previews are generated when you load a document into \SpecialChar LyX
37593 and when you finish
37597 \begin_layout Standard
37598 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
37601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37606 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately
37607 generated by activating the option
37610 \begin_inset space ~
37616 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
37624 \begin_layout Subsection
37625 Selected document parts
37628 \begin_layout Standard
37629 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
37630 for example things that \SpecialChar LyX
37631 cannot render like rotated parts or things that
37632 are not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
37634 To do this, insert a preview inset via the menu
37636 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
37640 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
37641 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
37642 If you click on the preview, you can edit the previewed stuff.
37645 \begin_layout Standard
37646 An example: To create rotated boxes, you use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37653 which is not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
37658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37665 is explained in section
37667 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
37672 \begin_inset space ~
37682 Instead of the \SpecialChar TeX
37683 Code boxes you want to see in \SpecialChar LyX
37684 the final rotated boxes,
37685 for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding text.
37686 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated
37688 Here is the result:
37691 \begin_layout Standard
37692 \begin_inset Preview
37694 \begin_layout Standard
37699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37703 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
37709 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
37719 height_special "totalheight"
37724 backgroundcolor "none"
37727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37752 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
37758 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
37765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37780 \begin_layout Standard
37781 Previewing works also for colors.
37782 In this example a special framed, colored box was created using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37801 is explained in section
37808 \begin_inset space ~
37821 \begin_layout Standard
37822 \begin_inset Preview
37824 \begin_layout Standard
37828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37847 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
37852 This is text within a colored, framed box.
37856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37871 \begin_layout Standard
37872 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
37878 \begin_layout Standard
37879 If \SpecialChar LyX
37880 does not show a preview, make sure that you enabled previews as described
37881 above and also make sure that \SpecialChar TeX
37882 Code in the preview inset is valid and that
37883 you loaded the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37884 packages in your document preamble that are required by
37885 the \SpecialChar TeX
37887 If \SpecialChar LyX
37888 cannot create a preview, you will in most cases also not be able to
37889 view your document due to \SpecialChar LaTeX
37891 So if you have to use some \SpecialChar TeX
37892 Code and don't know if it is correct, the preview
37893 inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the whole document.
37896 \begin_layout Subsection
37901 \begin_layout Standard
37902 You can preview the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37903 source of the whole document or parts of it.
37906 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
37908 \begin_inset space ~
37913 and a window will be shown where you can see the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37915 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor
37917 You can also select document parts in \SpecialChar LyX
37918 's main window, then only this selection
37919 (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
37920 To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in
37921 the source view window.
37926 , you can see the changes as you make them in \SpecialChar LyX
37927 ; but note that if you have
37928 several documents open, this will slow things down as \SpecialChar LyX
37930 not just the one which is open at the time.
37933 \begin_layout Section
37934 Advanced Find and Replace
37935 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37937 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
37942 \begin_inset Index idx
37945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37952 \begin_inset Index idx
37955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37964 \begin_layout Subsection
37968 \begin_layout Standard
37969 The advanced find and replace feature of \SpecialChar LyX
37970 allows for searching of complex,
37971 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within \SpecialChar LyX
37973 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
37974 The key-features are:
37977 \begin_layout Itemize
37978 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the
37979 latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire
37980 mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex
37984 \begin_layout Itemize
37985 Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in
37986 any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics
37987 ), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with
37988 a section heading will only be found within section headings
37991 \begin_layout Itemize
37992 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only; this is useful
37993 for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text
37994 outside of mathematics environments
37997 \begin_layout Itemize
37998 Search may be widened to a specific
38003 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38007 \begin_inset space ~
38010 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
38011 all the open files, or all the manuals available from the
38018 \begin_layout Itemize
38019 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text
38020 capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
38021 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38025 \begin_inset space ~
38028 all lowercase, all uppercase, first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
38031 \begin_layout Subsection
38035 \begin_layout Standard
38036 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
38038 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38051 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
38054 ) or the toolbar button
38057 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
38063 Advanced Find and Replace
38068 \begin_layout Subsubsection
38072 \begin_layout Standard
38078 mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking
38082 \begin_inset space ~
38087 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
38090 arg "paragraph-break"
38094 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized
38095 , bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text.
38099 arg "paragraph-break"
38102 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
38106 searches backwards.
38109 \begin_layout Standard
38113 \begin_inset space ~
38118 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
38127 \begin_inset space ~
38132 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
38135 \begin_layout Subsubsection
38136 Searching for mathematics
38139 \begin_layout Standard
38140 Mathematical formulas, such as
38141 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
38144 or something more complex like
38145 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
38148 , may be searched for by typing them in the
38153 When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when
38154 it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
38155 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
38156 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}$
38162 \begin_layout Subsubsection
38166 \begin_layout Standard
38167 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
38168 This is done by switching to the
38172 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
38177 This way, entering in the
38184 \begin_layout Itemize
38185 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word
38186 occurring in emphasized or boldface.
38189 \begin_layout Itemize
38190 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective
38191 instances with the same face only, and within the same text style only.
38194 \begin_layout Itemize
38195 a normal word in a section heading, and searching for it, would find occurrences
38196 of it only within section headings.
38197 Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition
38198 to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same
38202 \begin_layout Itemize
38203 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also
38204 displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
38207 \begin_layout Subsubsection
38211 \begin_layout Standard
38212 The entries made in the
38216 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
38219 \begin_inset space ~
38225 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the
38229 button or alternatively press
38232 arg "paragraph-break"
38239 while the cursor is in the
38242 \begin_inset space ~
38250 \begin_layout Standard
38251 You can replace with fully-featured formatted \SpecialChar LyX
38253 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention
38257 \begin_layout Itemize
38258 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the
38259 same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like
38260 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38264 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38267 with its typewriter version
38268 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38276 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38282 \begin_layout Itemize
38283 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing
38285 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38289 \begin_inset Formula $R$
38293 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38297 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38301 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
38305 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38308 (you may want to enable the
38311 \begin_inset space ~
38319 \begin_inset space ~
38324 options and disable the
38332 tab, in order to avoid replacing all
38333 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38337 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38340 letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of
38341 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
38345 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\,j}$
38348 , or occurrences of
38349 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
38353 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
38359 \begin_layout Subsection
38363 \begin_layout Standard
38364 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
38368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38369 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
38371 \begin_inset CommandInset href
38373 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
38383 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into
38389 This is done with the context menu
38391 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38392 Insert Regular Expression
38394 while the cursor is in the
38399 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular
38400 expression matching rules
38404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38405 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed \SpecialChar LyX
38408 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38412 \begin_inset space ~
38415 when matching \SpecialChar LaTeX
38416 code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed to
38422 , while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the
38423 same text in the document.
38424 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
38425 Examples of using such a feature may be:
38428 \begin_layout Enumerate
38429 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering
38434 editor the fraction
38435 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
38439 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
38442 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all
38443 fractions with the given denominator.
38446 \begin_layout Enumerate
38447 Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after unchecking
38459 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
38464 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face, finds all
38465 emphasized or bold face text respectively.
38466 Also, by inserting a
38467 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
38470 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
38471 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
38474 \begin_layout Standard
38475 Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
38476 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
38477 \begin_inset Formula $()$
38480 , and referring back to them through
38481 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
38485 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
38489 For example, try searching with the regexp
38490 \begin_inset Newline newline
38493 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
38496 \begin_inset Newline newline
38499 in order to find word repetitions, if there are any.
38502 \begin_layout Standard
38503 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet) implemented.
38506 \begin_layout Standard
38507 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
38510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38515 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp, and when
38516 occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of back-referenced
38517 sub-expressions is absolute.
38519 \begin_inset space ~
38523 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
38526 always refers to the first occurrence of
38527 \begin_inset Formula $()$
38530 in all entered regexps.
38538 \begin_layout Section
38540 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38542 name "sec:Spellchecking"
38547 \begin_inset Index idx
38550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38559 \begin_layout Standard
38561 has a built-in spell checker.
38564 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38571 key or the toolbar button
38574 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
38577 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the
38578 beginning of the currently selected text.
38579 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing
38580 you to edit and replace it in a second line.
38581 Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text
38582 scrolled so that it is visible.
38583 In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio
38584 n, if any could be found.
38585 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
38589 field, double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
38590 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
38593 \begin_layout Standard
38594 By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language
38597 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38601 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing
38602 a different one at the top of the dialog.
38604 can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
38605 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
38608 \begin_inset space ~
38616 arg "dialog-show character"
38619 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
38621 automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
38624 \begin_layout Standard
38625 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by \SpecialChar LyX
38626 can be downloaded from here:
38627 \begin_inset Newline newline
38631 \begin_inset Flex URL
38634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38636 \change_deleted 244031559 1606069762
38638 https://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
38639 \change_inserted 244031559 1606069762
38640 https://www.lyx.org/trac/export/HEAD/lyxsvn/dictionaries/trunk/dicts/
38648 \begin_inset Newline newline
38652 \change_deleted 244031559 1606070170
38654 \change_inserted 244031559 1606070176
38655 You should download
38658 \begin_inset space ~
38661 files for each language
38662 \change_inserted 244031559 1606070127
38667 link at the end of the opened webpage)
38670 To install a dictionary on Windows, copy the
38671 \change_inserted 244031559 1606069925
38675 \begin_inset space ~
38678 files into \SpecialChar LyX
38679 's installation subfolder
38687 and restart \SpecialChar LyX
38689 \begin_inset Newline newline
38692 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
38693 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
38694 but in most cases these are
38710 is the language code.
38713 \begin_layout Subsection
38717 \begin_layout Standard
38720 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38721 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
38723 \begin_inset space ~
38726 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
38729 you can set the following things:
38732 \begin_layout Description
38734 \begin_inset space ~
38737 engine Select the library \SpecialChar LyX
38738 should use for spell checking.
38739 Depending on your platform,
38749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38750 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
38751 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
38766 \begin_inset space ~
38769 OS can also use Mac's own spellchecker and will use it by default.
38772 \begin_layout Description
38774 \begin_inset space ~
38777 language If this field is not empty, \SpecialChar LyX
38778 will always use the given language
38779 for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is.
38782 \begin_layout Description
38784 \begin_inset space ~
38787 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker
38789 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38793 \begin_inset space \space{}
38797 This should normally not be needed.
38800 \begin_layout Description
38802 \begin_inset space ~
38806 \begin_inset space ~
38809 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words
38811 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38815 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38821 \begin_layout Description
38823 \begin_inset space ~
38826 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
38827 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
38828 By right-clicking on an underlined word, suggestions from the spellchecker
38829 appear in a context menu.
38830 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested
38834 \begin_layout Description
38836 \begin_inset space ~
38840 \begin_inset space ~
38844 \begin_inset space ~
38847 comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document content is checked
38851 \begin_layout Section
38853 \begin_inset Index idx
38856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38863 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38865 name "sec:Thesaurus"
38872 \begin_layout Standard
38874 provides a multilingual thesaurus.
38875 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice, OpenOffice and Firefox
38884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38885 \begin_inset CommandInset href
38887 target "https://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
38897 thesaurus library, which is included in \SpecialChar LyX
38899 Therefore, \SpecialChar LyX
38900 is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
38901 which are available for many languages.
38904 \begin_layout Standard
38905 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for
38906 the use with \SpecialChar LyX
38910 \begin_layout Subsection
38911 Setting up the thesaurus
38914 \begin_layout Standard
38923 thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix
38927 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
38932 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language
38934 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38938 \begin_inset space ~
38946 For instance, the US English files are named:
38949 \begin_layout Itemize
38953 \begin_layout Itemize
38957 \begin_layout Standard
38966 and its thesaurus installed, these files should be already on your system
38967 and you just need to point \SpecialChar LyX
38970 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38971 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
38972 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
38974 \begin_inset space ~
38979 ) to the path where they are installed.
38983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38984 On Linux, depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionar
38985 ies, typical locations are
38991 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
38995 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
38999 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
39002 On Windows, dictionaries are to be found at
39008 LibreOffice-<Version>
39015 On the Mac, the default location is
39017 /Users\SpecialChar breakableslash
39018 <user name>\SpecialChar breakableslash
39019 Library\SpecialChar breakableslash
39020 Application Support\SpecialChar breakableslash
39021 libreoffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
39022 <version>\SpecialChar breakableslash
39030 On Windows, you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation
39031 during the \SpecialChar LyX
39032 installation process, which will then be installed in the correct
39036 \begin_layout Standard
39037 If you want to install new\SpecialChar breakableslash
39039 \change_deleted 244031559 1606069849
39041 \change_inserted 244031559 1606069853
39044 thesaurus dictionaries, you can download them from here:
39045 \begin_inset Newline newline
39049 \begin_inset Flex URL
39052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39054 \change_deleted 244031559 1606069803
39056 https://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/thesaurus/
39057 \change_inserted 244031559 1606069803
39058 https://www.lyx.org/trac/export/HEAD/lyxsvn/dictionaries/trunk/thes/
39068 \begin_layout Standard
39069 To install a new dictionary, download the two files for this dictionary
39070 into the thesaurus path (which is set in
39072 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
39073 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
39074 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
39076 \begin_inset space ~
39081 ) and restart \SpecialChar LyX
39083 If this path is not defined yet, you can use a dictionary of your choice
39084 and point \SpecialChar LyX
39088 \begin_layout Standard
39089 Alternatively, you can also install new dictionaries via
39091 LibreOffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
39094 or, on Linux, via your package manager (look for
39100 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
39103 If you do this, make sure that \SpecialChar LyX
39104 is able to find the installed dictionaries,
39106 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39112 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
39113 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
39114 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
39116 \begin_inset space ~
39121 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
39124 \begin_layout Subsection
39125 Using the thesaurus
39128 \begin_layout Standard
39129 To start the thesaurus, use the menu
39131 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
39134 or the toolbar button
39137 arg "thesaurus-entry"
39140 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is
39142 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as
39144 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
39145 Note that, for some languages (such as English), the thesaurus does not
39146 only show equivalent words (synonyms), but also generic terms (such as
39155 ), related terms (such as
39158 \begin_inset space ~
39167 ), compounds (such as
39170 \begin_inset space ~
39179 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
39188 Generic terms, related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
39191 \begin_layout Standard
39192 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but
39193 you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look
39197 \begin_layout Standard
39198 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in
39199 the dictionary, such as the above
39203 ), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i.
39204 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39208 \begin_inset space \space{}
39211 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person
39212 singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs).
39213 For example, looking up the word form
39217 yields no results, while results are shown for the word form
39222 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
39223 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39227 \begin_inset space \space{}
39238 s); then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in
39239 the dialog, and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only
39240 the highlighted part will be replaced; thus the ending remains).
39243 \begin_layout Section
39245 \begin_inset Index idx
39248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39255 \begin_inset Index idx
39258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39259 Document ! Change Tracking
39265 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39267 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
39274 \begin_layout Standard
39275 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be
39276 able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
39277 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
39278 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
39280 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39282 \begin_inset space ~
39285 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
39287 \begin_inset space ~
39295 \begin_layout Standard
39296 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
39310 The color depends on the author that made the change.
39311 You can change the color in
39313 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
39314 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
39316 \begin_inset space ~
39320 \begin_inset space ~
39325 \SpecialChar menuseparator
39331 \begin_inset Index idx
39334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39335 Color ! Change tracking
39340 The author and the date of the change are shown in \SpecialChar LyX
39341 's status bar when the
39342 cursor is in changed text.
39343 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
39346 arg "changes-merge"
39352 \begin_layout Standard
39353 When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in \SpecialChar LyX
39355 \begin_inset Index idx
39358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39367 \begin_layout Standard
39368 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39374 \begin_layout Standard
39375 \begin_inset Graphics
39376 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
39384 \begin_layout Standard
39385 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39391 \begin_layout Standard
39392 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
39395 \begin_layout Standard
39396 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39402 \begin_layout Standard
39403 \begin_inset Tabular
39404 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
39405 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
39406 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39407 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39408 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39409 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39417 arg "changes-track"
39425 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39431 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39433 \begin_inset space ~
39436 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
39438 \begin_inset space ~
39447 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39448 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39456 arg "changes-output"
39464 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39470 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39472 \begin_inset space ~
39475 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
39477 \begin_inset space ~
39481 \begin_inset space ~
39485 \begin_inset space ~
39494 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39495 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39511 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39515 Jumps to the next change
39521 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39522 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39530 arg "change-accept"
39538 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39544 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39546 \begin_inset space ~
39549 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
39551 \begin_inset space ~
39560 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39561 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39569 arg "change-reject"
39577 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39583 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39585 \begin_inset space ~
39588 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
39590 \begin_inset space ~
39599 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39600 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39608 arg "changes-merge"
39616 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39622 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39624 \begin_inset space ~
39627 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
39629 \begin_inset space ~
39638 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39639 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39647 arg "all-changes-accept"
39655 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39661 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39663 \begin_inset space ~
39666 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
39668 \begin_inset space ~
39672 \begin_inset space ~
39681 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39682 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39690 arg "all-changes-reject"
39698 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39704 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39706 \begin_inset space ~
39709 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
39711 \begin_inset space ~
39715 \begin_inset space ~
39724 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39725 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39741 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39747 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39748 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
39750 \begin_inset space ~
39759 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39760 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39776 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39782 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
39784 \begin_inset space ~
39800 \begin_layout Standard
39801 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39807 \begin_layout Standard
39808 Not all changes are (yet) visualized, especially no format changes like
39828 \begin_layout Standard
39829 The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight
39830 the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
39831 When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about
39832 the next change after the current cursor position.
39833 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
39834 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and
39835 step to the next change.
39836 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
39839 \begin_layout Standard
39840 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important
39841 to describe a change.
39844 \begin_layout Standard
39846 \change_deleted -712698321 1577206802
39847 To show the changes made in the output you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39853 \begin_inset Index idx
39856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39864 You will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
39866 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
39873 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
39879 \begin_layout Section
39880 Comparison of Documents
39881 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39883 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
39888 \begin_inset Index idx
39891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39892 Comparison of documents
39900 \begin_layout Standard
39901 You can compare two different \SpecialChar LyX
39904 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
39908 The comparison result is a \SpecialChar LyX
39909 file with change tracking enabled showing the
39911 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document \SpecialChar LyX
39913 the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
39917 \begin_inset space ~
39921 \begin_inset space ~
39925 \begin_inset space ~
39934 \begin_inset space ~
39938 \begin_inset space ~
39942 \begin_inset space ~
39946 \begin_inset space ~
39950 \begin_inset space ~
39954 \begin_inset space ~
39959 enables the change tracking option
39962 \begin_inset space ~
39966 \begin_inset space ~
39970 \begin_inset space ~
39975 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
39978 \begin_layout Section
39979 International Support
39980 \begin_inset Index idx
39983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39984 International support
39992 \begin_layout Standard
39993 This section describes how to use \SpecialChar LyX
39994 with any language you want.
39995 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set
39996 up \SpecialChar LyX
39998 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
40000 key "Arabic,Armenian,Cyrillic,Farsi,Hebrew,Japanese"
40008 \begin_layout Standard
40009 Besides languages, \SpecialChar LyX
40010 also supports phonetic symbols, see section
40011 \begin_inset space ~
40015 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40017 reference "subsec:Special-Character"
40024 \begin_layout Subsection
40026 \begin_inset Index idx
40029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40036 \begin_inset Index idx
40039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40040 Document ! Settings
40046 \begin_inset Index idx
40049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40050 Document ! Language
40058 \begin_layout Standard
40061 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40062 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40065 dialog lets you set
40067 the language, the quote style and character encoding
40072 \begin_layout Standard
40077 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for \SpecialChar LaTeX
40082 \begin_inset space ~
40087 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
40088 For details about the different encoding options see section
40089 \begin_inset space ~
40093 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40095 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
40102 \begin_layout Subsection
40103 Keyboard mapping configuration
40104 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40106 name "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
40113 \begin_layout Standard
40114 If you have for example a U.
40115 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40118 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English, you
40119 can use an alternate keymap.
40120 For example, if you want to write in Italian, you can configure \SpecialChar LyX
40125 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40126 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40127 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
40130 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings, see section
40131 \begin_inset space ~
40135 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40137 reference "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
40142 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select
40143 which one you want to use.
40146 \begin_layout Standard
40147 Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely
40148 different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance).
40149 You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U.
40150 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40153 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
40154 In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing
40155 one to support the characters you want.
40156 This and many other customizations are explained in the
40163 \begin_layout Chapter
40166 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40168 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
40175 \begin_layout Standard
40176 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
40177 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special
40178 topic inside the user's guide.
40181 \begin_layout Section
40183 \begin_inset Index idx
40186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40195 \begin_layout Standard
40200 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
40203 \begin_layout Subsection
40207 \begin_layout Standard
40208 Creates a new document.
40211 \begin_layout Subsection
40215 \begin_layout Standard
40216 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
40217 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
40218 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
40220 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353209
40221 Furthermore, templates can provide text structures and fragments for recurring
40227 \begin_layout Subsection
40231 \begin_layout Standard
40235 \begin_layout Subsection
40239 \begin_layout Standard
40240 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
40241 Click there on a file to open it.
40244 \begin_layout Subsection
40246 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352812
40250 \begin_layout Standard
40252 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352848
40253 This menu entry gives you quick access to all \SpecialChar LyX
40257 \begin_layout Subsection
40261 \begin_layout Standard
40262 Closes the current document.
40265 \begin_layout Subsection
40269 \begin_layout Standard
40270 Closes all opened documents.
40273 \begin_layout Subsection
40277 \begin_layout Standard
40278 Saves the actual document.
40281 \begin_layout Subsection
40285 \begin_layout Standard
40286 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
40287 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352868
40291 \begin_layout Subsection
40293 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352875
40297 \begin_layout Standard
40299 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352904
40300 Saves the document in the appropriate templates directory for later use
40306 \begin_layout Subsection
40310 \begin_layout Standard
40311 Saves all opened documents.
40314 \begin_layout Subsection
40318 \begin_layout Standard
40319 Reloads the actual document from disk.
40322 \begin_layout Subsection
40326 \begin_layout Standard
40327 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when
40328 one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
40329 It is described in the section
40331 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
40336 Additional Features
40341 \begin_layout Subsection
40345 \begin_layout Standard
40346 Here you can import files from older \SpecialChar LyX
40347 versions, HTML files, \SpecialChar LaTeX
40349 files, plain text files and comma separated, table-like text files (CSV).
40350 The files will be imported as a new \SpecialChar LyX
40354 \begin_layout Standard
40355 When using the menu entry
40358 \begin_inset space ~
40363 , line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu
40367 \begin_inset space ~
40371 \begin_inset space ~
40375 \begin_inset space ~
40380 , consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
40381 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
40384 \begin_layout Subsection
40386 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40388 name "subsec:Export"
40395 \begin_layout Standard
40396 You can export your document to various file formats.
40397 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
40399 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
40400 They depend on the programs found by \SpecialChar LyX
40401 during its configuration.
40404 \begin_layout Standard
40405 Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail
40407 \begin_inset space ~
40411 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40413 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
40420 \begin_layout Description
40426 \begin_inset space ~
40429 LyX format of the special \SpecialChar LyX
40431 \begin_inset space ~
40434 1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
40435 \begin_inset Newline newline
40438 Since \SpecialChar LyX
40439 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into \SpecialChar LyX
40443 \begin_layout Description
40444 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup
40450 \begin_layout Description
40452 \begin_inset space ~
40455 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup
40461 \begin_layout Description
40462 DraftDVI \SpecialChar LaTeX
40463 's native DVI-format.
40464 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in
40465 files paths or file names in your document.
40467 use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
40474 \begin_layout Description
40475 DVI DVI-format that also allows the usage of special characters or spaces
40476 in files paths or file names
40479 \begin_layout Description
40481 \begin_inset space ~
40488 ) DVI-format using the program
40490 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
40493 ; supports Unicode and the usage of non-\SpecialChar TeX
40497 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
40500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40505 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
40513 \begin_layout Description
40515 \begin_inset space ~
40518 (cropped) the same as
40522 but with cropped page margins.
40525 \begin_layout Description
40527 \begin_inset space ~
40530 Dot text file with code in the programming language
40534 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
40539 \begin_layout Description
40543 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
40546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40551 the exported file will be stored in a subdirectory.
40559 \begin_layout Description
40561 \begin_inset space ~
40565 \begin_inset space ~
40568 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
40572 ; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and
40580 \begin_layout Description
40584 \begin_inset space ~
40593 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40594 source that is compilable with the program
40596 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
40600 \begin_layout Description
40604 \begin_inset space ~
40609 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40610 source, additionally all images used in the document
40611 will be converted to a format that is readable by the
40615 program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG)
40618 \begin_layout Description
40622 \begin_inset space ~
40627 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40628 source code, additionally all images used in the document
40629 will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is readable by the
40637 \begin_layout Description
40641 \begin_inset space ~
40650 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40651 source that is compilable with the program
40657 \begin_layout Description
40659 \begin_inset space ~
40663 \begin_inset space ~
40670 ) text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40671 source and also code in the syntax of the music notation
40677 \begin_layout Description
40679 \begin_inset space ~
40682 z.y.x \SpecialChar LyX
40683 -Document in a format readable by the \SpecialChar LyX
40685 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40689 \begin_inset space \space{}
40694 \begin_inset space ~
40698 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40702 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40706 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40710 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40713 represent the version number)
40716 \begin_layout Description
40718 \begin_inset space ~
40722 \begin_inset space ~
40725 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon
40726 your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary
40727 to compile it (images, child documents, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
40731 \begin_layout Description
40732 LyXHTML HTML-format using \SpecialChar LyX
40733 's internal XHTML engine
40736 \begin_layout Description
40738 \begin_inset space ~
40742 \begin_inset space ~
40746 \begin_inset space ~
40750 \begin_inset space ~
40753 XML Office Open XML file, to be opened with
40758 For the conversion the program
40767 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
40770 \begin_layout Description
40771 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
40776 \begin_layout Description
40778 \begin_inset space ~
40781 (Pandoc) OpenDocument file, to be opened with
40783 LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword
40786 For the conversion the program
40795 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
40798 \begin_layout Description
40800 \begin_inset space ~
40803 (tex4ht) OpenDocument file.
40804 For the conversion the program
40813 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
40816 \begin_layout Description
40818 \begin_inset space ~
40821 (cropped) the same as
40824 \begin_inset space ~
40829 but with cropped page margins
40832 \begin_layout Description
40836 \begin_inset space ~
40841 PDF-format using the program
40845 , produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
40848 \begin_layout Description
40852 \begin_inset space ~
40856 \begin_inset space ~
40864 \begin_inset space ~
40869 but with a reduced pixel resolution of 150
40870 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40874 \begin_inset space \space{}
40877 useful for e-books to be read on tablet PCs or for large documents as intermedia
40881 \begin_layout Description
40885 \begin_inset space ~
40890 PDF-format using the program
40892 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
40895 , produces PDF-files directly
40898 \begin_layout Description
40902 \begin_inset space ~
40907 PDF-format using the program
40911 , produces PDF-files directly
40914 \begin_layout Description
40918 \begin_inset space ~
40923 PDF-format using the program
40927 , produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
40930 \begin_layout Description
40934 \begin_inset space ~
40939 PDF-format using the program
40944 , produces PDF-files directly
40947 \begin_layout Description
40951 \begin_inset space ~
40959 \begin_layout Description
40963 \begin_inset space ~
40967 \begin_inset space ~
40972 text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript format
40973 and then exported as text using the program
40978 \begin_layout Description
40983 PostScript format using the program
40991 options see section
40992 \begin_inset space ~
40996 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40998 reference "subsec:General-output"
41005 \begin_layout Description
41006 Sweave text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41007 source and also code in the statistical programming
41021 it is possible to use
41025 -commands in \SpecialChar LaTeX
41029 \begin_layout Standard
41030 If one of the menu entries
41037 \begin_inset space ~
41046 is missing, you need to update your \SpecialChar LaTeX
41048 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
41050 \begin_inset space ~
41054 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41056 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
41061 \begin_inset Index idx
41064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41065 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
41074 \begin_layout Subsection
41078 \begin_layout Standard
41079 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on
41080 Windows you additionally need to register its program path to \SpecialChar LyX
41083 \begin_inset space ~
41087 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41089 reference "sec:Paths"
41094 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
41103 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
41104 The format can be changed in \SpecialChar LyX
41105 's preferences as described in section
41106 \begin_inset space ~
41110 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41112 reference "subsec:Converters"
41119 \begin_layout Subsection
41120 New and Close Window
41123 \begin_layout Standard
41124 Opens or closes a new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
41128 \begin_layout Subsection
41132 \begin_layout Standard
41133 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
41136 \begin_layout Section
41138 \begin_inset Index idx
41141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41150 \begin_layout Subsection
41154 \begin_layout Standard
41155 Described in section
41156 \begin_inset space ~
41160 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41162 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
41169 \begin_layout Subsection
41170 Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Recent, Paste Special
41173 \begin_layout Standard
41174 Described in section
41175 \begin_inset space ~
41179 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41181 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
41188 \begin_layout Subsection
41192 \begin_layout Standard
41193 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
41194 If the cursor is outside an inset, the whole document will be selected.
41197 \begin_layout Subsection
41201 \begin_layout Standard
41202 Selects the whole document.
41205 \begin_layout Subsection
41206 Find & Replace (Quick)
41209 \begin_layout Standard
41210 Described in section
41211 \begin_inset space ~
41215 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41217 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
41224 \begin_layout Subsection
41225 Find & Replace (Advanced)
41228 \begin_layout Standard
41229 Described in section
41230 \begin_inset space ~
41234 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41236 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
41243 \begin_layout Subsection
41244 Move Paragraph Up/Down
41247 \begin_layout Standard
41248 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph
41252 \begin_layout Subsection
41254 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756612
41258 \begin_layout Standard
41260 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756612
41261 Described in section
41262 \begin_inset space ~
41266 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41268 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
41277 \begin_layout Subsection
41279 \begin_inset Index idx
41282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41283 Paragraph ! Settings
41291 \begin_layout Standard
41292 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width.
41293 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently
41297 \begin_layout Standard
41298 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you
41299 have chosen to separate paragraphs with
41305 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
41306 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
41308 \begin_inset space ~
41314 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756614
41318 \begin_layout Subsection
41320 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756624
41324 \begin_layout Standard
41326 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756615
41327 This sub-menu provides several ways to customize the appearance of text
41332 \begin_layout Enumerate
41334 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756657
41335 Customize text properties by means of the
41341 Customize\SpecialChar ldots
41344 ; this is described in section
41345 \begin_inset space ~
41349 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41351 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
41358 \begin_layout Enumerate
41360 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756942
41361 Apply the last settings done in this dialog via
41363 Apply last settings
41366 \begin_layout Enumerate
41368 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756615
41369 Change the casing of selected text (
41384 \begin_layout Subsection
41386 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756641
41390 \begin_layout Standard
41392 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756787
41393 This sub-menu only appears the document class or a module provides custom
41394 text styles (in the case of this document:
41416 \begin_inset space ~
41420 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41422 reference "subsec:Custom-Character-Styles"
41431 \begin_layout Subsection
41432 Table and Rows & Columns
41435 \begin_layout Standard
41436 These menus only appear if the cursor is inside a table.
41437 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells, add or remove borders
41438 of a cell and to set the alignment of the cell.
41441 \begin_layout Subsection
41445 \begin_layout Standard
41446 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside an inset.
41447 It will dissolve this inset.
41448 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
41452 \begin_layout Subsection
41456 \begin_layout Standard
41457 This menu is only active if the cursor is inside an inset or a formula.
41458 Here you can change the properties of the inset or the formula.
41461 \begin_layout Subsection
41462 Increase/Decrease List Depth
41465 \begin_layout Standard
41466 These menus are only active if the cursor is in an environment that can
41468 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
41469 \begin_inset space ~
41473 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41475 reference "sec:Nesting"
41480 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41482 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
41489 \begin_layout Section
41491 \begin_inset Index idx
41494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41503 \begin_layout Standard
41504 At the bottom of the
41508 menu the opened documents are listed.
41511 \begin_layout Subsection
41512 Open/Close all Insets
41515 \begin_layout Standard
41516 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
41519 \begin_layout Subsection
41520 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
41523 \begin_layout Standard
41524 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
41527 \begin_layout Standard
41528 Math macros are described in the
41535 \begin_layout Subsection
41539 \begin_layout Standard
41540 Shows the outline window as described in sections
41541 \begin_inset space ~
41545 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41547 reference "sec:Navigating"
41552 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41554 reference "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
41561 \begin_layout Subsection
41565 \begin_layout Standard
41566 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described
41568 \begin_inset space ~
41572 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41574 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
41581 \begin_layout Subsection
41585 \begin_layout Standard
41586 Opens a window showing console messages.
41587 This is useful for debugging \SpecialChar LyX
41589 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41592 e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background
41593 while \SpecialChar LaTeX
41594 is processing the document.
41597 \begin_layout Subsection
41599 \begin_inset CommandInset label
41601 name "subsec:Toolbars"
41606 \begin_inset Index idx
41609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41618 \begin_layout Standard
41619 In this menu entry you can set the icon size and the appearance of the different
41621 All toolbars and the
41624 \begin_inset space ~
41642 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
41644 \change_deleted -712698321 1608195495
41646 \change_inserted -712698321 1608195492
41650 \begin_layout Standard
41652 \change_inserted -712698321 1608195407
41656 \begin_inset space ~
41674 \begin_inset space ~
41686 \begin_inset space ~
41691 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
41694 \change_deleted -712698321 1608195728
41698 \change_inserted -712698321 1608196033
41700 The state of these toolbars is set and indicated in a submenu which lets
41714 \change_deleted -712698321 1608195563
41715 denoted in the menu with the suffix
41724 \begin_layout Standard
41729 state the toolbar is permanently shown
41730 \change_inserted -712698321 1608195803
41735 state it is never shown
41741 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment
41742 or when a certain feature is enabled.
41743 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking
41744 is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor
41745 is inside a formula or table respectively
41746 \change_inserted -712698321 1608195857
41747 , the phonetic symbols toolbar only in the phonetic symbols environment
41752 \begin_layout Standard
41754 's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
41755 \begin_inset space ~
41759 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41761 reference "sec:Toolbars"
41768 \begin_layout Subsection
41772 \begin_layout Standard
41776 \begin_inset space ~
41780 \begin_inset space ~
41784 \begin_inset space ~
41788 \begin_inset space ~
41792 \begin_inset space ~
41796 \begin_inset space ~
41801 will split \SpecialChar LyX
41802 's main window vertically while
41805 \begin_inset space ~
41809 \begin_inset space ~
41813 \begin_inset space ~
41817 \begin_inset space ~
41821 \begin_inset space ~
41825 \begin_inset space ~
41830 will split it horizontally.
41831 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them, or
41832 to view the same document, but at different positions.
41833 You can even split the main window several times to view, for example,
41834 three or more documents at the same time.
41835 To close a split view, use the menu
41838 \begin_inset space ~
41842 \begin_inset space ~
41850 \begin_layout Subsection
41854 \begin_layout Standard
41855 Closes a split view.
41858 \begin_layout Subsection
41862 \begin_layout Standard
41863 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars
41864 so that you will see nothing but your text.
41865 It furthermore displays \SpecialChar LyX
41866 's main window fullscreen.
41867 To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click
41868 and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
41871 \begin_layout Section
41873 \begin_inset Index idx
41876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41885 \begin_layout Subsection
41889 \begin_layout Standard
41890 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
41891 \begin_inset space ~
41895 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41897 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
41908 \begin_layout Subsection
41910 \begin_inset CommandInset label
41912 name "subsec:Special-Character"
41919 \begin_layout Standard
41920 Here you can insert the following characters:
41923 \begin_layout Description
41928 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your
41931 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
41932 the available characters depend on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41933 -packages you have installed.
41934 You can get a complete display by checking
41937 \begin_inset space ~
41943 \begin_inset Newline newline
41947 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
41950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41955 Not all characters will be visible in the
41959 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences
41960 dialog (see section
41961 \begin_inset space ~
41965 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41967 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
41971 ) can display every character.
41979 \begin_layout Description
41980 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar ldots
41984 \begin_layout Description
41986 \begin_inset space ~
41990 \begin_inset space ~
41993 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
41994 \begin_inset space ~
41998 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42000 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
42007 \begin_layout Description
42009 \begin_inset space ~
42012 Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote style you selected in
42015 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42016 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42022 \begin_layout Description
42024 \begin_inset space ~
42027 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
42030 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42031 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42037 \begin_layout Description
42039 \begin_inset space ~
42042 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that is protected from line breaks: \SpecialChar nobreakdash
42046 \begin_layout Description
42048 \begin_inset space ~
42051 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur: \SpecialChar breakableslash
42055 \begin_layout Description
42057 \begin_inset space ~
42061 \change_deleted -712698321 1590482504
42062 Inserts a character representing a single space (the one you get when pressing
42068 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
42073 Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
42075 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42079 \begin_inset space \space{}
42082 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
42083 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
42089 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42092 To insert a fraction use the command
42097 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
42101 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
42107 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42110 The visible space is hereby the character before the
42117 \begin_layout Description
42119 \begin_inset space ~
42122 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar menuseparator
42126 \begin_layout Description
42128 \begin_inset space ~
42132 \begin_inset Index idx
42135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42142 \begin_inset Index idx
42145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42146 Language ! Phonetic symbols
42151 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic
42152 Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these
42154 To use this feature you must have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42160 \begin_inset Index idx
42163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42171 \begin_inset Newline newline
42174 More information about this feature can be found in the
42180 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
42186 \begin_layout Description
42187 Logos Inserts the logos of the programs \SpecialChar LyX
42189 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
42190 and \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
42194 \begin_layout Subsection
42198 \begin_layout Standard
42199 Opens a submenu with the following options:
42202 \begin_layout Description
42203 Superscript Inserts a superscript: test
42204 \begin_inset script superscript
42206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42215 \begin_layout Description
42216 Subscript Inserts a subscript: test
42217 \begin_inset script subscript
42219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42228 \begin_layout Description
42230 \begin_inset space ~
42233 Space Inserts a protected space as described in section
42234 \begin_inset space ~
42238 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42240 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
42247 \begin_layout Description
42249 \begin_inset space ~
42252 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
42253 \begin_inset space ~
42257 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42259 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
42266 \begin_layout Description
42268 \begin_inset space ~
42271 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
42272 \begin_inset space ~
42276 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42278 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
42285 \begin_layout Description
42287 \change_deleted -712698321 1590482457
42289 \begin_inset space ~
42292 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
42294 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42298 \begin_inset space \space{}
42301 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
42302 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
42308 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42311 To insert a fraction use the command
42316 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
42320 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
42326 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42329 The visible space is hereby the character before the
42338 \begin_layout Description
42340 \begin_inset space ~
42343 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
42344 \begin_inset space ~
42348 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42350 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
42357 \begin_layout Description
42359 \begin_inset space ~
42362 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
42363 \begin_inset space ~
42367 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42369 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
42376 \begin_layout Description
42378 \begin_inset space ~
42381 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
42382 \begin_inset space ~
42386 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42388 reference "subsec:Vertical-Space"
42395 \begin_layout Description
42396 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
42397 \begin_inset space ~
42401 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42403 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
42410 \begin_layout Description
42412 \begin_inset space ~
42415 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
42416 \begin_inset space ~
42420 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42422 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
42429 \begin_layout Description
42431 \begin_inset space ~
42434 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
42435 \begin_inset space ~
42439 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42441 reference "subsec:Ligatures"
42448 \begin_layout Description
42450 \begin_inset space ~
42454 \begin_inset space ~
42457 Break Inserts a line break point (zero-width space character) that is invisible
42460 \begin_inset space ~
42464 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42466 reference "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
42473 for a usage example.
42476 \begin_layout Description
42478 \begin_inset space ~
42482 \begin_inset space ~
42485 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
42486 \begin_inset space ~
42490 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42492 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
42499 \begin_layout Description
42501 \begin_inset space ~
42504 Break Inserts a forced line break that
42505 \change_deleted -712698321 1590482910
42508 justifies the remaining text as described in section
42509 \begin_inset space ~
42513 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42515 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
42522 \begin_layout Description
42524 \begin_inset space ~
42527 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
42528 \begin_inset space ~
42532 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42534 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
42541 \begin_layout Description
42543 \begin_inset space ~
42546 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph
42547 breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page, as described in
42549 \begin_inset space ~
42553 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42555 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
42560 \change_inserted -712698321 1607005731
42564 \begin_layout Description
42566 \change_inserted -712698321 1607005924
42568 \begin_inset space ~
42572 \begin_inset space ~
42575 Break Instructs \SpecialChar LaTeX
42576 to prevent a page break at the given position.
42578 \begin_inset space ~
42582 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42584 reference "subsec:Suppressing-Page-Breaks"
42593 \begin_layout Description
42595 \begin_inset space ~
42598 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
42599 \begin_inset space ~
42603 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42605 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
42612 \begin_layout Description
42614 \begin_inset space ~
42618 \begin_inset space ~
42621 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
42622 \begin_inset space ~
42626 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42628 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
42635 \begin_layout Subsection
42637 \change_inserted -712698321 1533459357
42641 \begin_layout Standard
42643 \change_inserted -712698321 1533459959
42644 Here you can insert fields holding specific information.
42645 The submenu allows you to insert
42648 \begin_layout Description
42650 \change_inserted -712698321 1533460018
42652 \begin_inset space ~
42655 (Current) inserts the current date (which will automatically update itself)
42658 \begin_layout Description
42660 \change_inserted -712698321 1533460347
42662 \begin_inset space ~
42666 \begin_inset space ~
42669 Modification) inserts the date of the last file modification (time of last
42673 \begin_layout Description
42675 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647074
42677 \begin_inset space ~
42680 (Fix) inserts a static date that will not change.
42683 \begin_layout Description
42685 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647089
42687 \begin_inset space ~
42690 (Current) inserts the current time (which will automatically update itself)
42693 \begin_layout Description
42695 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647093
42697 \begin_inset space ~
42701 \begin_inset space ~
42704 Modification) inserts the time of the last file modification (time of last
42708 \begin_layout Description
42710 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647133
42712 \begin_inset space ~
42715 (Fix) inserts a static time that will not change.
42718 \begin_layout Description
42720 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647170
42722 \begin_inset space ~
42726 \begin_inset space ~
42730 \begin_inset space ~
42733 Extension) inserts the name of the current file (without the extension .lyx)
42736 \begin_layout Description
42738 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647240
42740 \begin_inset space ~
42743 Name inserts the user name as specified in
42745 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42746 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
42752 \begin_layout Description
42754 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647259
42756 \begin_inset space ~
42759 Email inserts the user email address as specified in
42761 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42762 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
42768 \begin_layout Description
42770 \change_inserted -712698321 1533460561
42771 Other\SpecialChar ldots
42772 opens a dialog that lets you insert alternative formats of the three
42773 date types listed above and insert a range of other information.
42776 \begin_layout Subsection
42779 List/Contents/References
42782 \begin_layout Standard
42783 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
42787 \begin_inset space ~
42808 are described in section
42809 \begin_inset space ~
42813 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42815 reference "sec:toc"
42824 is described in section
42825 \begin_inset space ~
42829 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42831 reference "sec:Index"
42839 is described in section
42840 \begin_inset space ~
42844 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42846 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
42852 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
42855 is described in section
42856 \begin_inset space ~
42860 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42862 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
42869 \begin_layout Subsection
42873 \begin_layout Standard
42874 To insert floats, as described in section
42875 \begin_inset space ~
42879 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42881 reference "sec:Floats"
42885 and in detail the chapter
42892 \begin_inset space ~
42900 \begin_layout Subsection
42904 \begin_layout Standard
42905 To insert notes, described in section
42906 \begin_inset space ~
42910 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42912 reference "sec:Notes"
42919 \begin_layout Subsection
42923 \begin_layout Standard
42924 Inserts a branch inset, if any, and allowing you to create and insert a
42926 Branches are described in section
42927 \begin_inset space ~
42931 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42933 reference "sec:Branches"
42940 \begin_layout Subsection
42944 \begin_layout Standard
42945 Inserts document class-specific insets.
42946 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain
42948 An example is the document class
42949 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354540
42951 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42959 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354543
42963 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42968 with three custom insets.
42971 Flex insets and InsetLayout
42975 Installing New Document Classes, The Layout file format
42981 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
42984 \begin_layout Subsection
42986 \begin_inset Index idx
42989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42998 \begin_layout Standard
42999 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files
43001 For more information see chapter
43003 External Document Parts
43006 \begin_inset space ~
43012 \begin_layout Subsection
43014 \begin_inset Index idx
43017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43026 \begin_layout Standard
43027 Inserts a box in a certain style.
43028 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
43035 \begin_inset space ~
43043 \begin_layout Subsection
43047 \begin_layout Standard
43052 dialog as described in section
43053 \begin_inset space ~
43057 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43059 reference "sec:Bibliography"
43066 \begin_layout Subsection
43070 \begin_layout Standard
43075 as described in section
43076 \begin_inset space ~
43080 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43082 reference "sec:Cross-References"
43089 \begin_layout Subsection
43093 \begin_layout Standard
43098 as described in section
43099 \begin_inset space ~
43103 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43105 reference "sec:Cross-References"
43112 \begin_layout Subsection
43114 \begin_inset Index idx
43117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43124 \begin_inset Index idx
43127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43128 Tables ! Multi-page ! Caption
43136 \begin_layout Standard
43137 Inserts a caption in a float or multi-page table.
43138 Floats are described in section
43139 \begin_inset space ~
43143 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43145 reference "sec:Floats"
43149 ; captions in multi-page tables are described in the section
43152 \change_inserted -712698321 1590482693
43160 \begin_inset space ~
43168 \begin_layout Subsection
43172 \begin_layout Standard
43173 Inserts an index entry as described in section
43174 \begin_inset space ~
43178 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43180 reference "sec:Index"
43187 \begin_layout Subsection
43191 \begin_layout Standard
43192 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
43193 \begin_inset space ~
43197 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43199 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
43206 \begin_layout Subsection
43210 \begin_layout Standard
43211 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
43212 Tables are described in section
43213 \begin_inset space ~
43217 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43219 reference "sec:Tables"
43223 and in detail in the chapter
43230 \begin_inset space ~
43238 \begin_layout Subsection
43242 \begin_layout Standard
43248 Graphics are described in section
43249 \begin_inset space ~
43253 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43255 reference "sec:Graphics"
43262 \begin_layout Subsection
43266 \begin_layout Standard
43267 Inserts a URL as described in section
43268 \begin_inset space ~
43272 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43274 reference "subsec:URLs"
43281 \begin_layout Subsection
43285 \begin_layout Standard
43286 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
43287 \begin_inset space ~
43291 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43293 reference "subsec:Hyperlinks"
43300 \begin_layout Subsection
43304 \begin_layout Standard
43305 Inserts a footnote as described in section
43306 \begin_inset space ~
43310 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43312 reference "sec:Footnotes"
43319 \begin_layout Subsection
43323 \begin_layout Standard
43324 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
43325 \begin_inset space ~
43329 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43331 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
43338 \begin_layout Subsection
43341 Separate <Name> (Above/Below)
43344 \begin_layout Standard
43345 These menu items are only visible if it is possible to have two consecutive
43346 environments of the same type.
43348 \begin_inset space ~
43352 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43354 reference "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
43358 for an explanation.
43361 \begin_layout Subsection
43365 \begin_layout Standard
43366 Is only visible if the cursor is in front, in or behind a section heading,
43367 title or caption of a float.
43368 Inserts a short title as described in section
43369 \begin_inset space ~
43373 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43375 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
43382 \begin_layout Subsection
43387 \begin_layout Standard
43388 Inserts a \SpecialChar TeX
43389 Code box as described in section
43390 \begin_inset space ~
43394 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43396 reference "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
43403 \begin_layout Subsection
43405 \begin_inset Index idx
43408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43417 \begin_layout Standard
43418 Inserts a program listings box.
43419 Program listings are explained in the chapter
43421 Program Code Listings
43426 \begin_inset space ~
43434 \begin_layout Subsection
43436 \change_deleted -712698321 1533459320
43440 \begin_layout Standard
43442 \change_deleted -712698321 1533459320
43443 Inserts the actual date.
43444 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for
43451 \begin_layout Subsection
43455 \begin_layout Standard
43456 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
43457 \begin_inset space ~
43461 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43463 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
43470 \begin_layout Section
43472 \begin_inset Index idx
43475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43484 \begin_layout Standard
43485 This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc.
43486 \begin_inset space ~
43489 of the current document.
43490 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
43493 \begin_layout Subsection
43497 \begin_layout Standard
43498 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
43499 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have
43500 to jump, for example, between section
43501 \begin_inset space ~
43505 To create bookmarks for this example, go to section
43506 \begin_inset space ~
43509 2.5 and use the submenu
43512 \begin_inset space ~
43516 \begin_inset space ~
43523 \begin_inset space ~
43529 \begin_inset space ~
43533 \begin_inset space ~
43539 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by
43543 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
43549 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
43552 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
43555 \begin_layout Standard
43557 \change_deleted 244031559 1613377262
43558 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
43564 \begin_inset space ~
43569 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
43572 \begin_inset space ~
43577 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
43580 \begin_layout Subsection
43581 Next Note, Change, Cross-reference
43584 \begin_layout Standard
43585 Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference after the current cursor
43589 \begin_layout Subsection
43593 \begin_layout Standard
43594 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
43595 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
43596 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
43600 \begin_inset space ~
43604 \begin_inset space ~
43612 \begin_layout Subsection
43616 \begin_layout Standard
43617 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
43620 The \SpecialChar LyX
43621 Server\SpecialChar menuseparator
43623 \begin_inset space ~
43631 \begin_inset space ~
43636 manual for a detailed description.
43639 \begin_layout Section
43641 \begin_inset Index idx
43644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43653 \begin_layout Subsection
43657 \begin_layout Standard
43658 Change Tracking is described in section
43659 \begin_inset space ~
43663 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43665 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
43672 \begin_layout Subsection
43680 \begin_layout Standard
43681 After running \SpecialChar LaTeX
43682 by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be enabled.
43683 It shows the logfile of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43685 You can go to the next error or the next warning, search, copy something
43686 to the clipboard or update the view.
43687 \begin_inset Newline newline
43690 With the help of the logfile, experts can find reasons for \SpecialChar LaTeX
43694 \begin_layout Standard
43697 Open Containing Directory
43699 one can open \SpecialChar LyX
43700 's temporary folder for the document.
43701 This folder contains all converted and created files to generate the output.
43702 Some of these files might be of interest for experts to solve problems
43703 or for writers who need to supply intermediate files.
43704 For example some journals require to send the
43708 file (a text file with the used Bib\SpecialChar TeX
43712 \begin_layout Subsection
43713 Start Appendix Here
43716 \begin_layout Standard
43717 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position
43718 as described in section
43719 \begin_inset space ~
43723 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43725 reference "sec:Appendices"
43732 \begin_layout Subsection
43734 \begin_inset space ~
43740 \begin_layout Standard
43741 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as
43742 default output format for the document (menu
43744 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43745 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
43746 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
43748 \begin_inset space ~
43752 \begin_inset space ~
43758 \begin_inset space ~
43762 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43764 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
43768 ) or in the \SpecialChar LyX
43771 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43772 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
43774 \begin_inset space ~
43777 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
43779 \begin_inset space ~
43782 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
43784 \begin_inset space ~
43788 \begin_inset space ~
43794 \begin_inset space ~
43798 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43800 reference "sec:File-Formats"
43804 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
43805 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
43807 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43808 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
43810 \begin_inset space ~
43813 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
43815 \begin_inset space ~
43818 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
43822 \begin_inset space ~
43826 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43828 reference "sec:File-Formats"
43833 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
43834 when it is first configured.
43835 The default output format is
43838 \begin_inset space ~
43846 \begin_layout Subsection
43847 View (Other Formats)
43850 \begin_layout Standard
43851 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
43852 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the
43853 actual document with an external program.
43854 The menu entries are not the same on all installations — it depends on
43855 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43856 programs that are found when \SpecialChar LyX
43858 All possible formats are listed in section
43859 \begin_inset space ~
43863 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43865 reference "subsec:Export"
43870 You should at least see the menu entry
43875 If it is missing, you need to update or repair your \SpecialChar LaTeX
43877 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
43879 \begin_inset space ~
43883 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43885 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
43890 \begin_inset Index idx
43893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43894 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
43903 \begin_layout Standard
43904 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
43905 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
43907 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43908 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
43910 \begin_inset space ~
43913 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
43915 \begin_inset space ~
43918 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
43922 \begin_inset space ~
43926 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43928 reference "sec:File-Formats"
43933 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
43934 when it is first configured.
43937 \begin_layout Subsection
43939 \begin_inset space ~
43945 \begin_layout Standard
43946 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in
43947 the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
43950 \begin_layout Subsection
43951 Update (Other Formats)
43954 \begin_layout Standard
43955 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of
43956 your document without opening a new viewer window.
43959 \begin_layout Subsection
43960 View Master Document
43963 \begin_layout Standard
43964 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
43966 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43970 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43980 \begin_inset space ~
43985 manual for more information on this topic).
43986 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
43987 That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a
43991 \begin_inset space ~
43995 \begin_inset space ~
44000 generates the output of the whole book, while
44004 will just output the chapter alone.
44007 \begin_layout Standard
44008 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
44009 in the document settings (menu
44011 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44012 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
44013 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
44015 \begin_inset space ~
44019 \begin_inset space ~
44025 \begin_inset space ~
44029 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44031 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
44035 ) or in the preferences (menu
44037 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
44038 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
44040 \begin_inset space ~
44043 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
44045 \begin_inset space ~
44048 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
44050 \begin_inset space ~
44054 \begin_inset space ~
44060 \begin_inset space ~
44064 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44066 reference "sec:File-Formats"
44073 \begin_layout Subsection
44074 Update Master Document
44077 \begin_layout Standard
44078 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
44080 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44084 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44094 \begin_inset space ~
44099 manual for more information on this topic).
44100 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within
44101 its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
44104 \begin_layout Standard
44105 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
44106 in the document settings (menu
44108 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44109 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
44110 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
44112 \begin_inset space ~
44116 \begin_inset space ~
44122 \begin_inset space ~
44126 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44128 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
44132 ) or in the preferences (menu
44134 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
44135 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
44137 \begin_inset space ~
44140 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
44142 \begin_inset space ~
44145 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
44147 \begin_inset space ~
44151 \begin_inset space ~
44157 \begin_inset space ~
44161 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44163 reference "sec:File-Formats"
44170 \begin_layout Subsection
44172 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44174 name "subsec:Compressed"
44181 \begin_layout Standard
44182 Un/compresses the current document.
44183 For documents under version control it is strongly recommended to disable
44184 compression (see the
44186 Additional Features
44188 manual for details).
44191 \begin_layout Subsection
44195 \begin_layout Standard
44196 Toggles the read-only state for the document.
44199 \begin_layout Subsection
44203 \begin_layout Standard
44204 The document settings are described in appendix
44205 \begin_inset space ~
44209 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44211 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
44218 \begin_layout Section
44220 \begin_inset Index idx
44223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44232 \begin_layout Subsection
44236 \begin_layout Standard
44237 Spell checking is explained in section
44238 \begin_inset space ~
44242 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44244 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
44251 \begin_layout Subsection
44255 \begin_layout Standard
44256 The thesaurus is described in section
44257 \begin_inset space ~
44261 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44263 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
44270 \begin_layout Subsection
44272 \begin_inset Index idx
44275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44282 \begin_inset Index idx
44285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44294 \begin_layout Standard
44295 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or
44296 the highlighted document part.
44299 \begin_layout Subsection
44305 \begin_inset Index idx
44308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44309 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
44318 \begin_layout Standard
44319 Generates with the help of the program
44321 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
44324 a log of possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
44325 -errors and displays it in a dialog.
44326 This feature is not available on Windows.
44329 \begin_layout Subsection
44335 \begin_inset Index idx
44338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44348 \begin_layout Standard
44349 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
44354 \begin_inset space ~
44359 to see the full filename paths.
44362 \begin_layout Subsection
44364 \begin_inset Index idx
44367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44376 \begin_layout Standard
44377 Opens a dialog to compare \SpecialChar LyX
44378 files as described in section
44379 \begin_inset space ~
44383 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44385 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
44392 \begin_layout Subsection
44394 \begin_inset Index idx
44397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44410 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
44415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44428 \begin_inset Index idx
44431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44432 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
44441 \begin_layout Standard
44442 Reconfigures \SpecialChar LyX
44443 ; that is, \SpecialChar LyX
44444 looks for \SpecialChar LaTeX
44445 -packages and programs it needs; see
44447 \begin_inset space ~
44451 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44453 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
44460 \begin_layout Subsection
44464 \begin_layout Standard
44469 dialog as described in detail in appendix
44470 \begin_inset space ~
44474 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44476 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
44483 \begin_layout Section
44485 \begin_inset Index idx
44488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44497 \begin_layout Standard
44498 This menu lists the documentation files of \SpecialChar LyX
44499 in the language of \SpecialChar LyX
44501 If a file is not available in this language, the English version will be
44505 \begin_layout Standard
44509 \begin_inset space ~
44514 shows a \SpecialChar LyX
44515 document with information about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44516 packages and classes found
44517 by \SpecialChar LyX
44519 \begin_inset space ~
44523 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44525 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
44532 \begin_layout Standard
44536 \begin_inset space ~
44541 gives information about the copyright, the credits and the \SpecialChar LyX
44546 \begin_layout Section
44548 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44550 name "sec:Toolbars"
44557 \begin_layout Standard
44558 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
44559 \begin_inset space ~
44563 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44565 reference "subsec:Toolbars"
44572 \begin_layout Standard
44573 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
44574 This is described in the
44576 Additional Features
44581 \begin_layout Subsection
44583 \begin_inset Index idx
44586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44595 \begin_layout Standard
44596 \begin_inset Graphics
44597 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
44605 \begin_layout Standard
44606 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
44612 \begin_layout Standard
44613 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
44618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44630 \begin_inset Note Note
44633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44634 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
44639 manual for more information.
44647 \begin_layout Standard
44648 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
44654 \begin_layout Standard
44655 \begin_inset Tabular
44656 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
44657 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
44658 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
44659 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
44661 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44665 \begin_inset Graphics
44666 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
44676 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44680 pull-down box for the environments
44693 \begin_layout Standard
44694 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
44700 \begin_layout Standard
44702 \begin_inset Tabular
44703 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="24" columns="2">
44704 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
44705 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
44706 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
44707 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44708 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44724 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44730 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
44737 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44738 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44754 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44760 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
44767 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44768 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44784 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44790 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
44797 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44798 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44806 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
44814 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44820 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
44827 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44828 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44836 arg "spelling-continuously"
44844 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44848 Spellcheck continuously
44854 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44855 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44871 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44877 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44884 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44885 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44901 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44907 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44914 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44915 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44931 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44937 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44944 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44945 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44961 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44967 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44974 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44975 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44991 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44997 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44999 \change_inserted -712698321 1545905310
45004 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
45013 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45014 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45022 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
45030 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45036 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
45038 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45042 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45046 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45055 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45056 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45062 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
45070 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45076 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
45078 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45082 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45086 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45095 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45096 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45104 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
45112 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45118 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
45119 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
45126 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45127 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45143 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45147 Emphasize text, function of the
45148 \change_deleted -712698321 1525758222
45151 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
45153 \begin_inset space ~
45156 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
45158 \change_inserted -712698321 1525758222
45164 arg "dialog-show character"
45175 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45176 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45192 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45196 Set text to noun style, function of the
45197 \change_deleted -712698321 1525758226
45200 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
45202 \begin_inset space ~
45205 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
45207 \change_inserted -712698321 1525758226
45213 arg "dialog-show character"
45224 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45225 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45230 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900859
45233 arg "dynamic-char-styles"
45241 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45246 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900930
45249 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
45256 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45257 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45262 \change_deleted -712698321 1545899987
45267 arg "textstyle-apply"
45277 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45282 \change_deleted -712698321 1545900001
45283 Format text using the current settings in the
45285 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
45287 \begin_inset space ~
45290 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
45301 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45302 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45318 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45324 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45325 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
45327 \begin_inset space ~
45336 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45337 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45345 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
45353 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45359 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45366 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45367 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45373 arg "tabular-insert"
45381 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45387 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45394 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45395 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45400 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900837
45403 arg "dynamic-custom-insets"
45411 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45416 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900953
45419 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45426 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45427 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45435 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
45443 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45447 Toggle outline window on/off,
45449 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
45456 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45457 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45465 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
45473 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45477 Toggle math toolbar on/off
45483 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45484 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45492 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
45500 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45504 Toggle table toolbar on/off
45517 \begin_layout Subsection
45519 \begin_inset Index idx
45522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45531 \begin_layout Standard
45532 \begin_inset Graphics
45533 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
45541 \begin_layout Standard
45542 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
45548 \begin_layout Standard
45549 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
45553 \begin_layout Standard
45554 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
45560 \begin_layout Standard
45561 \begin_inset Tabular
45562 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="26" columns="2">
45563 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
45564 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
45565 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
45566 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45567 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45583 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45593 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45594 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45602 arg "layout-toggle Enumerate"
45610 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45620 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45621 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45629 arg "layout-toggle Itemize"
45637 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45647 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45648 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45656 arg "layout-toggle List"
45664 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45674 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45675 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45683 arg "layout-toggle Description"
45691 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45701 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45702 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45710 arg "depth-increment"
45718 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45724 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
45726 \begin_inset space ~
45730 \begin_inset space ~
45739 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45740 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45748 arg "depth-decrement"
45756 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45762 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
45764 \begin_inset space ~
45768 \begin_inset space ~
45777 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45778 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45786 arg "float-insert figure"
45794 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45800 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45801 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
45808 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45809 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45817 arg "float-insert table"
45825 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45831 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45832 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
45839 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45840 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45856 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45862 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45869 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45870 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45878 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
45886 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45892 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45899 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45900 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45908 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
45916 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45922 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45929 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45930 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45946 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45952 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45954 \begin_inset space ~
45963 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45964 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45972 arg "nomencl-insert"
45980 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45986 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45988 \begin_inset space ~
45997 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45998 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46006 arg "footnote-insert"
46014 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46020 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
46027 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46028 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46036 arg "marginalnote-insert"
46044 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46050 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
46052 \begin_inset space ~
46061 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46062 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46078 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46084 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
46085 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
46087 \begin_inset space ~
46096 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46097 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46105 arg "box-insert Frameless"
46113 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46119 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
46126 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46127 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46143 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46149 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
46156 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46157 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46173 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46179 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
46181 \begin_inset space ~
46190 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46191 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46199 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
46207 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46213 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
46214 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
46221 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46222 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46230 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
46238 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46244 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
46245 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
46247 \begin_inset space ~
46256 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46257 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46265 arg "dialog-show character"
46273 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46279 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
46281 \begin_inset space ~
46284 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
46291 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46292 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46297 \change_inserted -712698321 1545899981
46302 arg "textstyle-apply"
46310 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46315 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900045
46316 Format text using the recent settings in the
46319 arg "dialog-show character"
46328 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46329 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46337 arg "layout-paragraph"
46345 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46351 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
46353 \begin_inset space ~
46362 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46363 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46371 arg "thesaurus-entry"
46379 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46385 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
46399 \begin_layout Subsection
46400 View/Update Toolbar
46401 \begin_inset Index idx
46404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46405 Toolbar ! View / Update
46413 \begin_layout Standard
46414 \begin_inset Graphics
46415 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
46422 \begin_layout Standard
46423 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
46429 \begin_layout Standard
46430 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
46434 \begin_layout Standard
46435 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
46441 \begin_layout Standard
46442 \begin_inset Tabular
46443 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
46444 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
46445 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
46446 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
46447 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46448 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46464 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46470 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46477 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46478 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46486 arg "buffer-update"
46494 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46500 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46507 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46508 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46516 arg "master-buffer-view"
46524 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46530 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46532 \change_inserted -131811572 1600333746
46534 \begin_inset space ~
46540 \begin_inset space ~
46549 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46550 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46558 arg "master-buffer-update"
46566 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46572 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46574 \begin_inset space ~
46578 \begin_inset space ~
46587 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46588 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46596 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
46604 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46610 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46611 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
46613 \change_deleted -131811572 1600333766
46615 \change_inserted -131811572 1600333762
46618 \SpecialChar menuseparator
46619 Synchronize with Output
46625 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46626 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46636 \change_deleted -712698321 1545901299
46646 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46652 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46653 View (Other Formats)
46659 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46660 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46666 arg "update-others"
46670 \change_deleted -712698321 1545901301
46678 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46684 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46685 Update (Other Formats)
46698 \begin_layout Standard
46700 \change_deleted -712698321 1545901302
46701 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default
46707 \begin_layout Subsection
46711 \begin_layout Standard
46712 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
46713 \begin_inset space ~
46717 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46719 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
46723 , the table toolbar
46724 \begin_inset Index idx
46727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46736 \begin_inset space ~
46741 manual and the math macro toolbar
46742 \begin_inset Index idx
46745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46758 \begin_layout Chapter
46759 The Document Settings
46760 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46762 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
46767 \begin_inset Index idx
46770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46771 Document ! Settings
46779 \begin_layout Standard
46783 \begin_inset space ~
46788 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and
46789 is called with the menu
46791 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46795 You can save your document settings as default with the
46797 Save as Document Defaults
46799 button in any dialog.
46800 This will create a template named
46804 which is automatically loaded by \SpecialChar LyX
46805 when you create a new document without
46809 \begin_layout Standard
46814 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
46815 This affects mostly class options, the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
46818 \begin_layout Standard
46819 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
46820 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while
46821 to find the one you are looking for.
46822 To find a setting quicker, you can use the search field which is above
46823 the submenus of the dialog.
46825 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46829 \begin_inset space \space{}
46833 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46837 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46840 , you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
46841 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
46842 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
46845 \begin_layout Section
46849 \begin_layout Standard
46850 Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a
46852 Document classes are described in section
46853 \begin_inset space ~
46857 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46859 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
46866 \begin_layout Standard
46870 \begin_inset space ~
46875 you can load you own layout-file, that is not in \SpecialChar LyX
46880 folder and thus not recognized by \SpecialChar LyX
46881 as a layout for a document class.
46882 For more about layout-files, see the chapter
46884 Installing New Document Classes, Types of Layout Files
46893 \begin_layout Standard
46894 Some classes use special class options by default.
46895 If this is the case, they are listed in the field
46899 and you can decide to use them or not.
46900 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for, it is
46901 recommended you leave them untouched.
46906 is used for \SpecialChar LaTeX
46907 's graphics, color and page layout packages.
46912 , the default driver for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46914 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are
46919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46920 When you want to use one of the following drivers
46921 \begin_inset Newline newline
46926 dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln
46929 \begin_inset Newline newline
46932 you first have to activate them in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
46933 distribution, see section
46938 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46940 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
46953 \begin_layout Standard
46958 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
46959 The master document will be used by \SpecialChar LyX
46960 in the background if the child document
46961 is opened without its master.
46962 This way child documents are always compilable.
46963 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
46970 \begin_inset space ~
46978 \begin_layout Standard
46979 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46990 \begin_inset Index idx
46993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46995 packages ! prettyref
47001 \begin_inset Index idx
47004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47006 packages ! refstyle
47011 for cross-references, see section
47012 \begin_inset space ~
47016 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47018 reference "sec:Cross-References"
47025 \begin_layout Section
47029 \begin_layout Standard
47030 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
47031 Please refer to the section
47034 \begin_inset space ~
47042 \begin_inset space ~
47047 manual for details.
47050 \begin_layout Section
47054 \begin_layout Standard
47055 Modules are explained in section
47056 \begin_inset space ~
47060 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47062 reference "subsec:Modules"
47069 \begin_layout Section
47073 \begin_layout Standard
47075 \begin_inset space ~
47079 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47081 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
47088 \begin_layout Section
47092 \begin_layout Standard
47093 The document font settings are described in section
47094 \begin_inset space ~
47098 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47100 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
47107 \begin_layout Section
47111 \begin_layout Standard
47112 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
47124 \begin_inset space ~
47129 and whether it should be a
47132 \begin_inset space ~
47137 can also be specified here.
47140 \begin_layout Standard
47141 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
47142 will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on screen.
47143 That would be impractical, often unreadable, and is not part of the WYSIWYM
47145 However, it will be as you specified in the output.
47148 \begin_layout Standard
47151 Use justification in \SpecialChar LyX
47154 you can decide if \SpecialChar LyX
47155 justifies the text on screen.
47156 This only affects the text inside \SpecialChar LyX
47158 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288869
47162 \begin_layout Standard
47164 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288904
47173 lets you select which style newly inserted tables should use by default.
47178 \begin_layout Section
47182 \begin_layout Standard
47183 This dialog is described in sections
47184 \begin_inset space ~
47188 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47190 reference "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
47195 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47197 reference "subsec:Document-Layout"
47204 \begin_layout Section
47208 \begin_layout Standard
47209 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
47210 \begin_inset space ~
47214 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47216 reference "subsec:Margins"
47223 \begin_layout Section
47225 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47227 name "sec:Language-encodings"
47232 \begin_inset Index idx
47235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47236 Language ! Encoding
47244 \begin_layout Standard
47245 The document language and quote styles are set here.
47246 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
47247 (the \SpecialChar LyX
47249 is always encoded in utf8).
47250 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will
47251 be exported as \SpecialChar LaTeX
47252 -commands (this can fail if a \SpecialChar LaTeX
47253 -command is not known for
47254 a particular character).
47255 \change_inserted -712698321 1557594829
47259 \begin_layout Standard
47261 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596095
47262 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
47263 outputs \SpecialChar LaTeX
47264 files in Unicode – or utf8, for that matter (which
47265 is nowadays also \SpecialChar LaTeX
47266 's default encoding).
47267 This should normally fit your needs, since \SpecialChar LaTeX
47268 's Unicode support covers the
47269 characters of most scripts.
47270 Nonetheless it is not yet comprehensive, so there might be cases where
47271 using one of the traditional, or
47272 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47276 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47279 , encodings is necessary.
47282 \begin_layout Standard
47284 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596136
47286 provides support for these traditional encodings.
47289 Traditional (auto-selected)
47295 dropdown, \SpecialChar LyX
47296 automatically selects the appropriate traditional encoding for
47297 the given language(s).
47299 \change_deleted -712698321 1557595310
47303 \begin_layout Standard
47305 \change_deleted -712698321 1557595310
47306 If you use the option
47311 determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
47314 If the document contains text in more than one language you
47315 \change_inserted -712698321 1557595342
47318 may get more than one encoding in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47321 \change_deleted -712698321 1557595350
47322 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use
47323 exactly one encoding.
47324 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
47329 \begin_layout Standard
47331 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596155
47332 As a third option, \SpecialChar LyX
47338 If this is chosen, any character outside the 7bit ASCII range will be output
47339 as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
47343 \begin_layout Standard
47345 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645585
47346 Finally, you can also select
47350 , which lets you specify a specific (single) encoding for the whole document.
47351 Note that this encoding is then used for
47356 The custom list (which is spelled out below) consists of traditional encodings
47357 and some special cases of Unicode for specific purposes (see explanation
47361 \begin_layout Standard
47363 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645268
47366 Do not load inputenc
47368 checkbox does what it states: It prevents \SpecialChar LyX
47369 from automatically loading the
47376 \begin_inset Index idx
47379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47381 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645185
47383 packages ! inputenc
47391 This option might be useful if you use a class or package that pre-loads
47392 inputenc or if inputenc must not be used for some reason.
47393 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
47394 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
47395 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
47397 Note that this option is only available for the standard
47403 Traditional (auto-selected)
47410 \begin_layout Standard
47412 \change_deleted -712698321 1557596063
47414 also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need
47415 lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively.
47416 If you want to use this (and your \SpecialChar LaTeX
47417 installation supports Unicode), choose
47418 one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
47419 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
47420 is quite incomplete, so
47421 it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine
47426 (when \SpecialChar LyX
47427 uses its list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
47428 -commands), but does not work with a fixed
47429 utf8 encoding (when the list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
47430 -commands is not used, because all
47431 Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
47432 The situation is much better with Xe\SpecialChar TeX
47433 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
47434 , two new alternative engines
47435 to standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
47437 Both engines support Unicode natively.
47439 now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
47442 \begin_inset space ~
47450 \begin_inset space ~
47458 \begin_inset space ~
47464 \begin_inset space ~
47468 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47470 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
47475 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
47479 fails, you might try out one of these new engines.
47484 \begin_layout Standard
47488 \begin_inset space ~
47493 determines the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47494 -package that is used for hyphenation and the translation
47496 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47500 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47504 The possible settings are:
47507 \begin_layout Description
47508 Default uses the language package that is selected in
47510 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
47511 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
47515 \begin_inset space ~
47519 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47521 reference "subsec:Prefs-Language"
47528 \begin_layout Description
47529 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export
47530 format you will use.
47531 In many cases this will be
47536 \begin_inset Index idx
47539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47547 If the newer package
47552 \begin_inset Index idx
47555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47557 packages ! polyglossia
47562 is more appropriate (is the case when using Xe\SpecialChar TeX
47563 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
47564 and non-\SpecialChar TeX
47566 this package will be used instead of
47573 \begin_layout Description
47575 \begin_inset space ~
47586 would be more appropriate.
47589 \begin_layout Description
47590 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
47591 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
47595 (for German texts), type in
47598 \begin_inset Newline newline
47603 usepackage{ngerman}
47606 \begin_layout Description
47607 None will not use a language package.
47608 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
47611 \begin_layout Standard
47612 Here is a list with the important encodings:
47615 \begin_layout Description
47617 \change_deleted -712698321 1557645284
47619 \begin_inset space ~
47623 \begin_inset space ~
47627 \begin_inset space ~
47634 , but the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47640 \begin_inset Index idx
47643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47645 packages ! inputenc
47651 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
47652 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
47653 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
47659 \begin_layout Description
47660 ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
47662 converts all other characters into \SpecialChar LaTeX
47663 commands, which may result in a big
47664 file when lots of \SpecialChar LaTeX
47665 -commands are needed.
47667 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596221
47668 This is the same as the
47681 \begin_layout Description
47683 \begin_inset space ~
47687 \begin_inset space ~
47690 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
47693 \begin_layout Description
47695 \begin_inset space ~
47699 \begin_inset space ~
47702 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
47705 \begin_layout Description
47707 \begin_inset space ~
47710 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
47713 \begin_layout Description
47715 \begin_inset space ~
47719 \begin_inset space ~
47722 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same
47723 as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
47726 \begin_layout Description
47728 \begin_inset space ~
47732 \begin_inset space ~
47735 8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4
47739 \begin_layout Description
47741 \begin_inset space ~
47745 \begin_inset space ~
47748 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the
47749 ISO-8859-13 encoding
47752 \begin_layout Description
47754 \begin_inset space ~
47758 \begin_inset space ~
47762 \begin_inset space ~
47765 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
47766 \begin_inset space ~
47772 \begin_layout Description
47774 \begin_inset space ~
47778 \begin_inset space ~
47782 \begin_inset space ~
47785 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish,
47786 Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian
47789 \begin_layout Description
47791 \begin_inset space ~
47795 \begin_inset space ~
47798 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001
47799 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030
47800 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
47801 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
47802 \begin_inset space ~
47806 \begin_inset space ~
47812 \begin_layout Description
47814 \begin_inset space ~
47818 \begin_inset space ~
47821 (GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936
47822 except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially
47823 replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
47825 should try to use the encoding Unicode
47826 \begin_inset space ~
47830 \begin_inset space ~
47836 \begin_layout Description
47838 \begin_inset space ~
47842 \begin_inset space ~
47845 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
47848 \begin_layout Description
47850 \begin_inset space ~
47854 \begin_inset space ~
47857 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
47860 \begin_layout Description
47862 \begin_inset space ~
47866 \begin_inset space ~
47869 8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian
47872 \begin_layout Description
47874 \begin_inset space ~
47877 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
47880 \begin_layout Description
47882 \begin_inset space ~
47885 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
47888 \begin_layout Description
47890 \begin_inset space ~
47894 \begin_inset space ~
47897 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
47900 \begin_layout Description
47902 \begin_inset space ~
47906 \begin_inset space ~
47912 \begin_layout Description
47914 \begin_inset space ~
47918 \begin_inset space ~
47921 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
47924 \begin_layout Description
47926 \begin_inset space ~
47930 \begin_inset space ~
47936 \begin_layout Description
47938 \begin_inset space ~
47942 \begin_inset space ~
47945 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47951 \begin_inset Index idx
47954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47961 , when using this, set the document language to
47966 \begin_layout Description
47968 \begin_inset space ~
47972 \begin_inset space ~
47975 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47980 , when using this, set the document language to
47983 \begin_inset space ~
47989 \begin_layout Description
47991 \begin_inset space ~
47995 \begin_inset space ~
47998 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48004 \begin_inset Index idx
48007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48009 packages ! japanese
48014 , when using this, set the document language to
48019 \begin_layout Description
48021 \begin_inset space ~
48025 \begin_inset space ~
48028 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48033 , when using this, set the document language to
48038 \begin_layout Description
48040 \begin_inset space ~
48044 \begin_inset space ~
48047 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48052 , when using this, set the document language to
48057 \begin_layout Description
48059 \begin_inset space ~
48062 (EUC-KR) for Korean
48065 \begin_layout Description
48067 \begin_inset space ~
48071 \begin_inset space ~
48075 \begin_inset space ~
48078 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish
48081 \begin_layout Description
48083 \begin_inset space ~
48087 \begin_inset space ~
48091 \begin_inset space ~
48094 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German,
48095 Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed
48096 to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
48099 \begin_layout Description
48101 \begin_inset space ~
48105 \begin_inset space ~
48111 \begin_layout Description
48113 \begin_inset space ~
48117 \begin_inset space ~
48120 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the
48121 Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
48124 \begin_layout Description
48126 \begin_inset space ~
48130 \begin_inset space ~
48133 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48139 \begin_inset Index idx
48142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48149 (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean)
48150 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596410
48152 This encoding is selected by \SpecialChar LyX
48153 with the default encoding (
48155 Unicode (utf8) [default]
48161 dropdown list) with CJK languages.
48162 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
48167 \begin_layout Description
48169 \begin_inset space ~
48177 \begin_inset space ~
48180 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
48187 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
48190 , which use Unicode directly, without the help of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48197 automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview Xe\SpecialChar TeX
48198 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
48200 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
48203 \begin_layout Description
48205 \begin_inset space ~
48209 \begin_inset space ~
48212 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48218 \begin_inset Index idx
48221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48229 \change_deleted -712698321 1557596443
48232 including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
48234 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596475
48235 This used to be more comprehensive than
48238 \begin_inset space ~
48243 , but meanwhile it is rather outdated.
48248 \begin_layout Description
48250 \begin_inset space ~
48253 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48259 \begin_inset Index idx
48262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48264 packages ! inputenc
48271 \change_deleted -712698321 1557596266
48272 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts)
48274 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596400
48275 This encoding is selected by \SpecialChar LyX
48276 with the default encoding (
48278 Unicode (utf8) [default]
48284 dropdown list) with non-CJK languages.
48285 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
48290 \begin_layout Description
48292 \begin_inset space ~
48296 \begin_inset space ~
48300 \begin_inset space ~
48303 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
48304 \begin_inset space ~
48310 \begin_layout Description
48312 \begin_inset space ~
48316 \begin_inset space ~
48320 \begin_inset space ~
48323 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
48324 English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish,
48325 Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15
48329 \begin_layout Description
48331 \begin_inset space ~
48335 \begin_inset space ~
48339 \begin_inset space ~
48342 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency
48343 sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
48346 \begin_layout Section
48348 \begin_inset Index idx
48351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48358 \begin_inset Index idx
48361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48368 \begin_inset Index idx
48371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48372 Color ! Shaded boxes
48378 \begin_inset Index idx
48381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48382 Color ! Greyed-out notes
48390 \begin_layout Standard
48391 Here you can alter the font color for the
48395 (default: black), for
48398 \begin_inset space ~
48403 (default: light grey)for the background color for the
48407 (default: white) and for
48410 \begin_inset space ~
48420 sets the color back to the default.
48423 \begin_layout Standard
48424 Clicking any button showing
48432 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from
48433 a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
48434 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them
48435 later more quickly.
48438 \begin_layout Standard
48439 Note, if you change the
48442 \begin_inset space ~
48447 font color and use the option
48450 \begin_inset space ~
48455 in the document settings under
48458 \begin_inset space ~
48463 , you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
48464 \begin_inset space ~
48468 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48470 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
48477 \begin_layout Standard
48478 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
48484 \begin_layout Standard
48488 \begin_inset space ~
48497 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as
48500 \begin_inset space ~
48503 Code after a forced page break:
48506 \begin_layout Itemize
48507 For the page color:
48508 \begin_inset Newline newline
48515 pagecolor{color name}
48518 \begin_layout Itemize
48519 For the text color:
48520 \begin_inset Newline newline
48530 \begin_layout Standard
48531 You are restricted to one of
48567 unless you have defined your own color (see the section
48574 \begin_inset space ~
48580 \begin_inset Newline newline
48583 If you have changed a text or background color, you can use the following
48584 names to refer to them:
48587 \begin_layout Itemize
48593 \begin_inset Newline newline
48598 page_backgroundcolor
48601 \begin_layout Itemize
48605 \begin_inset space ~
48611 \begin_inset Newline newline
48619 \begin_layout Itemize
48623 \begin_inset space ~
48629 \begin_inset Newline newline
48637 \begin_layout Itemize
48641 \begin_inset space ~
48647 \begin_inset Newline newline
48655 \begin_layout Standard
48656 To see how to define and use custom colors, see section
48659 \begin_inset space ~
48667 \begin_inset space ~
48675 \begin_layout Section
48677 \change_inserted -712698321 1577206827
48681 \begin_layout Standard
48683 \change_inserted -712698321 1577206929
48684 Here you can do some settings related to change tracking (see sec.
48685 \begin_inset space ~
48689 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48691 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
48699 Alternatively to the menu or toolbar, you can set here whether changes
48700 are being tracked and whether they are shown in the output.
48703 \begin_layout Standard
48705 \change_inserted -712698321 1577207214
48706 Additionally, you can advise LyX to place a change bar in the margin of
48708 This might be useful to make changed passages more salient.
48711 \begin_layout Section
48715 \begin_layout Standard
48716 Here you can adjust the
48720 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
48724 as described in section
48725 \begin_inset space ~
48729 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48731 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
48736 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620045
48740 \begin_layout Standard
48742 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620379
48743 You can typeset lines numbering in the output file by enabling the checkbox
48745 The functionality is handled by package lineno and additional options of
48746 this package can be used as well.
48747 The most common one are:
48750 \begin_layout Description
48752 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620630
48753 right Line numbers to the right margin
48756 \begin_layout Description
48758 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620589
48759 switch Line number to the outer margin (left – even pages, right – odd pages)
48763 \begin_layout Description
48765 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620637
48766 switch* Line numbers to the inner margin
48769 \begin_layout Description
48771 \change_inserted 5863208 1601989692
48772 modulo Print numbers only on multiples of five lines
48775 \begin_layout Description
48777 \change_inserted 5863208 1601989752
48778 pagewise Restart numbering for each page
48781 \begin_layout Description
48783 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620792
48785 \begin_inset space ~
48788 mathlines Line numbers for math environments (both options needed).
48793 \begin_layout Section
48797 \begin_layout Standard
48798 Here you can specify if a specific citation style using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48804 \begin_inset Index idx
48807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48809 packages ! biblatex
48819 \begin_inset Index idx
48822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48834 \begin_inset Index idx
48837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48845 If you use Bib\SpecialChar TeX
48848 Sectioned bibliography
48850 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48856 \begin_inset Index idx
48859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48861 packages ! bibtopic
48871 , you can select the style files and specify further options.
48872 Finally, you can select a document-specific
48876 for the generation of the bibliography.
48877 For a further description of these possibilities see section
48878 \begin_inset space ~
48882 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48884 reference "sec:Bibliography"
48891 \begin_layout Section
48895 \begin_layout Standard
48896 Here you can define the
48900 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see
48902 \begin_inset space ~
48906 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48908 reference "sec:Index"
48915 \begin_layout Section
48919 \begin_layout Standard
48920 The PDF properties are explained in section
48921 \begin_inset space ~
48925 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48927 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
48934 \begin_layout Section
48938 \begin_layout Standard
48939 These options will force \SpecialChar LyX
48940 to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48946 \begin_inset Index idx
48949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48961 \begin_inset Index idx
48964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48976 \begin_inset Index idx
48979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48991 \begin_inset Index idx
48994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49006 \begin_inset Index idx
49009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49011 packages ! mathdots
49021 \begin_inset Index idx
49024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49026 packages ! mathtools
49036 \begin_inset Index idx
49039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49051 \begin_inset Index idx
49054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49056 packages ! stackrel
49066 \begin_inset Index idx
49069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49071 packages ! stmaryrd
49081 \begin_inset Index idx
49084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49086 packages ! undertilde
49091 , or to use them automatically when they are needed.
49094 \begin_layout Description
49095 amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
49096 -errors in formulas,
49097 ensure that you have this enabled.
49100 \begin_layout Description
49101 amssymb is needed for some special math symbols like bold or upright Greek
49102 letters, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
49103 -errors in formulas, ensure that you have this
49107 \begin_layout Description
49108 cancel is used for canceled formulas, see section
49111 \begin_inset space ~
49123 \begin_layout Description
49124 esint is used for special integral characters, see section
49127 \begin_inset space ~
49139 \begin_layout Description
49140 mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section
49151 \begin_layout Description
49152 mathtools is used for the math commands
49188 and labeled arrows, see the corresponding sections in the
49195 \begin_layout Description
49196 mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section
49198 Chemical Symbols and Equations
49207 \begin_layout Description
49208 stackrel is used for the math command
49225 \begin_layout Description
49226 stmaryrd is used for a few special math symbols.
49229 \begin_layout Description
49230 undertilde is used for the math command
49238 Accents for one Character
49247 \begin_layout Section
49249 \change_deleted -712698321 1526030304
49251 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030306
49257 \begin_layout Standard
49259 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030352
49260 Here you can set global float placement and alignment options.
49263 \begin_layout Standard
49265 \change_deleted -712698321 1526030366
49266 The float placement options
49267 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030367
49270 are described in the section
49273 \begin_inset space ~
49277 \change_deleted -712698321 1526031799
49279 \change_inserted -712698321 1526031800
49287 \begin_inset space ~
49295 \begin_layout Section
49299 \begin_layout Standard
49300 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
49302 Program Code Listings
49307 \begin_inset space ~
49315 \begin_layout Section
49319 \begin_layout Standard
49320 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
49328 set to be used and set the
49333 The itemize environment is described in section
49334 \begin_inset space ~
49338 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49340 reference "sec:Itemize"
49347 \begin_layout Standard
49348 You can furthermore specify a
49351 \begin_inset space ~
49356 by inserting in this field the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49357 command of the desired character.
49358 For example to use the € sign, you have to insert the command
49365 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
49367 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49371 \begin_inset space \space{}
49375 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
49385 To find the command for a math symbol, create a formula and hover the mouse
49386 over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
49389 \begin_layout Standard
49390 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
49393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49398 Some characters require to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
49399 -packages in the preamble (menu
49402 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
49403 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
49406 \begin_inset space ~
49412 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
49416 usepackage{textcomp}
49419 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
49423 usepackage{amssymb}
49433 \begin_layout Section
49437 \begin_layout Standard
49438 Branches are described in section
49439 \begin_inset space ~
49443 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49445 reference "sec:Branches"
49452 \begin_layout Section
49454 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49456 name "sec:Doc-Formats"
49463 \begin_layout Standard
49464 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
49467 \begin_layout Description
49469 \begin_inset space ~
49473 \begin_inset space ~
49476 Format: The format that is used when you enter
49477 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49481 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49485 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49489 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49493 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49496 View Master Document
49497 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49501 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49504 Update Master Document
49505 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49512 menu or the toolbar.
49513 The default is set in
49515 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
49516 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
49518 \begin_inset space ~
49521 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
49525 \begin_inset space ~
49529 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49531 reference "sec:File-Formats"
49538 \begin_layout Description
49540 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647276
49542 \begin_inset space ~
49546 \begin_inset space ~
49550 \begin_inset space ~
49553 programs If this is switched on, \SpecialChar LaTeX
49558 option which is needed with some packages.
49559 Note that this comes with security risks, so please use this only when
49560 really necessary and if you know what you are doing.
49563 \begin_layout Description
49565 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647006
49567 \begin_inset space ~
49571 \begin_inset space ~
49574 Options offers settings for the
49582 \begin_layout Itemize
49586 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646679
49588 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646679
49590 \begin_inset space ~
49596 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646686
49598 \begin_inset space ~
49602 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646686
49608 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646719
49610 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646729
49611 settings for the menu
49613 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
49617 \begin_inset space ~
49621 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646752
49624 and allows to customize the macro used in this process
49625 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646757
49630 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646759
49632 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646759
49634 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646759
49637 or a detailed description see section
49639 Reverse DVI/PDF search
49644 \begin_inset space ~
49650 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646762
49654 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647009
49658 \begin_layout Itemize
49660 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647929
49663 Put fragile content out of moving arguments
49665 determines whether so-called
49666 \begin_inset Quotes els
49670 \begin_inset Quotes ers
49674 constructs (such as labels or index entries) are placed outside of so-called
49676 \begin_inset Quotes els
49680 \begin_inset Quotes ers
49683 in \SpecialChar LaTeX
49684 (such as sections or captions), even if the corresponding insets are
49685 placed in such context in \SpecialChar LyX
49687 This setting is on by default, since it prevents nasty \SpecialChar LaTeX
49689 If you rely on labels or index entries being kept inside the problematic
49690 macros, you can uncheck this.
49691 If you don't know what we are talking about here, worry not: just leave
49698 \begin_layout Description
49700 \begin_inset space ~
49704 \begin_inset space ~
49707 Options offers settings for the export format
49715 \begin_inset space ~
49720 will assure that the output follows exactly version
49721 \begin_inset space ~
49724 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
49728 \begin_inset space ~
49733 settings are described in detail in section
49735 Math Output in XHTML
49740 \begin_inset space ~
49749 \begin_inset space ~
49753 \begin_inset space ~
49758 is used for the size of equations in the output.
49761 \begin_layout Description
49763 \begin_inset space ~
49768 Save transient properties
49770 controls whether document settings that are frequently switched or that
49771 are specific to the user are saved with the document.
49772 The properties that are affected by option are currently:
49776 \begin_layout Itemize
49777 the activation of change tracking
49780 \begin_layout Itemize
49781 the output of tracked changes
49784 \begin_layout Itemize
49785 the recording of the document directory path.
49788 \begin_layout Standard
49789 Disabling the option can prevent issues in collaborative work and/or when
49790 using a version control system (for instance unnecessary merge conflicts).
49794 \begin_layout Section
49802 \begin_layout Standard
49803 In this text field you can enter commands to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
49805 define \SpecialChar LaTeX
49807 The preamble is a thing for \SpecialChar LaTeX
49809 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are
49813 \begin_layout Standard
49814 An introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49815 -syntax is given in section
49816 \begin_inset space ~
49820 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49822 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
49829 \begin_layout Chapter
49835 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49837 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
49842 \begin_inset Index idx
49845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49854 \begin_layout Standard
49855 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
49857 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
49861 It has the following submenus.
49864 \begin_layout Section
49868 \begin_layout Subsection
49872 \begin_layout Subsubsection
49873 User Interface File
49874 \begin_inset Index idx
49877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49878 Customization ! of toolbars
49884 \begin_inset Index idx
49887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49888 Customization ! of menus
49896 \begin_layout Standard
49897 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user
49898 interface (ui) file.
49899 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
49907 \begin_layout Description
49912 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
49915 \begin_layout Description
49922 the menu entries in popup context menus
49925 \begin_layout Description
49930 specifies the toolbar buttons
49933 \begin_layout Standard
49934 To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these files
49935 and edit the entries.
49938 \begin_layout Standard
49939 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: the
49951 entries must be finished with an explicit
49976 and in the case of the
49977 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49981 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49989 The syntax for the entries is:
49992 \begin_layout Standard
49993 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
49999 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50007 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50011 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50016 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50022 \begin_layout Standard
50024 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
50027 All the \SpecialChar LyX
50028 -functions are listed in the menu
50030 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
50032 \begin_inset space ~
50040 \begin_layout Standard
50041 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
50047 \begin_layout Standard
50048 For example, assuming you use the menu
50050 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
50053 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the
50057 \begin_layout Standard
50058 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
50064 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50068 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50072 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50076 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50082 \begin_layout Standard
50084 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
50088 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50092 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50099 to have the sixth bookmark.
50102 \begin_layout Standard
50106 \begin_inset space ~
50111 allows you to change the appearance of \SpecialChar LyX
50112 's toolbar buttons.
50113 The currently available icon sets are compared in
50114 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50117 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
50125 \begin_layout Subsubsection
50129 \begin_layout Standard
50132 Enable tool tips in main work area
50134 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries
50138 \begin_layout Subsubsection
50142 \begin_layout Standard
50147 is the number of last opened files that \SpecialChar LyX
50148 should display in the menu
50150 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
50152 \begin_inset space ~
50160 \begin_layout Subsection
50164 \begin_layout Subsubsection
50168 \begin_layout Standard
50171 Restore window layouts and geometries
50174 's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used in
50175 the last \SpecialChar LyX
50179 \begin_layout Standard
50182 Restore cursor positions
50184 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of
50188 \begin_layout Standard
50191 Load opened files from last session
50193 opens all files that were opened in the last \SpecialChar LyX
50197 \begin_layout Standard
50200 Clear all session information
50202 deletes all information from previous \SpecialChar LyX
50203 sessions (cursor positions, names
50204 of last opened documents, etc.).
50207 \begin_layout Subsubsection
50209 \begin_inset CommandInset label
50211 name "subsec:Backup documents"
50216 \begin_inset Index idx
50219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50228 \begin_layout Standard
50231 Backup original documents when saving
50233 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when
50234 it was saved the last time.
50235 It is stored in the
50238 \begin_inset space ~
50244 \begin_inset space ~
50248 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50250 reference "sec:Paths"
50254 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
50257 \begin_inset space ~
50263 The backup file has the file extension
50264 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50272 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50278 \begin_layout Standard
50281 Backup documents, every
50283 , you can specify the time between backup saves.
50286 \begin_layout Standard
50289 Save documents compressed by default
50291 always saves files in a compressed format (see also section
50292 \begin_inset space ~
50296 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50298 reference "subsec:Compressed"
50303 This applies to newly created documents only.
50304 The compression status of existing documents is not changed when saving.
50307 \begin_layout Subsubsection
50308 Windows & work area
50311 \begin_layout Standard
50314 Open documents in tabs
50316 is not checked, every file will be opened in its own new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
50320 \begin_layout Standard
50325 is only active if a \SpecialChar LyX
50330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50332 \begin_inset space ~
50336 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50338 reference "sec:Paths"
50342 for information about \SpecialChar LyX
50349 If it is checked, \SpecialChar LyX
50350 documents will be opened in the same running instance
50351 of \SpecialChar LyX
50353 Otherwise a new \SpecialChar LyX
50354 instance is created for each file.
50357 \begin_layout Standard
50360 Single close-tab button
50362 is checked, there will only be one close button (
50372 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
50373 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
50374 Regardless of this option, one can always close a tab by middle-clicking
50378 \begin_layout Standard
50379 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
50382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50387 For this option you have to restart \SpecialChar LyX
50388 before the change takes effect.
50396 \begin_layout Standard
50401 you one can decide if a document is closed or hidden when its tab or view
50403 Hidden documents are accessible via the menu
50405 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
50409 Not to close documents can be useful if you open files parallel in several
50410 instances of \SpecialChar LyX
50411 and only want to close the view in once instance.
50414 \begin_layout Subsection
50416 \begin_inset Index idx
50419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50426 \begin_inset CommandInset label
50428 name "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
50435 \begin_layout Standard
50436 These fonts are used to display your documents within \SpecialChar LyX
50440 \begin_layout Standard
50441 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
50444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50449 This section only deals with the fonts
50453 the \SpecialChar LyX
50455 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts, and
50458 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
50459 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
50470 \begin_layout Standard
50471 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
50488 (depends on the system) as its
50491 \begin_inset space ~
50507 \begin_layout Standard
50508 You can change the font size with the
50515 \begin_layout Standard
50520 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
50522 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50525 points have the size of 1
50526 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50530 \begin_inset space ~
50534 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50536 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
50541 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
50542 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50546 The sizes are explained in detail in section
50547 \begin_inset space ~
50551 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50553 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
50560 \begin_layout Subsection
50562 \begin_inset Index idx
50565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50566 Color ! \SpecialChar LyX
50573 \begin_inset Index idx
50576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50585 \begin_layout Standard
50586 Here you can change the screen colors used by \SpecialChar LyX
50587 by choosing an item in the
50588 list and selecting the
50595 \begin_layout Standard
50596 By checking the option
50600 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
50603 cursor, selection, table line, text, URL
50604 \begin_inset space ~
50608 \begin_inset space ~
50613 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
50616 \begin_layout Subsection
50618 \begin_inset Index idx
50621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50630 \begin_layout Standard
50631 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside \SpecialChar LyX
50635 \begin_layout Standard
50640 enables previewing snippets of your document.
50641 This feature is described in section
50642 \begin_inset space ~
50646 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50648 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
50655 \begin_layout Standard
50656 Checking the option
50659 \begin_inset space ~
50663 \begin_inset space ~
50667 \begin_inset space ~
50672 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
50675 \begin_layout Section
50677 \begin_inset Index idx
50680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50689 \begin_layout Subsection
50693 \begin_layout Subsubsection
50697 \begin_layout Standard
50700 Cursor follows scrollbar
50702 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when
50706 \begin_layout Standard
50707 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
50708 If you set the value to zero, the thickness of the cursor scales relative
50709 to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
50712 \begin_layout Standard
50715 Scroll below end of document
50717 is self-explanatory.
50720 \begin_layout Standard
50721 In \SpecialChar LyX
50722 one can jump from word to word by pressing
50729 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
50731 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
50732 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
50733 \change_inserted -712698321 1578924606
50737 \begin_layout Standard
50739 \change_inserted -712698321 1607270592
50742 Keep change tracking markup on copy and paste
50744 is only relevant in documents that
50749 In such documents, change-tracked text will be copied and pasted as is
50758 markup) with this option selected.
50759 It the option is not selected, pasted text will be inserted without any
50761 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50765 \begin_inset Quotes els
50769 \begin_inset Quotes ers
50773 This also applies to wrapping to\SpecialChar breakableslash
50774 dissolving from insets.
50779 track changes, pasted text is
50784 \begin_inset Quotes els
50788 \begin_inset Quotes ers
50791 notwithstanding the state of this option.
50796 \begin_layout Standard
50799 Sort environments alphabetically
50801 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
50804 \begin_layout Standard
50807 Group environments by their category
50809 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
50812 \begin_layout Standard
50817 options determine the editing style for math macros, see the section
50826 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509726
50830 \begin_layout Standard
50832 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509987
50835 Search drive for cited files
50837 allows \SpecialChar LyX
50838 to query your disk for cited documents when using the
50841 \begin_inset space ~
50845 \begin_inset space ~
50849 \begin_inset space ~
50853 \begin_inset space ~
50856 Content\SpecialChar ldots
50859 context menu on a citation.
50864 field determines the search pattern.
50866 \begin_inset space ~
50870 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50872 reference "subsec:Opening-cited-documents"
50881 \begin_layout Subsubsection
50885 \begin_layout Standard
50886 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
50891 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
50892 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen; the text then
50896 \begin_layout Subsection
50898 \begin_inset Index idx
50901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50908 \begin_inset Index idx
50911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50912 Settings ! Shortcuts
50920 \begin_layout Standard
50925 specifies the file to be used to bind a \SpecialChar LyX
50927 Several binding files are available, among them:
50930 \begin_layout Description
50931 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
50934 \begin_layout Description
50935 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
50947 \begin_layout Description
50948 mac.bind a set of bindings for
50951 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50959 \begin_layout Standard
50960 There are also binding files designed for special document classes, like
50965 , and binding files for special languages.
50966 The names of language binding files begin with a language code, e.
50967 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50971 \begin_inset space \space{}
50975 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50979 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50983 If you use \SpecialChar LyX
50984 in a certain language, \SpecialChar LyX
50985 will try to use the appropriate binding
50989 \begin_layout Standard
50990 Some binding files, like
50994 , only have a limited scope.
50995 When looking at the end of the file
50999 , you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
51002 \begin_layout Standard
51006 \begin_inset space ~
51010 \begin_inset space ~
51015 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function
51016 in the selected key binding file.
51019 \begin_layout Subsubsection
51021 \begin_inset CommandInset label
51023 name "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
51028 \begin_inset Index idx
51031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51032 Key Bindings ! Editing
51040 \begin_layout Standard
51041 To add new or modify existing key bindings to your own taste you can use
51042 the table in the dialog that lists all \SpecialChar LyX
51043 functions and the bound shortcuts.
51044 To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog
51047 Show key-bindings containing
51050 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
51051 Insert there for example as keyword
51052 \begin_inset Quotes eld
51056 \begin_inset Quotes erd
51059 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different
51060 functions that contain
51061 \begin_inset Quotes eld
51065 \begin_inset Quotes erd
51069 As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut.
51070 All \SpecialChar LyX
51071 functions are also listed in the file
51076 that you will find in the
51083 \begin_layout Standard
51084 For example, to add the shortcut
51092 , select the function and press the
51097 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
51098 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
51101 \begin_layout Standard
51102 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
51103 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the \SpecialChar LyX
51108 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337868
51110 \change_inserted -131811572 1600337869
51115 ” and following it with the different function names as a semicolon separated
51118 will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document
51122 \begin_layout Standard
51123 If you don't like a particular shortcut, you can remove it.
51126 \begin_layout Standard
51127 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with
51129 The syntax of the entries is:
51132 \begin_layout Standard
51138 \begin_inset Quotes eld
51142 \begin_inset Quotes erd
51146 \begin_inset Quotes eld
51151 \begin_inset Quotes erd
51157 \begin_layout Standard
51158 Note, though, that the key combination definition uses a specific syntax.
51159 This applies to the designators of specific modifier keys (e.
51160 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51187 , respectively) as well as to the other keys.
51188 Note particularly that you cannot use non-alphanumeric characters directly
51189 in the definition of the key combination, but must use commands following
51190 the Xlib standard instead (please refer to the existing bind files for
51192 So if you wanted to bind a command to the key combination
51196 , you needed to specify it as
51201 If you use the dialog to edit key bindings, you don't have to care for
51204 transforms your input to the correct syntax.
51207 \begin_layout Subsection
51209 \begin_inset CommandInset label
51211 name "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
51216 \begin_inset Index idx
51219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51226 \begin_inset Index idx
51229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51230 Settings ! Keyboard Map
51238 \begin_layout Standard
51239 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
51240 For the case where this is not possible, \SpecialChar LyX
51241 provides keyboard maps.
51242 If, for example, you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it
51243 is a Romanian one, you can enable
51246 \begin_inset space ~
51250 \begin_inset space ~
51255 and select the keyboard map file named
51262 \begin_layout Standard
51271 keyboard map and, if you use the
51275 bindings, you can select the first and second with
51278 arg "keymap-primary"
51284 arg "keymap-secondary"
51287 respectively or toggle between them with
51290 arg "keymap-toggle"
51296 \begin_layout Standard
51297 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
51300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51305 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all
51314 \begin_layout Standard
51315 You can also specify the mouse
51317 Wheel scrolling speed
51320 The standard value is 1.0; higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones
51324 Middle mouse button pasting
51326 you can determine if pressing the middle mouse button (or the mouse wheel)
51327 inserts the content of the clipboard.
51330 \begin_layout Standard
51338 \begin_inset space ~
51342 \begin_inset space ~
51347 you can select a key for zooming.
51348 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated, the text is zoomed.
51351 \begin_layout Subsection
51355 \begin_layout Standard
51356 Input completion is described in section
51357 \begin_inset space ~
51361 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51363 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
51370 \begin_layout Section
51372 \begin_inset CommandInset label
51379 \begin_inset Index idx
51382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51389 \begin_inset Index idx
51392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51401 \begin_layout Standard
51402 The paths to the various resources used by \SpecialChar LyX
51403 are normally determined during
51405 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
51408 \begin_layout Description
51410 \begin_inset space ~
51413 directory This is \SpecialChar LyX
51414 's working directory.
51415 It is the default when you
51426 \begin_inset space ~
51434 \begin_layout Description
51436 \begin_inset space ~
51439 templates This directory
51440 \change_inserted -712698321 1553354019
51441 contains the templates that are shown
51442 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354025
51443 will be opened when you use the menu
51444 \change_inserted -712698321 1553354026
51449 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
51451 \begin_inset space ~
51455 \begin_inset space ~
51463 \begin_layout Description
51465 \begin_inset space ~
51468 files This directory
51469 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354035
51470 will be opened when you use the
51471 \change_inserted -712698321 1553354048
51472 contains the example files that are listed in
51475 \change_deleted -712698321 1553352959
51484 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
51486 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352950
51488 \change_deleted -712698321 1553352963
51494 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354004
51496 \begin_inset Newline newline
51500 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
51503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51512 button does not exist when using \SpecialChar LyX
51513 on Mac OS and Windows systems.
51523 \begin_layout Description
51525 \begin_inset space ~
51529 \begin_inset Index idx
51532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51538 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
51539 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
51540 \begin_inset space ~
51544 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51546 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
51554 will be used to save the backups.
51555 \begin_inset Newline newline
51558 Backup files have the ending
51559 \begin_inset Quotes eld
51563 \begin_inset Quotes erd
51569 \begin_layout Description
51571 \begin_inset space ~
51574 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
51575 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to \SpecialChar LyX
51577 \begin_inset Newline newline
51584 You add a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
51590 You can edit this file with the program
51599 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for \SpecialChar LyX
51600 in its preferences under
51603 \begin_inset space ~
51609 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in
51614 and click on the \SpecialChar LyX
51616 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position
51617 in your \SpecialChar LyX
51623 and \SpecialChar LyX
51624 need to be running the same time.
51625 \begin_inset Newline newline
51628 The pipe is also used for the
51632 feature, see section
51633 \begin_inset space ~
51637 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51639 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
51644 \begin_inset Newline newline
51647 To use the \SpecialChar LyX
51648 Server-Pipe on Windows, you must use this pipe name:
51649 \begin_inset Newline newline
51665 \begin_layout Description
51667 \begin_inset space ~
51670 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
51673 \begin_layout Description
51675 \begin_inset space ~
51678 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
51679 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want
51680 to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
51683 \begin_layout Description
51685 \begin_inset space ~
51688 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
51694 You only need to specify it if you are using
51698 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative
51700 For \SpecialChar LyX
51705 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying
51709 \begin_layout Description
51711 \begin_inset space ~
51714 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
51715 When \SpecialChar LyX
51716 needs to use an external program, it looks in this list to see where
51717 to find it on the system.
51718 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when \SpecialChar LyX
51720 is configured; so you normally don't have to modify it.
51722 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51726 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51729 Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external
51730 programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
51733 \begin_layout Description
51735 \begin_inset space ~
51738 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files
51739 which are included in a \SpecialChar LyX
51740 document via commands in \SpecialChar TeX
51741 code or in the document
51743 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by
51745 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator
51746 of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
51747 If files are included, the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be
51748 scanned for the input files.
51749 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered
51750 to be relative to the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
51752 It is recommended that you always include '.' as one of the paths; otherwise
51753 compilation may fail for some documents.
51756 \begin_layout Section
51760 \begin_layout Standard
51761 Here you can insert your
51770 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking, as described
51772 \begin_inset space ~
51776 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51778 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
51782 , to mark changes you make as yours.
51785 \begin_layout Section
51787 \begin_inset Index idx
51790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51791 Language ! Settings
51797 \begin_inset Index idx
51800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51801 Settings ! Language
51809 \begin_layout Subsection
51811 \begin_inset CommandInset label
51813 name "subsec:Prefs-Language"
51820 \begin_layout Description
51822 \begin_inset space ~
51826 \begin_inset space ~
51829 language Here you can select the language for \SpecialChar LyX
51831 You can find its actual translation status here:
51832 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51834 target "https://www.lyx.org/I18n"
51840 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708959
51844 \begin_layout Subsubsection
51846 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708986
51847 LaTeX Language Support
51852 \begin_layout Description
51854 \begin_inset space ~
51857 package determines which \SpecialChar LaTeX
51858 package should be loaded to handle language issues.
51859 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation
51860 as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
51861 \begin_inset Quotes eld
51865 \begin_inset Quotes erd
51869 \begin_inset Quotes eld
51873 \begin_inset Quotes erd
51877 The most widespread language package is
51882 \begin_inset Index idx
51885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51892 ; it is the default language package in classic \SpecialChar LaTeX
51894 More recent typesetting engines such as Xe\SpecialChar TeX
51895 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
51896 come with the alternative
51902 \begin_inset Index idx
51905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51907 packages ! polyglossia
51912 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
51913 Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not
51919 The available selections are described in section
51920 \begin_inset space ~
51924 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51926 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
51933 \begin_layout Description
51935 \begin_inset space ~
51939 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708374
51940 If a special \SpecialChar LaTeX
51941 -package is needed to write in a certain document language,
51943 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708374
51947 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708377
51951 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708382
51953 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708384
51957 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708639
51958 that is used to switch to a different language
51959 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708410
51960 to start the package
51964 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708611
51965 This might be useful if you want to use a different command with
51969 (which provides several alternative commands with different behavior),
51970 or if you use a custom language package with specific commands, such as
51973 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
51977 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
51985 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708616
51993 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708621
51996 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
51998 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
52002 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
52020 selectlanguage{$$lang}
52021 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708571
52028 is a placeholder that is substituted with the respective language name
52029 in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
52034 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708571
52039 , this setting is ignored.
52044 \begin_layout Description
52046 \begin_inset space ~
52050 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857836
52057 \change_inserted -712698321 1563857869
52058 Use this if the language switch set in
52062 needs to be explicitly ended, as in
52066 's alternative command
52070 begin{otherlanguage*}\SpecialChar ldots
52071 \SpecialChar allowbreak
52074 end{otherlanguage*}
52078 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708866
52079 Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start
52080 command toggles the package on and off
52081 \change_inserted -712698321 1563858041
52082 Empty by default, as
52086 selectlanguage{$$lang}
52088 does not need to be explicitly ended (the switch remains valid until the
52093 selectlanguage{$$lang}
52099 \change_inserted -712698321 1563857868
52104 , this setting is ignored.
52109 \begin_layout Description
52111 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708996
52113 \begin_inset space ~
52117 \begin_inset space ~
52120 separator Defines the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point
52124 \begin_layout Description
52126 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708996
52128 \begin_inset space ~
52132 \begin_inset space ~
52135 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
52141 \begin_layout Description
52143 \begin_inset space ~
52147 \begin_inset space ~
52151 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709051
52153 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709052
52156 this option is set, the languages used in the document will be added
52157 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709127
52160 to the document class options
52161 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709259
52162 rather than the language package options.
52163 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709186
52167 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709191
52168 so that they can be used by all \SpecialChar LaTeX
52170 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709305
52171 Since the document class passes all options in gets to all loaded \SpecialChar LaTeX
52173 all language-aware packages will be informed about the used languages this
52178 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709264
52179 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
52188 \begin_layout Description
52190 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709314
52192 \begin_inset space ~
52196 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709328
52198 \begin_inset space ~
52202 \begin_inset space ~
52206 \begin_inset space ~
52212 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709331
52214 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709331
52217 this option is set,
52218 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709808
52219 the language switch defined in
52222 \begin_inset space ~
52227 is output at the beginning of the document, thereby explicitly switching
52228 to the document language.
52229 This assures that the correct language is used in any case.
52230 This might be needed if you use a non-default
52233 \begin_inset space ~
52238 or if a package resets the document language.
52239 If not set, the language that is active at document start is used (this
52240 usually should be the document language).
52241 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709548
52242 documents start with the chosen document language.
52243 When this option is not set, the
52246 \begin_inset space ~
52251 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
52253 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
52256 \begin_inset space ~
52266 \begin_layout Description
52268 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709354
52270 \begin_inset space ~
52274 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709358
52276 \begin_inset space ~
52280 \begin_inset space ~
52284 \begin_inset space ~
52290 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709361
52294 \begin_inset space ~
52298 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709392
52299 Set document language explicitly
52305 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709618
52307 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709618
52313 \begin_inset space ~
52319 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709625
52321 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709626
52325 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709628
52327 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709628
52330 the end of the document.
52331 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709816
52335 \begin_layout Subsubsection
52336 \paragraph_spacing single
52338 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709833
52344 \begin_layout Description
52346 \begin_inset space ~
52350 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709847
52352 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709845
52356 \begin_inset space ~
52360 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709877
52362 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709877
52364 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709878
52368 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709882
52371 in a language different
52372 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709886
52374 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709886
52377 the document language will be
52378 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709907
52379 marked (by default with a blue
52382 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709911
52384 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709911
52388 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709927
52392 \begin_layout Description
52394 \change_inserted -712698321 1563711969
52396 \begin_inset space ~
52400 \begin_inset space ~
52404 \begin_inset space ~
52407 language If set, \SpecialChar LyX
52408 will switch the input language if the keyboard map is
52409 switched via the operating system.
52410 This is particularly useful if you switch between languages with different
52412 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52415 g., English and Hebrew: in this case, switching the keyboard to Hebrew will
52416 automatically switch the input language to Hebrew as well, and vice versa).
52421 \begin_layout Description
52423 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709926
52425 \begin_inset space ~
52429 \begin_inset space ~
52432 support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL),
52433 like Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi.
52438 \begin_layout Description
52440 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710132
52442 \begin_inset space ~
52446 \change_deleted -712698321 1563710132
52448 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710132
52452 \begin_inset space ~
52456 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710265
52457 Here you can define how cursor movement (with the arrow keys) behaves
52458 \change_deleted -712698321 1563710266
52460 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710267
52464 \change_deleted -712698321 1563710171
52466 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710286
52467 scripts with right-to-left direction (e.g., Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi).
52469 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857456
52470 , you can define if the left and right arrow keys move the cursor visually
52471 to the left or right, respectively, or logically.
52473 \change_inserted -712698321 1563859701
52478 \begin_layout Standard
52483 means that the cursor
52484 \change_inserted -712698321 1563859940
52485 follows the logic of the text direction, and the arrows' direction relates
52486 to the directionality of the main paragraph language.
52488 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52491 g., in embedded right-to-left text in a left-to-right paragraph (say, Hebrew
52492 embedded in English), the cursor starts at the right (that is, at the
52496 of the embedded passage in the right-to-left logic) when coming from the
52498 The meaning of the key is thus swapped for that part; right arrow in this
52499 specific case always means: move
52503 in text (even if this means:
52509 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857456
52510 is moved to the left when pressing the right arrow key
52511 \change_inserted -712698321 1563859705
52512 This setting might be useful in texts that mix left-to-right and right-to-left
52513 scripts, since the cursor then follows a coherent
52514 \begin_inset Quotes eld
52518 \begin_inset Quotes erd
52525 \begin_layout Standard
52527 \change_inserted -712698321 1563860084
52532 means: always move to the direction towards which the arrows really point.
52533 In this case, in embedded right-to-left text in a left-to-right paragraph,
52534 the cursor starts at the left (in the text logic:
52538 ) when coming from the left.
52539 The visual meaning of the key is thus maintained in all cases, at the expense
52541 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857456
52542 and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
52543 \change_inserted -712698321 1563858627
52548 \begin_layout Subsubsection
52550 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710235
52554 \begin_layout Description
52556 \change_inserted -712698321 1563776004
52558 \begin_inset space ~
52562 \begin_inset space ~
52565 separator Defines the default decimal separator for use in tables (decimal
52566 separator alignment).
52567 By default, the appropriate character for the current language is selected
52569 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52572 g., dot for English, comma for German), but you can also specify a specific
52573 (static) custom character here.
52576 \begin_layout Description
52578 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709001
52580 \begin_inset space ~
52584 \begin_inset space ~
52587 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
52593 \begin_layout Subsection
52597 \begin_layout Standard
52598 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
52599 \begin_inset space ~
52603 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
52605 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
52612 \begin_layout Section
52616 \begin_layout Subsection
52618 \begin_inset CommandInset label
52620 name "subsec:General-output"
52627 \begin_layout Description
52629 \begin_inset space ~
52632 search Commands that will be used for the menu
52634 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
52636 \begin_inset space ~
52642 For a detailed description see section
52644 Reverse DVI/PDF search
52649 \begin_inset space ~
52657 \begin_layout Description
52659 \begin_inset space ~
52662 Options Options for the program
52666 that is used for the export format
52671 \begin_inset space ~
52675 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
52677 reference "subsec:Export"
52682 Possible options are listed in the
52687 \begin_inset Newline newline
52691 \begin_inset Flex URL
52694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52696 https://www.tug.org/texinfohtml/dvips.html
52706 \begin_layout Description
52708 \begin_inset space ~
52712 \begin_inset space ~
52715 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using
52718 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
52719 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
52721 \begin_inset space ~
52727 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
52730 \begin_layout Description
52732 \change_deleted -712698321 1534601711
52734 \begin_inset space ~
52738 \begin_inset Index idx
52741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52748 \begin_inset Index idx
52751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52752 Settings ! Date format
52757 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
52758 \begin_inset Newline newline
52762 \begin_inset Flex URL
52765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52767 http://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man1/date.1.html
52773 \begin_inset Newline newline
52776 For example the format
52777 \begin_inset Newline newline
52781 \begin_inset Newline newline
52784 prints the date as day/month/year.
52789 \begin_layout Description
52791 \begin_inset space ~
52795 \begin_inset space ~
52798 export Setting what \SpecialChar LyX
52799 is allowed to overwrite on export.
52802 \begin_layout Subsection
52808 \begin_inset CommandInset label
52810 name "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
52815 \begin_inset Index idx
52818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52819 Settings ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
52828 \begin_layout Description
52830 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413534
52832 \begin_inset space ~
52840 \begin_inset space ~
52844 \begin_inset space ~
52847 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
52852 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
52873 are used for Cyrillic.
52874 Combinations of the encodings are possible, like
52875 \begin_inset Quotes eld
52883 \begin_inset Quotes erd
52887 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages
52889 sets up in the background.
52890 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
52895 \begin_layout Description
52897 \begin_inset space ~
52901 \begin_inset space ~
52905 \begin_inset space ~
52909 \begin_inset space ~
52912 options They only have an effect when the program
52916 is used as DVI-viewer, read its manual to find out more.
52919 \begin_layout Standard
52920 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
52921 But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the
52922 manuals of the applications.
52925 \begin_layout Description
52927 \begin_inset space ~
52930 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography, see section
52931 \begin_inset space ~
52935 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
52937 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
52944 \begin_layout Description
52946 \begin_inset space ~
52949 generation Settings for the generation of the index, see section
52950 \begin_inset space ~
52954 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
52956 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
52963 \begin_layout Description
52965 \begin_inset space ~
52968 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature, see section
52969 \begin_inset space ~
52973 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
52975 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
52982 \begin_layout Description
52988 \begin_inset space ~
52991 command Command for the program
52993 Check\SpecialChar TeX
52996 that is described in the section
52998 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
53003 Additional Features
53008 \begin_layout Standard
53009 There are additionally the following options:
53012 \begin_layout Description
53014 \begin_inset space ~
53018 \begin_inset space ~
53022 \begin_inset space ~
53026 \begin_inset space ~
53031 \begin_inset space ~
53034 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that
53035 \begin_inset Quotes eld
53041 \begin_inset Quotes erd
53045 \begin_inset Quotes eld
53049 \begin_inset Quotes erd
53052 to separate folders.
53053 This option is enabled by default when you use \SpecialChar LyX
53055 \begin_inset Index idx
53058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53065 \begin_inset Index idx
53068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53077 \begin_layout Description
53079 \begin_inset space ~
53083 \begin_inset space ~
53087 \begin_inset space ~
53091 \begin_inset space ~
53095 \begin_inset space ~
53099 \begin_inset space ~
53102 changes Removes all manually set
53108 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
53109 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
53111 \begin_inset space ~
53116 dialog when changing the document class.
53119 \begin_layout Section
53121 \begin_inset space ~
53125 \begin_inset Index idx
53128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53137 \begin_layout Subsection
53139 \begin_inset CommandInset label
53141 name "subsec:Converters"
53146 \begin_inset Index idx
53149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53158 \begin_layout Standard
53159 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material
53160 from one format to another.
53161 You can modify converters or create new ones.
53162 To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the
53169 \begin_inset space ~
53174 field and press the
53179 To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format
53183 \begin_inset space ~
53188 drop-down list, modify the
53192 field and press the
53199 \begin_layout Standard
53202 Converter File Cache
53208 , conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
53210 Maximum Age (in days
53213 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen
53214 a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
53217 \begin_layout Standard
53218 More about converters, like the flags that can be used in the converter
53219 definition, is described in the section
53230 \begin_layout Subsection
53232 \begin_inset CommandInset label
53234 name "sec:File-Formats"
53239 \begin_inset Index idx
53242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53249 \begin_inset Index idx
53252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53261 \begin_layout Standard
53262 Here you find the list of defined file formats that \SpecialChar LyX
53272 programs that should be used for certain formats.
53275 \begin_layout Standard
53276 You can also define the
53278 Default output format
53280 that is used when you use
53282 View, Update, View Master Document
53286 Update Master Document
53292 menu or the toolbar.
53295 \begin_layout Standard
53296 More about formats and their options is described in the section
53307 \begin_layout Standard
53308 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in \SpecialChar LyX
53310 directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it
53311 to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
53312 This is done by specifying a
53317 More about this is described in the section
53328 \begin_layout Chapter
53329 Units available in \SpecialChar LyX
53331 \begin_inset Index idx
53334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53341 \begin_inset CommandInset label
53343 name "chap:Units-available-in"
53350 \begin_layout Standard
53352 \begin_inset space ~
53356 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
53358 reference "tab:Units"
53362 explains all the units available in \SpecialChar LyX
53363 and used in this documentation.
53366 \begin_layout Standard
53367 \begin_inset Float table
53374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53375 \begin_inset Caption Standard
53377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53378 \begin_inset CommandInset label
53392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53393 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
53399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53401 \begin_inset Tabular
53402 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="21" columns="3">
53403 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
53404 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
53405 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle" width="50col%">
53406 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
53408 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53417 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53426 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53438 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53447 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53452 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
53456 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
53464 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53475 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53484 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53489 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
53493 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
53501 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53512 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53521 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53530 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53541 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53550 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53555 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
53559 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
53563 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
53571 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53582 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53591 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53604 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53615 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53624 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53637 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53648 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53657 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53666 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53677 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53686 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53695 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53706 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53715 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53720 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
53724 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
53732 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53743 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53752 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53757 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
53761 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
53769 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53780 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53789 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53794 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
53798 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
53806 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53817 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53826 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53830 scaled point (65536
53831 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
53835 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
53843 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53854 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53863 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53872 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53885 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53894 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53898 % of height between baselines of two subsequent text lines
53903 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53916 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53925 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53934 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53947 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53956 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53965 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53978 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53987 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53996 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54009 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54018 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54022 % of original image width
54027 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
54030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54038 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54047 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54056 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
54059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54069 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54078 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54087 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
54090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54111 \begin_layout Standard
54112 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
54115 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
54122 \begin_layout Bibliography
54123 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54124 LatexCommand bibitem
54131 The \SpecialChar LyX
54133 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54136 target "https://www.lyx.org/Credits"
54142 \begin_inset Newline newline
54146 \begin_inset Flex URL
54149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54151 https://www.lyx.org/Credits
54159 \begin_layout Bibliography
54160 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54161 LatexCommand bibitem
54162 key "latexcompanion"
54167 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
54169 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
54170 Companion Second Edition.
54173 Addison-Wesley, 2004
54176 \begin_layout Bibliography
54177 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54178 LatexCommand bibitem
54184 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
54187 A Guide to \SpecialChar LaTeX
54191 Addison-Wesley, 2003
54194 \begin_layout Bibliography
54195 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54196 LatexCommand bibitem
54205 : A Document Preparation System.
54208 Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994
54211 \begin_layout Bibliography
54212 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54213 LatexCommand bibitem
54223 The \SpecialChar TeX
54227 Addison-Wesley, 1984
54230 \begin_layout Bibliography
54231 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54232 LatexCommand bibitem
54238 The \SpecialChar TeX
54240 \begin_inset Newline newline
54244 \begin_inset Flex URL
54247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54249 https://ctan.org/topic
54257 \begin_layout Bibliography
54258 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54259 LatexCommand bibitem
54265 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
54267 \begin_inset Newline newline
54271 \begin_inset Flex URL
54274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54276 http://www.tex.ac.uk/faq/
54284 \begin_layout Bibliography
54285 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54286 LatexCommand bibitem
54293 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54295 name "Documentation"
54296 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
54303 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
54307 \begin_inset Newline newline
54311 \begin_inset Flex URL
54314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54316 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
54324 \begin_layout Bibliography
54325 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54326 LatexCommand bibitem
54333 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54335 name "Documentation"
54336 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
54341 how to use the program
54343 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
54347 \begin_inset Newline newline
54351 \begin_inset Flex URL
54354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54356 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
54364 \begin_layout Bibliography
54365 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54366 LatexCommand bibitem
54373 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54375 name "Documentation"
54376 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf"
54381 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
54387 \begin_inset Index idx
54390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54392 packages ! biblatex
54398 \begin_inset Newline newline
54402 \begin_inset Flex URL
54405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54407 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf
54415 \begin_layout Bibliography
54416 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54417 LatexCommand bibitem
54424 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54426 name "Documentation"
54427 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf"
54432 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
54438 \begin_inset Index idx
54441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54449 \begin_inset Newline newline
54453 \begin_inset Flex URL
54456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54458 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf
54466 \begin_layout Bibliography
54467 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54468 LatexCommand bibitem
54475 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54477 name "Documentation"
54478 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
54488 \begin_inset Newline newline
54492 \begin_inset Flex URL
54495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54497 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
54505 \begin_layout Bibliography
54506 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54507 LatexCommand bibitem
54508 key "makeindex-man"
54514 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54517 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi"
54527 \begin_inset Newline newline
54531 \begin_inset Flex URL
54534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54536 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi
54544 \begin_layout Bibliography
54545 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54546 LatexCommand bibitem
54553 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54555 name "Documentation"
54556 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
54566 \begin_inset Newline newline
54570 \begin_inset Flex URL
54573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54575 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
54583 \begin_layout Bibliography
54584 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54585 LatexCommand bibitem
54592 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54594 name "Documentation"
54595 target "https://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
54600 of the AMS \SpecialChar LaTeX
54602 \begin_inset Newline newline
54606 \begin_inset Flex URL
54609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54611 https://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
54619 \begin_layout Bibliography
54620 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54621 LatexCommand bibitem
54628 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54630 name "Documentation"
54631 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
54636 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
54642 \begin_inset Index idx
54645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54653 \begin_inset Newline newline
54657 \begin_inset Flex URL
54660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54662 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
54670 \begin_layout Bibliography
54671 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54672 LatexCommand bibitem
54679 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54681 name "Documentation"
54682 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
54687 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
54693 \begin_inset Index idx
54696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54698 packages ! enumitem
54704 \begin_inset Newline newline
54708 \begin_inset Flex URL
54711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54713 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
54721 \begin_layout Bibliography
54722 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54723 LatexCommand bibitem
54730 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54732 name "Documentation"
54733 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
54738 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
54744 \begin_inset Index idx
54747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54749 packages ! fancyhdr
54755 \begin_inset Newline newline
54759 \begin_inset Flex URL
54762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54764 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
54772 \begin_layout Bibliography
54773 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54774 LatexCommand bibitem
54781 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54783 name "Documentation"
54784 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf"
54789 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
54795 \begin_inset Index idx
54798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54800 packages ! hyperref
54806 \begin_inset Newline newline
54810 \begin_inset Flex URL
54813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54815 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf
54823 \begin_layout Bibliography
54824 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54825 LatexCommand bibitem
54832 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54834 name "Documentation"
54835 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/microtype/microtype.pdf"
54840 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
54846 \begin_inset Index idx
54849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54851 packages ! microtype
54857 \begin_inset Newline newline
54861 \begin_inset Flex URL
54864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54866 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/microtype/microtype.pdf
54874 \begin_layout Bibliography
54875 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54876 LatexCommand bibitem
54883 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54885 name "Documentation"
54886 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
54891 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
54897 \begin_inset Index idx
54900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54908 \begin_inset Newline newline
54912 \begin_inset Flex URL
54915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54917 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
54925 \begin_layout Bibliography
54926 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54927 LatexCommand bibitem
54934 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54936 name "Documentation"
54937 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
54942 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
54948 \begin_inset Index idx
54951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54953 packages ! prettyref
54959 \begin_inset Newline newline
54963 \begin_inset Flex URL
54966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54968 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
54976 \begin_layout Bibliography
54977 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54978 LatexCommand bibitem
54985 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54987 name "Documentation"
54988 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
54993 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
54999 \begin_inset Index idx
55002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55004 packages ! refstyle
55010 \begin_inset Newline newline
55014 \begin_inset Flex URL
55017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55019 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
55027 \begin_layout Bibliography
55028 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
55029 LatexCommand bibitem
55036 \begin_inset CommandInset href
55039 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
55044 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
55046 \begin_inset Newline newline
55050 \begin_inset Flex URL
55053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55055 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
55063 \begin_layout Bibliography
55064 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
55065 LatexCommand bibitem
55072 \begin_inset CommandInset href
55075 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
55080 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
55082 \begin_inset Newline newline
55086 \begin_inset Flex URL
55089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55091 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
55099 \begin_layout Bibliography
55100 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
55101 LatexCommand bibitem
55108 \begin_inset CommandInset href
55111 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
55116 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
55117 for Cyrillic languages:
55118 \begin_inset Newline newline
55122 \begin_inset Flex URL
55125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55127 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
55135 \begin_layout Bibliography
55136 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
55137 LatexCommand bibitem
55144 \begin_inset CommandInset href
55147 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
55152 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
55154 \begin_inset Newline newline
55158 \begin_inset Flex URL
55161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55163 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
55171 \begin_layout Bibliography
55172 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
55173 LatexCommand bibitem
55180 \begin_inset CommandInset href
55183 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
55188 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
55190 \begin_inset Newline newline
55194 \begin_inset Flex URL
55197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55199 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
55207 \begin_layout Bibliography
55208 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
55209 LatexCommand bibitem
55216 \begin_inset CommandInset href
55219 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
55224 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
55226 \begin_inset Newline newline
55230 \begin_inset Flex URL
55233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55235 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
55243 \begin_layout Standard
55244 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
55251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55278 \begin_inset Note Note
55281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55288 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
55289 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following
55290 bibliography is the second one:
55298 \begin_layout Standard
55299 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
55300 LatexCommand bibtex
55301 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
55302 options "biblio/alphadin"
55309 \begin_layout Standard
55310 The above bibliography is created from a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
55314 \begin_layout Standard
55318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55324 pagedeclaration}[1]{
55327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55333 hyperlink{page.#1}{page
55341 \begin_inset Note Note
55344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55345 This command makes the page number a clickable hyperlink, see sec.
55346 \begin_inset space ~
55350 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
55352 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Options"
55364 \begin_layout Standard
55365 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
55366 LatexCommand printnomenclature
55372 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
55373 LatexCommand printindex